economics & decision science - mcgraw-hill books - author books

Economics & Decision Science

M c G R AW - H I L L 2 0 0 9 C ATA L O G

Welcome to McGraw-Hill’s 2009 Economics & Decision Science Catalog. Inside this catalog, you will find a wide selection of McGraw-Hill latest academic publications. Apart from those published from the US, we have also included publications from Asia as well as from our subsidiaries in Australia, India and United Kingdom. For the benefit of students, widely adopted textbooks are made available as low-priced McGraw-Hill International Editions (see titles in this catalog tagged with “International Edition”).

EXAMINATION COPY REQUEST

Teaching professionals who wish to consider McGraw-Hill titles for textbook adoption may request for an examination copy for review. To request for a review copy:

contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia

(Note: All requests for examination copies are subject to approval. McGraw-Hill reserves the right to refuse any requests that do not relate to teaching).

HOW TO ORDER

McGraw-Hill books and International Editions are easily available through your local bookstores. In case of difficulty in purchasing our publications, please contact the local McGraw-Hill office (see inside back cover) or send your orders to:

McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)60 Tuas Basin LinkSingapore 638775Tel: (65) 6863 1580Tel: (65) 6868 8188 (Customer Service Hotline)Fax: (65) 6862 3354Email: [email protected]

A NOTE TO LIBRARIANSPlease place your orders through your regular local Library Supplier/Contractor. For further assistance, kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) representative.

INVITATION TO PUBLISH

McGraw-Hill is continuously sourcing for quality manuscript for the academic and professional markets in Asia for inclusion in our global publishing program. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email us directly in Singapore at [email protected] if you are planning to write a book.

MAILING LIST

If you wish to receive up-to-date information on McGraw-Hill’s new publications regularly, please submit your particulars on the mailing list form (see back pages) and return to us by fax or mail.

Features and Functions

Test Creation

Online Test Management

Online Scoring and Reporting

EZ Test is designed to make it simple for you to select questions from McGraw-Hill test banks. You can use a single McGraw-Hill test bank, or easily choose questions from multiple McGraw-Hill test banks.

EZ Test supports the use of following question types:

True or False Fill In the Blank Short Answer

Yes or No Numeric Response Survey

Multiple Choice Matching Essay

Check All That Apply Ranking

Uses variables to create algorithmic questions for any question type.

You can create multiple versions of the same test.

You can scramble questions to create different versions of your test.

Automated scoring for most of EZ test’s numerous questions types.

How do you get it?

To learn if it is available with your book, contact your local McGraw-Hill Education Representatives or email [email protected].

Your Partner in Test Generation

Imagine being able to create and access your test anywhere, at any time without installing the testing software. Now, with the newest release of EZ Test Online, instructors can select questions from multiple McGraw-Hill test banks, author their own and then either print the test for paper distribution or give it online.

homework managerwww.mhhe.com/hm

How instructors use itInstructors can develop, publish and deliver self-scoring algorithmic assessments (homework, quizzes, or exams). Problems structure available in Homework Manager can be easily identifi ed in the text by the Homework Manager icon. Homework Manager records students’ scores and instructor will know how the class performed in the exam and which topics students struggled with.

How students use itWith algorithmically generated questions and instant grading and feedback, students develop problem-solving skills and are better prepared for exams. Homework Manager provides students with online solutions to end-of-chapter problems. The questions are linked to textbook which make it easy for them to refl ect the topics covered in class or access assessments (homework, quizzes, or exams) their instructor has created.

Homework Manager is available for these subjects

Accounting

Finance

Business Statistics

Introduction to Business

Operations Management

Homework Manager is powered by Brownstone Learning.

The most powerfulHomework Manager

system available

Are you looking for tools to build custom homework assignments, tests or quizzes that can be completed either online or using pencil and paper?

McGraw-Hill/Irwin’s Homework Manager is a web-based assessment system that pulls problem structures directly from the end-of-chapter material using algorithmic technology, providing a limitless supply of online self-graded practice for students. That way, students can work on fresh problems with the same problem structure until they master the topics covered. Each student also receives immediate scoring and feedback from the program to guide their studies.

06-homework mgr.indd 1 21/11/07 11:41:17

BSG and GLO-BUS are Fun, Easy, and Effective

Used by more than 600 schools around the world and played by more than 450,000 students, BSG and GLO-BUS are well accepted strategy simulations used by numerous educational institutions worldwide. Incorporating a strategy simulation like BSG or GLO-BUS in a course is an effective and powerful way for students to learn how to apply and use core concepts covered in the text chapters. Professors who teach strategy courses are finding that simulations are every bit as effective as case analysis in providing students a means of applying what they have read about in the text chapters.

Take a Virtual Tour and Demo NOW! Visit http://www.mhhe.com/irwin/BSG_Glo-Bus/

BSG and GLO-BUS are two strategy simulations giving students a competitive advantage.

www.bsg-online.com

www.glo-bus.com

The Business Strategy Game (BSG) is McGraw-Hill/Irwin’s online strategy simulation modeled around athletic footwear industry.

GLO-BUS is McGraw-Hill/Irwin’s online strategy simulation modeled around digital camera industry.

course management systemswww.blackboard.com / www.webct.com

How instructors use itLoad McGraw-Hill content into your platform and you will have a fully populated course online. You can then customize the content to match your syllabus. You will also be able to assign specifi c exercises, quizzes, or readings to your students. Grades are posetd automatically to let you know how students are doing as a whole, or individually. Built-in communication allows you to conduct live chats, oversee bulletin board topics, and e-mail students who might need more help than others.

How students use itStudents can visit your online course via the Internet to check the coursework you have assigned. The platform will record the students’ progress through your course, which will enable you to see where they are studying most. Self-grading quizzes also indicate exactly where students need further review. The platform’s communicaiton system encourages student collaboration with features such as live chat rooms, asynchronous bulletin boards, or traditional e-mail.

Course Management Systems like Black-board and WebCT offer you another way to integrate digital McGraw-Hill content into your class. McGraw-Hill Online Learning Center content is formatted to save you hours of computer inputting.

03-pageout-cms.indd 1 21/11/07 11:38:01

CONTENTS

1

EconomicsAdvanced Microeconomics............................................... 60

Asian Economics ............................................................... 62

Econometrics .................................................................... 48

Economics for Business .....................................................39

Economics Issues.............................................................. 39

Environmental Economics ................................................. 47

Intermediate Macroeconomics .......................................... 42

Intermediate Microeconomics............................................ 43

International Economics .................................................... 53

Labor Economics ................................................................56

Managerial Economics ...................................................... 45

Mathematical Economics.................................................. 50

Money and Banking ........................................................... 52

Principles of Economics - Software .................................. 19

Principles of Economics - Supplementary ..........................20

Principles of Economics - Textbooks ................................ 10

Principles of Macroeconomics - Textbooks ...................... 22

Principles of Microeconomics - Textbooks ..........................28

Public Finance .................................................................. 58

Regional Economics .......................................................... 61

Survey of Economics ..........................................................35

Urban Economics ............................................................. 58

Operations/Decision

SciencesBusiness / Systems Dynamics .......................................... 65

Data Mining ....................................................................... 82

Introductory Operations Management .............................. 65

Logistics & Supply Chain Management (Prof Ref) .............84

Management Science - Text ...............................................69

Operation Research .......................................................... 83

Operations Strategy........................................................... 74

Production/Inventory Control ............................................. 72

Project Management ..........................................................73

Project Management (Prof Ref) ......................................... 84

Purchasing and Supply Chain Management .................... 77

Quality Control / Management ........................................... 75

Quantitative Method - Text ................................................. 71

Service Operations Management ...................................... 76

Upper Level Operations Management................................71

Business StatisticsBusiness Forecasting ....................................................... 97

Business Research Method.............................................. 98

Business Statistics - Supplements ................................... 95

Business Statistics - Textbook .......................................... 89

Linear Statistics/Regression .............................................. 99

Others ................................................................................ 99

Business MathBusiness Math ................................................................ 103

Business Math Supplements ............................................104

IndexesAuthor Indexes ................................................................ 111

Title Indexes .....................................................................105

CONTENTS

2

NEW TITLES

3

ECONOMICS

2010 Author ISBN-13 PageTaking Sides: Clashing Views on Economic Issues, 14e Bonello 9780073527307 39

Labor Economics, 5e Borjas 9780073511368 56

Essentials of Economics, 2e Brue 9780073511313 10, 35

Annual Editions: Economics, 35e Cole 9780073528564 20, 39

Essentials of Econometrics Gujarati 9780073375847 48

Macroeconomics, Brief Edition McConnell 9780077230975 22

Microeconomics, Brief Edition McConnell 9780077230982 28

Economics, 19e Samuelson 9780073511290 10

Macroeconomics, 19e Samuelson 9780073344225 22

Microeconomics, 19e Samuelson 9780073344232 29

ECONOMICS

2009 Author ISBN-13 PagePublic Economics, 2e [Aust] Abelson 9780070139053 59

Environmental Economics [UK] Anand 9780077115425 47

The Economics of European Integration, 3e [UK] Baldwin 9780077121631 61

Economics, 9e [UK] Begg 9780077117870 16

Foundations of Economics, 4e [UK] Begg 9780077121884 36

Principles of Macroeconomics, 2e [Aust] Bernanke 9780070135277 25

Managerial Economics & Organizational Architecture, 5e Brickley 9780073375823 45

Chinese Economy [Asian] Cai/Lin 9780071232067 62

International Economics, 5e [India] Cherunilam 9780070263642 55

Environmental Economics, 5e Field 9780073375762 47

Macroeconomics, 18e Frank 9780073365947 24

Principles of Economics, 4e Frank 9780073402888 10

Principles of Economics [Asian] Frank 9780071282840 12

Principles of Economics, Brief Edition Frank 9780073375878 12

Principles of Macroeconomics, 4e Frank 9780073362656 23

Principles of Macroeconomics, Brief Edition Frank 9780077231828 24

Principles of Microeconomics, 4e Frank 9780073362663 29

Principles of Microeconomics, 2e [Aust] Frank 9780070144446 33

Principles of Microeconomics, Brief Edition Frank 9780077231835 29

Basic Econometrics, 5e Gujarati 9780073375779 48

International Economics, Globalization, and Policy: A Reader, 5e King 9780073375816 53

NEW TITLES

4

ECONOMICS

2009 Author ISBN-13 PageEconomics: The Basics Mandel 9780073523118 37

Economics, 18e McConnell 9780073375694 14

Microeconomics, 18e McConnell 9780073365954 30

Principles of Economics, 2e [UK] McDowell 9780077121693 13

Principles of Microeconomics Miller 9780073402833 31

Microeconomics, 2e [UK] Morgan 9780077121778 43

The European Union: Economics, Policies and History, 2e [UK] Nello 9780077118136 61

Urban Economics, 7e O’Sullivan 9780073375786 58

International Economics, 14e Pugel 9780073375755 54

Essentials of Economics, 7e Schiller 9780073375809 38

Public Finance Seidman 9780073375748 58

Economics, 9e Slavin 9780073375793 16

Macroeconomics, 9e Slavin 9780073362465 25

Microeconomics, 9e Slavin 9780073362458 32

Mathematics for Economics and Business [UK] Taylor 9780077107864 50

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

2010 Author ISBN-13 PageSupply Chain Logistics Management, 3e Bowersox 9780073377872 77

Supply Management, 8e Burt 9780073381459 78

Introduction to Operations Research, 9e Hillier 9780077298340 83


2009 Author ISBN-13 PageMatching Supply with Demand: An Introduction to Operations Management, 2e Cachon 9780073525167 65, 78

Operations and Supply Management, 12e Jacobs 9780077228934 66

Logistics & Supply Chain Management [UK] Jonsson 9780077117382 79

Business Modeling with Spreadsheet [Asian] Leong 9780071275965 69

Production and Operations Analysis, 6e Nahmias 9780073377858 71

Supply Chain Management [India] Rangarajan 9780070221635 80

Operations Management, 10e Stevenson 9780073377841 67

NEW TITLES

5

BUSINESS STATISTICS

2010 Author ISBN-13 PageEssentials of Business Statistics, 3e Bowerman 9780077323134 89

Essentials Statistics in Business and Economics, 2e Doane 9780073373652 89

Basic Statistics Using Excel for Use with Statistrical Techniques in Business and Lind 9780077270018 95

Economics, 14e

Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 14e Lind 9780073401768 89

BUSINESS STATISTICS

2009 Author ISBN-13 PageComplete Business Statistics, 7e Aczel 9780073373607 90

Business Research Methods, 2e [UK] Blumberg 9780077117450 98

Business Statistics in Practice, 5e Bowerman 9780077242534 90

Applied Statistics in Business and Economics with Student CD, 2e Doane 9780077214845 91

Statistics for Business, Economics, Management & Finance [UK] Nieuwenhuis 9780077109875 93

Statistics for Management [India] Srivastava 9780070660298 94

Business Forecasting, 6e Wilson 9780073373645 97

NEW TITLES

6

EC

ON

OM

ICS

7

Advanced Microeconomics............................................................................... 60 Asian Economics ............................................................................................... 62 Econometrics .................................................................................................... 48Economics for Business .....................................................................................39 Economics Issues.............................................................................................. 39Environmental Economics ................................................................................. 47 Intermediate Macroeconomics .......................................................................... 42Intermediate Microeconomics............................................................................ 43 International Economics .................................................................................... 53Labor Economics ................................................................................................56 Managerial Economics ...................................................................................... 45 Mathematical Economics.................................................................................. 50 Money and Banking ........................................................................................... 52Principles of Economics - Software .................................................................. 19Principles of Economics - Supplementary ..........................................................20 Principles of Economics - Textbooks ................................................................ 10Principles of Macroeconomics - Textbooks ...................................................... 22Principles of Microeconomics - Textbooks ..........................................................28 Public Finance .................................................................................................. 58Regional Economics .......................................................................................... 61 Survey of Economics ..........................................................................................35 Urban Economics ............................................................................................. 58

NEW TITLES

8

ECONOMICS

2010 Author ISBN-13 PageTaking Sides: Clashing Views on Economic Issues, 14e Bonello 9780073527307 39

Labor Economics, 5e Borjas 9780073511368 56

Essentials of Economics, 2e Brue 9780073511313 10, 35

Annual Editions: Economics, 35e Cole 9780073528564 20, 39

Essentials of Econometrics Gujarati 9780073375847 48

Macroeconomics, Brief Edition McConnell 9780077230975 22

Microeconomics, Brief Edition McConnell 9780077230982 28

Economics, 19e Samuelson 9780073511290 10

Macroeconomics, 19e Samuelson 9780073344225 22

Microeconomics, 19e Samuelson 9780073344232 29

ECONOMICS

2009 Author ISBN-13 PagePublic Economics, 2e [Aust] Abelson 9780070139053 59

Environmental Economics [UK] Anand 9780077115425 47

The Economics of European Integration, 3e [UK] Baldwin 9780077121631 61

Economics, 9e [UK] Begg 9780077117870 16

Foundations of Economics, 4e [UK] Begg 9780077121884 36

Principles of Macroeconomics, 2e [Aust] Bernanke 9780070135277 25

Managerial Economics & Organizational Architecture, 5e Brickley 9780073375823 45

Chinese Economy [Asian] Cai/Lin 9780071232067 62

International Economics, 5e [India] Cherunilam 9780070263642 55

Environmental Economics, 5e Field 9780073375762 47

Macroeconomics, 18e Frank 9780073365947 24

Principles of Economics, 4e Frank 9780073402888 10

Principles of Economics [Asian] Frank 9780071282840 12

Principles of Economics, Brief Edition Frank 9780073375878 12

Principles of Macroeconomics, 4e Frank 9780073362656 23

Principles of Macroeconomics, Brief Edition Frank 9780077231828 24

Principles of Microeconomics, 4e Frank 9780073362663 29

Principles of Microeconomics, 2e [Aust] Frank 9780070144446 33

Principles of Microeconomics, Brief Edition Frank 9780077231835 29

Basic Econometrics, 5e Gujarati 9780073375779 48

International Economics, Globalization, and Policy: A Reader, 5e King 9780073375816 53

Economics: The Basics Mandel 9780073523118 37

NEW TITLES

9

ECONOMICS

2009 Author ISBN-13 PageEconomics, 18e McConnell 9780073375694 14

Microeconomics, 18e McConnell 9780073365954 30

Principles of Economics, 2e [UK] McDowell 9780077121693 13

Principles of Microeconomics Miller 9780073402833 31

Microeconomics, 2e [UK] Morgan 9780077121778 43

The European Union: Economics, Policies and History, 2e [UK] Nello 9780077118136 61

Urban Economics, 7e O’Sullivan 9780073375786 58

International Economics, 14e Pugel 9780073375755 54

Essentials of Economics, 7e Schiller 9780073375809 38

Public Finance Seidman 9780073375748 58

Economics, 9e Slavin 9780073375793 16

Macroeconomics, 9e Slavin 9780073362465 25

Microeconomics, 9e Slavin 9780073362458 32

Mathematics for Economics and Business [UK] Taylor 9780077107864 50

ECONOMICS

10

Principles of Economics - Textbooks

International Edition NEW

ESSENTIALS OF ECONOMICS2nd EditionBy Stanley L Brue, Pacifi c Lutheran University, Campbell R McConnell, University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Sean Masaki Flynn, Vassar College2010 (January 2009) / 480 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351131-3ISBN: 978-0-07-017266-1 [IE]

http://www.brue2e.com

Building on the tremendous success of their best-selling Principles of Economics text, Brue, McConnell, and Flynn have revised their one-semester text to provide a fresh alternative. This 18-chapter textbook utilizes clear and careful language along with pedagogy and topic discussion suited to the needs of one-semester course.. Brue/McConnell/Flynn is a patient, substantive treatment of micro and macro economics for the one-semester course with many up-to-date, motivating examples.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

Reorganized and recast macro section in terms of the modern, dominant paradigm of macroeconomics, using economic growth as the central backdrop and viewing business fluctuations as arising from demand and supply shocks in conjunction with short-run price and wage stickiness.

A new set of 26 Worked Problems, identified by icons in the book margins and available at the book’s Web site.

A new appendix to the supply and demand chapter providing concrete examples of changes in demand, changes in supply, changes in both, as well as situations in which pre-set prices can result in shortages or surpluses available on the Brue/McConnell/Flynn Es-sentials Web site.

Updated and expanded discussion of elasticity to include income elasticity, with an example of how it can help predict which products will fall off in demand more than others during recessions.

Up-to-date discussions and examples, such as: climate change policies, ethanol subsidies and their myriad impacts, the most rapidly expanding and disappearing U.S. jobs, the mortgage debt crisis, the sharp business downturn of late 2007 and 2008, the Fed term auction facility, recent Fed monetary policy, the stimulus package of 2008, the additions of countries to the European Union and the euro zone, changes in exchange rates, and many more.

CONTENTS

PART ONE: Introduction1 Limits, Alternatives, and Choices Appendix: Graphs and Their Meaning 2 The Market System and the Circular FlowPART TWO: Price, Quantity, and Efficiency3 Demand, Supply, and Market Equilibrium 4 Elasticity of Demand and Supply 5 Public Goods and ExternalitiesPART THREE: Product Markets6 Businesses and Their Costs 7 Pure Competition 8 Pure Monopoly 9 Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly

PART FOUR: Resource Markets10 Wage Determination 11 Income Inequality and PovertyPART FIVE: GDP, Growth and Instability12 GDP and Economic Growth 13 Business Cycles, Unemployment, and Inflation 14 Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply 15 Fiscal Policy, Deficits, and DebtPART SIX: Money, Banking, and Monetary Policy16 Money and Banking 17 Monetary PolicyPART SEVEN: International Economics18 International Trade and Exchange Rates


ECONOMICS19th EditionBy Paul A Samuelson, Massachusetts Institute of Technology and William D Nordhaus, Yale University2010 (April 2009) / 816 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351129-0ISBN: 978-0-07-126383-2 [IE]

(Details unavailable at press time)


PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS4th Edition

By Robert H Frank, Cornell University and Ben Bernanke, Princeton University

2009 (August 2008) / 928 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340288-8ISBN: 978-0-07-128542-1 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/fb4e

In recent years, innovative texts in mathematics, science, foreign lan-guages, and other fi elds have achieved dramatic pedagogical gains by abandoning the traditional encyclopedic approach in favor of attempt-ing to teach a short list of core principles in depth. Two well-respected writers and researchers, Bob Frank and Ben Bernanke, have shown that the less-is-more approach affords similar gains in introductory economics. Although a few other texts have paid lip service to this new approach, Frank/Bernanke is by far the best throughout, and the best executed principles text in this mold. Avoiding excessive reliance on formal mathematical derivations, it presents concepts intuitively through examples drawn from familiar contexts. The authors introduce a coherent short list of core principles and reinforce them by illustrating and applying each in numerous contexts. Students are periodically asked to apply these principles and to answer related questions and exercises. Frank/Bernanke also encourages students to become “Economic Naturalists,” by employing basic economic principles to understand and explain what they observe in the world around them. An economic naturalist understands, for example, that infant safety seats are required in cars but not in airplanes because the marginal cost of space to accommodate these seats is typically zero in cars but often hundreds of dollars in airplanes. Such examples

11

ECONOMICS

engage student interest while teaching them to see each feature of their economic landscape as the reflection of an implicit or explicit cost-benefit calculation.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

COURSE: The book is intended for a modern, undergraduate two-semester principles of economics course, in which a more focused and less encyclopedic approach is desired. The course is most com-monly found in departments of economics and agricultural economics but is also offered in many business schools. (About two-thirds of the market uses micro or macro splits.) Target Mankiw, Case/Fair, Krug-man, Baumol/Blinder, Parkin, and Hall/Lieberman users.

Significant revision of the macro chapter organization, based on reviewer and user feedback, to improve the flow of material, streamline and eliminate redundancies and to make material clearer for student understanding.

Material from 3e’s Chapter 9: International Trade is now found in Chapter 2: Comparative Advantage, and Chapter 28: International Trade and Capital Flows.

Labor market material from 3e’s Chapter 18: GDP and Unem-ployment, and Chapter 21: Workers, Wages and Unemployment has been combined into new Chapter 18: Wages and Unemployment. This eliminates the redundancy of unemployment coverage in 2 chapters, placing it now in just one (18).

GDP coverage from 3e Chapter 18: GDP and Unemployment is now placed within new Chapter 16: Spending, Income and GDP.

Material from 3e’s Chapter 23: Money, Prices and the Federal Reserve is now covered in new Chapter 21: Money and Prices in the Long-Run, as well as Chapter 24: Stabilizing the Economy: The Federal Reserve.

Material from 3e’s Chapter 24: Financial Markets and Inter-national Capital Flows is now covered in new Chapter 20: Saving, Capital Formation, and Financial Markets, as well as Chapter 28: International Trade and Capital Flows.

Logic chains are now used to summarize the effects of mon-etary policy for better student understanding.

The relationship between output gaps, inflation and monetary policy developed in the simple Keynesian model is used to motivate the Fed’s Monetary Policy Rule.

New graphs and treatment of simple Keynesian model and AS/AD content (chapters 25-26). The new graphs and narrative clarify content, and match with the way our users and reviewers tell us they teach. Treatment now includes the upward sloping AS short-run curve that instructors like to use, but is based on Bernanke’s modern perspective on macroeconomic

Graphs are also labeled with numbers and annotated in order to more clearly communicate shifts and changes in the graphs.

Learning Objectives now open every chapter, clearly identify-ing for the instructor and student the concepts that will be covered in each chapter. This aids the instructor in course organization and assessment, and helps students identify what concepts they should understand at the completion of each chapter.

All end-of-chapter problems, Test Bank questions and other ancillary materials are also labeled with the same Chapter Learning Objectives to create consistency and cohesive ease-of-use throughout the package.

Core principles icons throughout the book flag areas in the text where a core principle is discussed. New in 4e, the core principle be-ing covered will also be listed next to the icon. This will help instructor and student clearly identify to which core principles chapter content relates throughout the text.

Economic Naturalist Examples are now more clearly labeled and called out in the margins as “Examples”. This allows instructors for more clearly identify what they are, as well as group all examples together for reference, assignment, etc.

In introductory chapters, authors have combined Pitfalls 3 and 4 to into one Pitfall called: “Failing to Think at the Margin: Ignoring Sunk Costs and Confusing Average and Marginal Costs.” Former Pitfall 3 and 4 both dealt with Thinking at the Margin, so their com-bination eliminates redundancy and streamlines the material for students to digest.

The material on outsourcing and international trade (previously Chapter 9) has been integrated into the discussions within Chapter 2: Comparative Advantage and Chapter 28: International Trade and Capital Flows.

Clarification of Formulas and Notation:

MQ in the Economies of Scale section is now portrayed as M*Q to clarify that this indicates a multiplication and M times Q.

Changed the equation for output gap from (Y* - Y) to (Y – Y*); this ensures that the calculation of the output gap yields a negative number in the case of a negative economic event, i.e. a recession.

CONTENTS

Part I IntroductionCh 1 Thinking Like an Economist Ch 2 Comparative Advantage Ch 3 Supply and DemandPart II Competition and the Invisible HandCh 4 Elasticity Ch 5 Demand Ch 6 Perfectly Competitive Supply Ch 7 Efficiency and Exchange Ch 8 The Invisible Hand in ActionPart III Market ImperfectionsCh 9 Monopoly, Oligopoly, and Monopolistic Competition Ch 10 Games and Strategic Behavior Ch 11 Externalities and Property Rights Ch 12 The Economics of InformationPart IV Economics of Public PolicyCh 13 Labor Markets, Poverty, and Income Distribution Ch 14 The Environment, Health, and Safety Ch 15 Public Goods and Tax PolicyPart V Macroeconomics: Data and IssuesCh 16 Spending, Income, and GDP Ch 17 Inflation and the Price Level Ch 18 Wages and UnemploymentPart VI The Economy in the Long RunCh 19 Economic Growth Ch 20 Saving, Capital Formation, and Financial Markets Ch 21 The Financial System, Money, and PricesPart VII The Economy in the Short RunCh 22 Short-Term Fluctuations Ch 23 Spending and Output in the Short Run Ch 24 Stabilizing the Economy: The Role of the Federal Reserve Ch 25 Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply Ch 26 Macroeconomic PolicyPart VIII The International EconomyCh 27 Exchange Rates and the Open Economy Ch 28 International Trade and Capital FlowsGlossary

»

»

ECONOMICS

12

NEW

PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICSBy Robert H Frank, Cornell University2009 (March 2009)ISBN: 978-0-07-128284-0(An Asia Adaptation)



PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICSBrief Edition


2009 (September 2008) / 528 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337587-8ISBN: 978-0-07-128538-4 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/fbbrief1e

In recent years, innovative texts in mathematics, science, foreign languages, and other fi elds have achieved dramatic pedagogical gains by abandoning the traditional encyclopedic approach in favor of attempting to teach a short list of core principles in depth. Two well-respected writers and researchers, Bob Frank and Ben Bernanke, have shown that the less-is-more approach affords similar gains in introductory economics. The authors introduce a coherent short list of core principles and reinforce them by illustrating and applying each in numerous contexts. Students are periodically asked to apply these principles and to answer related questions and exercises. The BRIEF editions were developed for instructors who appreciate the Frank & Bernanke approach, but desire a more manageable amount of content and slightly less rigor. In the brief editions, the authors made careful choices of material to eliminate and condense, in order to produce of more concise covereage.

FEATURES

An Emphasis on Core Principles: A few core principles do most of the work in economics. By focusing on these principles, the text assures that students leave the course with a deep mastery of them. In contrast, traditional encyclopedic texts so overwhelm students with detail that they often leave the course with little useful working knowledge at all.

Understandable Examples/Economic Naturalism: Throughout the text, everyday Examples are referenced and called-out in the margin. The authors’ ultimate goal is to produce students who see economics in the world around them, and see each human action as the result of an implicit or explicit cost-benefit calculation. Using engaging ques-tions and examples from everyday life, the authors actively engage students in the attempt to understand them.

Why don’t auto manufacturers make cars without heaters?

Why are whales, but not chickens, threatened with extinc-tion?

Why do movie theaters give student discounts on the price of admission but not on the price of popcorn?

Active Learning Stressed: The only way to lean to hit an overhead smash in tennis or to speak a foreign language is through repeated practice. The same is true for learning economics. Thus, the authors consistently introduce new ideas in the context of simple examples and then follow them with applications in familiar settings. Frequently, the text poses exercises to test and reinforce the understanding of these ideas, and end-of-chapter questions and problems are care-fully crafted to help students internalize and extend core concepts. Students are prepared to apply the important concepts to solve “economic riddles” drawn from the real world.

Well-Known Authors: Robert Frank and Ben Bernanke are renowned experts in their fields (micro and macro, respectively). Frank’s research has looked at rivalry and cooperation in economic and social behavior. He is the author of a best-selling intermediate economics text, Microeconomics and Behavior, (McGraw-Hill/Irwin), and has published such award-winning books as The Winner-Take-All-Society and Luxury Fever. Bernanke is the co-author of a best-selling intermediate macroeconomics text and has done significant research on the causes of the Great Depression, the role of financial markets and institutions in the business cycle, and measuring the effects of monetary policy on the economy. He was named a member of the Federal Reserve Board of Governors in 2002 and became Chairman of the President’s Council of Economic Advisers in 2005.

Modern Macroeconomics: Recent developments have renewed interest in cyclical fluctuations while still paying attention to such long-run issues as growth, productivity, the evolution of real wages, and capital formation. Thus, we offer the following organization:

A 3-chapter treatment of long-run issues followed by a modern treatment of short-term fl uctuations and stabilization policy, empha-sizing the important distinction between short- and long-run behavior of the economy.

Consistent with both media reporting and recent research on the central bank reaction function, we treat the interest rate rather than the money supply as the instrument of Fed

The analysis of aggregate demand and aggregate supply relates output to infl ation, rather than to the price level, sidestepping the necessity of a separate derivation of the link between the output gap and infl ation.

This book places a heavy emphasis on globalization, starting with an analysis of its effects on real wage inequality and progress-ing to such issues as the benefi ts of trade, the causes and effects of protectionism, the role of capital fl ows in domestic capital formation, and the link between exchange rates and monetary policy.

Modern Microeconomics: Economic surplus, introduced in Chapter 1 and applied repeatedly thereafter, is more fully developed here than in any other text. This concept underlies the argument for economic efficiency as an important social goal. Rather than speak of tradeoffs between efficiency and other goals, the authors stress that maximizing economic surplus facilitates the achievement of all goals. The tendency to ignore opportunity costs, the tendency not to ignore sunk costs, and the tendency to confuse average and marginal costs and benefits—common decision pitfalls identified by 2002 Nobel Laureate Daniel Kahneman and others—are introduced early in Chapter 1. The book devotes a chapter to the economics of information, making available in intuitively accessible form key insights that earned the 2001 Nobel Prize in economics for George Akerlof, Joseph Stiglitz, and Michael Spence.

Learning Objectives open every chapter, clearly identifying for the instructor and student the concepts that will be covered in each chap-ter. This aids the instructor in course organization and assessment, and helps students identify what concepts they should understand at the completion of each chapter.

13

ECONOMICS


Core principles icons throughout the book fl ag areas in the text where a core principle is discussed. New in 4e, the core principle be-ing covered will also be listed next to the icon. This will help instructor and student clearly identify to which core principles chapter content relates throughout the text.

Algebra appendixes: A the basic review of the algebra and geometry of straight lines presented in the mathematical appendix to Chapter 1as well as a basic primer on how to solve simple sys-tems of two equations with two unknowns. The treatment of supply and demand in the main text is carried out exclusively in verbal and graphical terms. Chapter 3 includes an appendix that presents an algebraic treatment of supply and demand. Chapter 10 includes a brief appendix showing how monopoly profi t maximization can be treated in an algebraic framework.

CONTENTS

Part I IntroductionCh 1 Thinking Like an Economist Ch 2 Comparative Advantage Ch 3 Supply and DemandPart II Competition and the Invisible HandCh 4 Elasticity Ch 5 Demand Ch 6 Perfectly Competitive Supply Ch 7 Efficiency, Exchange, and the Invisible Hand in ActionPart III Market ImperfectionsCh 8 Monopoly, Oligopoly, and Monopolistic Competition Ch 9 Games and Strategic Behavior Ch 10 Externalities and Property RightsPart IV Economics of Public PolicyCh 11 Using Economics to Make Better Policy ChoicesPart V Macroeconomics: Data and IssuesCh 12 Spending, Income, and GDP Ch 13 Inflation and the Price Level Ch 14 Wages and UnemploymentPart VI The Economy in the Long RunCh 15 Economic Growth Ch 16 Saving, Capital Formation, and Financial Markets Ch 17 The Financial System, Money, and PricesPart VII The Economy in the Short RunCh 18 Short-Term Economic Fluctuations Ch 19 Spending and Output in the Short Run Ch 20 Stabilizing the Economy: The Role of the Federal Reserve Ch 21 Aggregate Demand, Aggregate Supply, and Macroeconomic PolicyPart VIII The International EconomyCh 22 Exchange Rates, International Trade, and Capital Flows

NEWUK Adaptation

PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS2nd Edition

By Moore McDowell and Rodney Thom of University College Dublin, Robert H Frank, Cornell University and Ben Bernanke, Princeton University

2009 (March 2009) / 752 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-712169-3McGraw-Hill UK Title

http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/mcdowell

Principles of Economics, European Edition, develops the well re-garded US textbook by Frank and Bernanke to refl ect the issues and context of economics in Europe. The book presents concepts intui-tively using examples drawn from familiar contexts. It relies throughout on a well articulated shortlist of 12 core principles which are reinforced by real-world examples. Review questions, exercises and problems encourage students to apply these principles in a variety of contexts. The text encourages students to become “economic naturalists”, people who employ basic economic principles to understand and explain what they observe in the world around them. The “economic naturalist” approach helps students develop concepts and illustrates their applications in a real world setting. Features of this edition: Including an extended chapter on oligopoly theory within the micro-economics section Core Principles emphasised throughout the text to reinforce key ideas An Active Learning Approach, with exercises, review questions and problems in every chapter, encourage students to apply their knowledge as they work through the topics

NEW TO THIS EDITION

New European content throughout, as well as substantial chang-es to the macroeconomics chapters for the European audience. New coverage includes discussion of European integration, institutions, economic policy management and policy goals. For example:

Most importantly, a new chapter 30 explaining the economics of monetary union, including a brief history of European monetary integration and the economic rationale for monetary union using an Optimum Currency Area Approach.

Chapter 23: A new section on the ECB including “The History and Structure of the ECB” and the basics of policy instruments and objectives

Chapter 27, “Stabilising the Economy: The Role of the ECB”, looking at the ECBs views on unemployment, and discussing its role in controlling infl ation and employing monetary targeting.

More advanced analysis at a technical level in appendices included for European teaching needs. At the end of Chapter 1, an appendix introduces the use of basic calculus in economics to reflect the needs of European modules. Chapter 5 has a new appendix on Indifference Curve analysis and the demand curve and Chapter 6 a new appendix on margins, profit maximisation and monopoly.

Fully updated European Economic Naturalist examples that reflect the experiences of UK, Irish and other European students and place economics in a relevant and contemporary context.

Retains the successful Core Principles emphasis and the Active Learning Approach of the parent textbook. The Core Principles focus on the most important ideas in economics and aim to reinforce them so that students achieve a thorough understanding of these princi-ples. The Active Learning approach in the book provides examples and applications throughout, encouraging students to apply their


McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your

local McGraw-Hill offi ce or email to [email protected]

Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)Website: www.mheducation.asia

ECONOMICS

14

knowledge as they progress. Exercises and recaps punctuate the text to ask students to reflect on what they have learnt. Questions and exercises at the end of chapters then encourage students to revise and assess their progress.

CONTENTS

Part 1: Introduction1. Thinking Like An Economist2. Markets, Specialisation and Economic Efficiency 3. Markets, Supply, Demand and ElasticityPart 2: Demand and Supply4. Demand: The Benefit Side of the Market5. Perfectly Competitive Supply: the Cost Side of the MarketPart 3: Markets and Economic Welfare6. Efficiency and Exchange7. Profits, Entry and Exit: the Basis for the ‘Invisible Hand’Part 4: Market Structure8. Imperfect Competition and the Consequence of Market Power9. Thinking Strategically 1: Interdependence, Decision-Making and the Theory of Games10. Thinking Strategically 2: Competition among the FewPart 5: Incomplete and Imperfect Markets11. Externalities and Property Rights12. Economics of InformationPart 6: Government in the Economy: Distribution, Regulation and the Provision of Public Goods13. Government in the Economy: Distribution, Regulation and the Provision of Public Goods14. Government in the Market: Regulation and Production of Public Goods and Other ServicesPart 7: Macroeconomics15. Macroeconomics: Issues and Data16. Measuring Economics Activity: Gross Domestic Product17. Measuring the Price Level and Inflation 18. The Labour Market: Wages and UnemploymentPart 8: The Economy in the Long Run19. Economic Growth, Productivity and Living Standards20. Capital Markets: Saving, Investment and Capital FormationPart 9: The Economy in the Short Run21. Short Term Economic22. Money and Interest Rates23. The IS-LM Model 24. Stabilising the Economy: The Role of Fiscal Policy25. Stabilising the Economy: The Role of Monetary Policy26. Inflation and Aggregate Supply Part 10:The International Economy27. Exchange Rates, Capital Flows and the Balance of Payments


ECONOMICS18th Edition

By Campbell R McConnell, University of Ne-braska-Lincoln, Stanley L Brue, Pacifi c Lutheran University, Sean Masaki Flynn, Vassar College

2009 (October 2008) / 832 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337569-4ISBN: 978-0-07-009191-7 [IE]

http://www.mcconnell18e.com

McConnell and Brue’s Economics: Principles, Problems, and Policies is the leading Principles of Economics textbook. It continues to be innovative while teaching students in a clear, unbiased way. The 18th Edition builds upon the tradition of leadership by sticking to 3 main goals: help the beginning student master the principles essential for understanding the economizing problem, specifi c economic issues, and the policy alternatives; help the student understand and apply the economic perspective and reason accurately and objectively about economic matters; and promote a lasting student interest in economics and the economy.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

Micro First Organization. McConnell 18e’s organization now places micro chapters first, to reflect how contemporary economists are thinking about the linkage between micro and macro economics. Professors have increasingly changed their course sequencing to micro-first, and now McConnell 18e matches up with this modern direction. Of course, chapters are still written in a self-contained manner, so that an instructor could still choose to cover chapters in any order they prefer.

Updated, Contemporary Macroeconomics. The entire macro analysis in 18e reflects the modern, dominant paradigm. It uses economic growth as the central backdrop, and views business fluctua-tions as significant and costly variations in the rate of growth. In the models presented, the immediate short run is a period in which the price level and wages are not only sticky, but stuck; the short-run is a period in which product prices are flexible and wages are not; the long-run is a period in which both prices and wages are fully flexible. Each of these three periods—and thus each of the models based on them—are relevant to understanding the actual macro economy and its occasional difficulties.

Modern Macroeconomic Chapters:

New Chapter 23 introduces the macro framework in a lively, intuitive way, using a hypothetical single-fi rm economy. It also makes a clear, critical distinction between the broader concept of fi nancial economics and the narrower subset of investment called economic investment in a way that allows us to use both ideas in the macro.

Chapter 24 covers the measurement of nominal and real GDP, and clearly defi nes and measures real GDP, before moving to Chapter 25 on economics growth. This early placement of the growth chapter allows students to understand the importance of economic growth and the factors that drive it.

Chapter 26 then introduces business fl uctuations along the economy’s growth path and the problems of unemployment and infl ation that may result.

Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy:


Visit McGraw-Hill EducationWebsite: www.mheducation.asia

COMPLIMENTARY COPIES

15

ECONOMICS

Following these core macro chapters (23-26), McConnell 18e begins to build models of the economy for the immediate short run and the short run. Students are therefore quickly introduced to models in which recessions and inflation can occur. This approach uses the short-run AD-AS model to address fiscal policy and monetary policy earlier in the macro. Students are made fully aware from the start of the macro that the rate of economic growth is fundamentally important for standards of living. Yet, the quick introduction of sticky price models enables students to understand demand shocks, reces-sion, stimulatory fiscal policy, Fed monetary policy actions, and other topics that dominant the news about the macro economy.

Because Chapter 5 provides an early introduction to international trade and international finance, the global economy is integrated from the start of the macro analysis. Then, after eventually developing the long-run AD-AS model, long-run analysis is linked back to our earlier discussions of growth.

Macro content is also fully modern in terms of its coverage of contemporary problems and policies. For example, the mortgage loan crisis, the economic slowdown, the Fed reductions of Federal funds rates, the Fed’s term auction facility, and the stimulus tax pack-age of 2008 are covered.

Four New Chapters. Four chapters—two micro and two macro—incorporate contemporary analytical themes and address current economic issues.

Chapter 15 Natural Resource and Energy Economics. This new micro chapter—brought from the 17e Website—is now included in the book. An understanding of basic economic principles of natural resource economics will be critical to future citizens and leaders.

Chapter 22 Immigration. This new micro chapter covers the economics of immigration—both legal and illegal—in an analyti-cal and balanced way. Students are highly interested in this subject, yet often lack the economic knowledge and tools to grasp the issues and debates. The chapter also serves as a timely application of the economic principles developed in the prior chapters on resource markets.

Chapter 23 Introduction to Macroeconomics. As previ-ously noted, this new chapter introduces the revised macroeconomic content in an interesting, concise way. It motivates the study of macr-oeconomics and establishes the analytical framework to the subject that is used in the book.

Chapter 34 Financial Economics. This new macro chapter examines ideas such as compound interest, present value, arbitrage, risk, diversification, and the risk-return relationship. Students need a better grounding in such ideas to truly understand the modern economy.

Three New Appendixes. Three additional chapter appen-dixes are available for optional assignment and are supported by supplementary materials. The concise new appendixes are:

Chapter 3: Additional Examples of Supply and Demand. Additional examples of supply and demand are provided, including concrete examples of simultaneous shifts in supply and demand curves. Products covered include lettuce, corn and ethanol, pink salmon, gasoline, and sushi. The Olympic Games illustrate examples of pre-set prices, shortages, and surpluses. Chapter 11: Additional Game Theory Applications. Several applications of game theory are placed in an appendix at the end of the micro chapter on monopolistic competition and oligopoly. Concepts such as dominant strategies, Nash equilibrium, repeated games, and first-mover advantages are included for instructors who like to stress game theory in dealing with oligopoly. Chapter 13: Labor Unions and their Impacts. This compact appendix covers union membership, the decline of unions, collective bargaining, and the economic effects of unions.

New (or Relocated) “Consider This” Boxes. “Consider This” boxes are used to provide analogies, examples, or stories that help drive home central economic ideas in a student-oriented, real-world manner. These brief vignettes, each accompanied by a photo, illustrate key points in a lively, colorful, and easy-to-remember way. New or relocated “Consider This” boxes include engaging topics

such as: an economic comparison of the two Koreas (Chapter 2), “buying American” (Chapter 5), the prisoner’s dilemma (Chapter 11), government policies and birth rates (Chapter 15), putting corn in our gas tanks (Chapter 19), patent reform in India (Chapter 25), and the relative returns on standard versus ethical investing (Chapter 34).

New (or Relocated) “Last Word” Boxes. “Last Word” boxes are applications and case studies located toward the end of each chapter. New or relocated Last Words include: fair trade products (Chapter 5); insights from behavioral economics (Chapter 7); the economic growth-environmental protection link (Chapter 15); past, current, and proposed U.S. immigration laws (Chapter 22); the role of inventory management in reducing recessions (Chapter 23); the Fed’s response to the mortgage loan crisis (Chapter 33); the relative performance of index funds versus actively managed funds (Chapter 34); and Bastiat’s “Petition of the Candlemakers” (Chapter 37).

Contemporary Discussions and Examples. McConnell 18e is thoroughly updated with current references and discussions. Topics include: the cost of the war in Iraq, surpluses and shortages of tickets at the Olympics, impacts of ethanol subsides, off shoring of American jobs, trade adjustment assistance, the additions of countries to the European Union, normal trade relations status, aspects of be-havioral economics, game theory, impacts of ethanol subsidies, the most rapidly expanding and disappearing U.S. jobs, oil and gasoline prices, climate change, ethanol subsidies, the Farm Act of 2008, consumption versus income inequality, prescription drug coverage under Medicare, Health Savings Accounts (HSAs), comprehensive immigration reform, China’s rapid growth rate, the business downturn of late 2007 and early 2008, the stimulus package of 2008, Federal budget deficits, the mortgage loan crisis, recent Fed monetary policy, the Fed’s new term auction facility, the Taylor rule, U.S. trade deficits, and many more.

CONTENTS

Part 1: Introduction to Economics and the EconomyChapter 1: Limits, Alternatives, and Choices (+ Appendix) Chapter 2: The Market System and the Circular Flow Chapter 3: Demand, Supply and Market Equilibrium (+ Appendix) Chapter 4: The U.S. Economy: Private and Public Sectors Chapter 5: The United States in the Global EconomyPart 2: Microeconomics of Product MarketsChapter 6: Elasticity, Consumer Surplus, and Producer Surplus Chapter 7: Consumer Behavior (+ Appendix) Chapter 8: The Costs of Production Chapter 9: Pure Competition Chapter 10: Pure Monopoly Chapter 11: Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly (+ Appendix) Chapter 11W: Technology, R&D, and EfficiencyPart 3: Microeconomics of Resource MarketsChapter 12: The Demand for Resources Chapter 13: Wage Determination (+ Appendix) Chapter 14: Rent, Interest, and Profit Chapter 15: Natural Resource and Energy EconomicsPart 4: Microeconomics of GovernmentChapter 16: Government and Market Failure Chapter 17: Public Choice Theory and the Economics of TaxationPart 5: Microeconomic Issues and PoliciesChapter 18: Antitrust Policy and Regulation Chapter 19: Agriculture: Economics and Policy Chapter 20: Income Inequality, Discrimination, and Poverty Chapter 21: Health Care Chapter 22: ImmigrationPart 6: GDP, Growth, and InstabilityChapter 23: Introduction to Macroeconomics Chapter 24: Measuring Domestic Output and National Income Chapter 25: Economic Growth Chapter 26: Business Cycles, Unemployment, and InflationPart 7: Macroeconomic Models and Fiscal PolicyChapter 27: Basic Macroeconomic Relationships Chapter 28: The Aggregate Expenditures Model Chapter 29: Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply (+ Appen-dix) Chapter 30: Fiscal Policy, Deficits, and Debt

ECONOMICS

16

Part 8: Money, Banking, and Monetary PolicyChapter 31: Money and Banking Chapter 32: Money Creation Chapter 33: Interest Rates and Monetary Policy Chapter 34: Financial EconomicsPart 9: Extensions and IssuesChapter 35: Extending the Analysis of Aggregate Supply Chapter 36: Current Issues in Macro Theory and PolicyPart 10: International EconomicsChapter 37: International Trade Chapter 38: Exchange Rates, Balance of Payments, and Trade Deficits Chapter 38 Web Supplement: Previous International Exchange-Rate Systems Chapter 38W: The Economics of Developing Countries



By Stephen L Slavin, Union County College

2009 (July 2008) / 872 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337579-3ISBN: 978-0-07-128085-3 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/slavin9e

CONTENTS

1 A brief economic history of the united states 2 Resource utilization 3 The mixed economy 4 Suppy and demand 5 The household-consumption sector 6 The business-investment sector 7 The government sector 8 The export-import sector 9 Gross domestic product 10 Economic fluctuations, unemployment, and inflation 11 Classical and keynesian economics 12 Fiscal policy and the national debt 13 Money and banking 14 The federal reserve and monetary policy 15 A century of economic theory 16 Economic growth and productivity 17 Demand, supply, and equilibrium 18 The elasticities of demand and supply 19 The theory of consumer behavior 20 Cost 21 Profit, loss, and perfect competition 22 Monopoly 23 Monopolistic competition 24 Oligopoly 25 Corporate mergers and antitrust 26 Demand in the factor market 27 Labor unions 28 Labor markets and wage rates 29 Rent, interest, and profit 30 Income distribution and poverty 31 International trade 32 International finance

NEW


By David Begg, Birkbeck College, London, Stanley Fischer, International Monetary Fund and Rudiger Dornbusch of Massachusetts Institute of Technol-ogy

2008 (February 2008) / 752 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-711787-0 ISBN: 978-0-07-711966-9 (Mandatory Package)McGraw-Hill UK Title

www.mcgraw-hill.com.uk/tetbooks/begg

Economics by Begg, Fischer and Dornbusch is the defi nitive econom-ics textbook, providing students with the essential coverage for their economic principles course.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

New Activity Boxes in every chapter, to encourage students to apply their learning in a real-world context

New examples such as easyJet, iPods, Skype, Yellow Pages and London Underground and topics such as house prices, music downloads, Live Aid and international trade

New and updated material reflecting recent economic changes on climate change, globalisation and the European union

CONTENTS

Part One: Introduction 1. Economics and the economy 2. Tools of economic analysis 3. Demand, supply and the market Part Two: Positive microeconomics4. Elasticities of demand and supply 5. Consumer choice and demand decisions 6. Introducing supply decisions 7. Costs and supply 8. Perfect competition and pure monopoly 9. Market structure and imperfect competition 10. The labour market11. Different types of labour12. Factor markets and income distribution 13. Risk and information 14. The information economy Part Three: Welfare ecomonics15. Welfare economics 16. Government spending and revenue 17. Industrial policy and competition policy 18. Natural monopoly: public or private? Part Four: Macroeconomics19. Introduction to macroeconomics 20. Output and aggregate demand 21. Fiscal policy and foreign trade 22. Money and banking 23. Interest rates and monetary transmission 24. Monetary and fiscal policy 25. Aggregate supply, prices and adjustment to shocks 26. Inflation, expectations and credibility 27. Unemployment 28. Exchange rates and the balance of payments 29. Open economy macroeconomics 30. Economic growth 31. Business cycles

17

ECONOMICS

32. Macroeconomics: taking stock Part Five: The world economy33. International trade 34. Exchange rate regimes 35. European integration 36. Poverty, development and globalisation Appendix: Answers to review questionsGlossary Index

International Edition ECONOMICS7th EditionBy David C Colander, Middlebury College2008 (October 2007) / 924 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340286-4 ISBN: 978-0-07-128775-3 [IE]

http://mhhe.com/economics/colander_7e

Written in an informal colloquial style, this student-friendly Principles of Economics textbook does not sacrifi ce intellectual depth in its quest for accessibility. The author’s primary concern is to instill “economic sensibility” in the student. Colander emphasizes the intellectual and historical context to which the economic models are applied. The sev-enth edition has been signifi cantly revised to make it simpler, shorter, more organized and more applicable to the real world.

CONTENTS

I: Introduction: Thinking Like An EconomistChapter 1: Economics and Economic Reasoning Chapter 2: The Production Possibility Model, Trade, and Globaliza-tion. Chapter 3: Economic institutions Chapter 4: Supply and Demand Chapter 5: Using Supply and DemandII: MicroeconomicsI: Microeconomics: The BasicsChapter 6: Describing Supply and Demand: Elasticities Chapter 7: Taxation and Government InterventionII: Foundations of Supply and DemandChapter 8: The Logic of Individual Choice: The Foundation of Supply and Demand Chapter 9: Production and Cost Analysis I Chapter 10: Production and Cost Analysis IIIII: Market StructureChapter 11: Perfect Competition Chapter 12: Monopoly Chapter 13: Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly IV: Real World Competition Chapter 14: Game Theory, Strategic Decisions Marking,and Behav-ioral Economics Chapter 15: Real-World Competition and Technology Chapter 16: Antitrust Policy and RegulationV: Factor MarketsChapter 17: Work and the Labor MarketChapter 17w:Non wage and Asset Income: Rents, Profits, and InterestChapter 18: Who Gets What? The Distribution of IncomeV: Applying Economic Reasoning to PolicyChapter 19: Government Policy and Market FailuresChapter 19w: Politics and Economics: The Case of Agriculture MarketsChapter 20: Microeconomic Policy, Economic Reasoning, and Be-yond Chapter 21: International Trade Policy, Comparative Advantage, and OutsourcingIII: Macroeconomics

I: Macroeconomic ProblemsChapter 23: Economic Growth, Business Cycles, Unemployment, and Inflation Chapter 24: National Income AccountingII: The Macroeconomic FrameworkChapter 25: Growth, Productivity, and the Wealth of Nations Chapter 26: Aggregate Demand, Aggregate Supply, and Modern Macroeconomics Chapter 27: The Multiplier ModelIII: Money, Inflation, and Monetary PolicyChapter 28: Money, Banking, and the Financial Sector Chapter 29: Monetary Policy and the Debate about Macro Policy Chapter 30: Inflation and Its Relationship to Unemployment and GrowthIV: Macro Policy in PerspectiveChapter 31: Aggregate Demand Policy in Perspective Chapter 32: Politics, Deficits,and Debt Chapter 33: Macro Policies in Developing CountriesV: International Policy IssuesChapter 34: International Financial Policy Chapter 35: Macro Policy in a Global Setting

International Edition THE ECONOMY TODAY11th EditionBy Bradley R Schiller, American University2008 (September 2007) / 896 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351126-9 ISBN: 978-0-07-128350-2 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/schiller11e

Brad Schiller’s text, The Economy Today, 11e, is noted for three great strengths: readability, policy orientation, and pedagogy. His accessible writing style engages students and brings some of the excitement of domestic and global economic news into the classroom. Schiller emphasizes how policymakers must choose between government intervention and market reliance to resolve the core issues of what, how, and for whom to produce. This strategic choice is highlighted throughout the full range of micro, macro, and international issues. Every chapter ends with a policy issue that emphasizes the markets vs. government dilemma. And Schiller packs his chapters with the facts of economic life—real stories and applications. This is a book that teaches economics in a relevant context with careful pedagogy. It is also the only principles text that presents all macro theory in the single consistent context of the AS/AD framework. Schiller, 11e is for students motivated by real-world policy issues who want to be-come economically literate. This is a book students actually READ. Schiller is also known for its cutting-edge and current coverage of today’s issues.

CONTENTS

PrefacePart 1 The Economic ChallengeChapter 1 Economics: The Core IssuesAppendix: using GraphsChapter 2 The U.S. Economy: A Global View Chapter 3 Supply and Demand Chapter 4 The Public SectorPart 2 Measuring Macro OutcomesChapter 5 National-Income Accounting Chapter 6 Unemployment Chapter 7 InflationPart 3 Cyclical InstabilityChapter 8 The Business Cycle Chapter 9 Aggregate DemandAppendix: The Keynesian CrossChapter 10 Self-Adjustment or Instability?Part 4 Fiscal Policy LeversChapter 11 Fiscal Policy

ECONOMICS

18

Chapter 12 Deficits, Surpluses, and DebtPart 5 Monetary Policy OptionsChapter 13 Money and Banks Chapter 14 The Federal Reserve System Chapter 15 Monetary PolicyPart 6 Supply-Side OptionsChapter 16 Supply-Side Policy: Short-run Options Chapter 17 Growth and Productivity: Long-run PossibilitiesPart 7 Policy ConstraintsChapter 18 Global Macro Chapter 19 Theory versus RealityPart 8 Product Markets: The BasicsChapter 20 Consumer DemandAppendix: Indifference CurvesChapter 21 The Costs of ProductionPart 9 Market StructureChapter 22 The Competitive Firm Chapter 23 Competitive Markets Chapter 24 Monopoly Chapter 25 Oligopoly Chapter 26 Monopolistic CompetitionPart 10 Regulatory IssuesChapter 27 (De)Regulation of Business Chapter 28 Environmental Protection Chapter 29 The Farm ProblemPart 11 Factor Markets: Basic TheoryChapter 30 The Labor Market Chapter 31 Labor Unions Chapter 32 Financial MarketsPart 12 Distributional IssuesChapter 33 Taxes: Equity versus Efficiency Chapter 34 Transfer Payments: Welfare and Social SecurityPart 13 International EconomicsChapter 35 International trade Chapter 36 International Finance Chapter 37 Global PovertyGlossary Index Reference Tables

International Edition ECONOMICS8th EditionBy Stephen Slavin, Union College2008 (September 2006) / 832 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351127-6 ISBN: 978-0-07-126619-2 [IE]


Steve Slavin’s lively and comprehensive Economics has a student-friendly, step-by-step approach; value pricing; and a built-in Work-book/Study Guide. Instructors and students like the author’s humorous anecdotes, direct language, and easy conversational style. The text encourages active rather than passive reading.

CONTENTS

1 A brief economic history of the united states. 2 Resource utilization. 3 Supply and demand. 4 The mixed economy. 5 The household-consumption sector. 6 The business-investment sector. 7 The government sector. 8 The export-import sector. 9 Gross domestic product. 10 Economic fluctuations, unemployment, and inflation. 11 Classical and keynesian economics.

12 Fiscal policy and the national debt. 13 Money and banking. 14 The federal reserve and monetary policy. 15 A century of economic theory. 16 Economic growth and productivity. 17 Demand, supply, and equilibrium. 18 The elasticities of demand and supply. 19 The theory of consumer behavior. 20 Cost. 21 Profit, loss, and perfect competition. 22 Monopoly. 23 Monopolistic competition. 24 Oligopoly. 25 Corporate mergers and antitrust. 26 Demand in the factor market. 27 Labor unions. 28 Labor markets and wage rates. 29 Rent, interest, and profit. 30 Income distribution and poverty. 31 International trade. 32 International finance.

ECONOMIC PRINCIPLES2nd EditionBy John Jackson, Ron McIver, University of South Australia and Chris Bajada, University of Technology Sydney2007 (April 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-471711-0 McGraw-Hill Australia Title

www.mhhe.com.au/jackson_principles2e

Now in its second edition, lead author Chris Bajada, University of Tech-nology Sydney, takes an exciting new approach to teaching business students the key concepts of economics. Economic Principles 2e is designed for the one-semester subject, with thirteen core chapters, and six supplementary extension chapters. The extension section provides instructors with greater fl exibility in the coverage, depth and focus of topics. Economic Principles 2e is written in a straight-forward and accessible style, giving students a clear understanding of fundamental economic issues and concepts. Through case studies and boxed examples, students can gain a better appreciation of how economic theory impacts upon business decisions.

Modern Approach: Completely restructured, Economic Principles 2e provides fl exibility in teaching. Fundamental microeconomic and macroeconomic concepts are covered by the thirteen core chapters. Six extension chapters offer the opportunity to alter focus and level of diffi culty according to subject requirements.

New Content: New material is provided on International Trade and Protection (Extension Chapter 2), Pricing of Economic Resources (Extension Chapter 3) and Aggregate Expenditure and the Multiplier (Extension Chapter 4).

Strong Student Resources: Economic Principles 2e supports stu-dents with strong supplements through the Online Learning Centre and MaxMark, an online revision study guide.

CONTENTS

Part 1: Introduction Ch 1, The General Principles of Economics Appendix to Ch 1, Graphs and their meaning Part 2: Core Chapters--Microeconomics Ch 2, Demand and Supply Ch 3, Market Behaviour--Elasticity, Tax and Price Controls Ch 4, The Costs of Production Ch 5, Pure Competition and Monopoly Ch 6, Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly Ch 7, Market Failure and Resource Allocation Part 3: Core Chapters--Macroeconomics

19

ECONOMICS

Ch 8, The Macro Environment and its Measurement Ch 9, Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply Ch 10, Fiscal Policy and Public Debt Ch 11, Monetary Policy and the Financial System Ch 12, Economic Resources and the Labour Market Ch 13, The International Monetary System Part 4: Extension Chapters Ch E1, The Theory of Consumer Behaviour Ch E2, International Trade and Protection Ch E3, The Pricing of Economic Resources Ch E4, The Aggregate Expenditure Model and the Multiplier Ch E5, The Economics of Growth Ch E6, The Development of Macroeconomic Debates GlossaryIndex

International Edition ECONOMICS18th EditionBy Paul A Samuelson, Massachusetts Institute of Technology and William D Nordhaus, Yale University2005 / 832 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-287205-7 ISBN: 978-0-07-123932-5 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/www.mhhe.com/economics/samuelson18e

CONTENTS

Part One: Basic Concepts 1 The Fundamentals of Economics Appendix 1 How to Read Graphs 2 Markets and Government in a Modern Economy 3 Basic Elements of Supply and Demand Part Two: Microeconomics: Supply, Demand, and Product Markets 4 Applications of Supply and Demand 5 Demand and Consumer Behavior Appendix 5 Geometrical Analysis of Consumer Equilibrium 6 Production and Business Organization 7 Analysis of Costs Appendix 7 Production, Cost Theory, and Deci-sion of the Firm 8 Analysis of Perfectly Competitive Markets 9 Competition and Its Polar Case of Monopoly 10 Oligopoly and Monopolistic Competition 11 Uncertainty and Game Theory Part Three: Factor Markets: Labor, Land, and Capital 12 How Markets Determine Incomes 13 The Labor Market 14 Land and Capital Appendix 14 Markets and Economic Efficiency Part Four: Applied Microeconomics: International Trade, Govern-ment, and the Environment 15 Comparative Advantage and Protectionism 16 Government Taxation and Expenditure 17 Promoting More Efficient Markets18 Protecting the Environment 19 Efficiency vs. Equality: The Big Tradeoff Part Five: Macroeconomics: Economic Growth and Business Cycles 20 Overview of Macroeconomics Appendix 20 Macroeconomic Data 21 Measuring Economic Activity 22 Consumption and Investment 23 Business Fluctuations and the Theory of Aggregate Demand 24 The Multiplier Model 25 Money, Banking, and Financial Markets 26 Central Banking and Monetary Policy Part Six: Economic Growth and Macroeconomic Policy 27 The Process of Economic Growth 28 The Challenge of Economic Development 29 Exchange Rates and the International Financial System

30 Open-Economy Macroeconomics Part Seven: Unemployment, Inflation, and Economic Policy 31 Unemployment and the Foundations of Aggregate Supply 32 Ensuring Price Stability 33 The Warring Schools of Macroeconomics 34 Policies for Growth and Stability

Principles of Economics - Software

International Edition

THE POWER OF MICROECONOMICS CD-ROMBy Peter Navarro, University of California - Irvine2000 ISBN: 978-0-07-228314-3 (Out of Print)ISBN: 978-0-07-116621-8 [IE]

www.powerofeconomics.com

CONTENTS

1. An Introduction to Macroeconomics 2. Supply, Demand, and Equilibrium 3. Demand and Consumer Behavior 4. Supply and Production Theory 5. Perfect Competition 6. Monopoly and Monopolistic Competition 7. Oligopoly and Strategic Behavior 8. Land and Rent 9. The Labor Market and Wage Determination 10. The Capital Market, Interest, and Profit 11. Income and Wealth, Poverty and Discrimination 12. Public Goods and Externalities 13. Government Taxation and Expenditures and Public Choice Theory 14. International Trade and Protectionism





ECONOMICS

20

Principles of Economics – Supplementary

NEW

ANNUAL EDITIONS: ECONOMICS 35th Edition

By Don Cole, Drew University

2010 (February 2009) / 256 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-352856-4McGraw-Hill Duskin Title

http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073528560.mhtml

Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instruc-tor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for our popular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906) or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

To purchase an electronic eBook version of this title, visit www.CourseSmart.com (ISBN 0077309367).

CONTENTS

Unit 1: Introduction1. How Much for a Life? Try $3 Million to $5 Million2. There Is No Such Thing as a War for Free,3. More, Bigger, Faster4. Counter-Terrorism: The Private Cost of More SecurityUnit 2: Microeconomics5. Gas Costs Squeeze Daily Life6. Airlines7. The Real Price of Gas8. Antitrust Inquiry Launched into Intel,9. Modernizing U.S. Antitrust Law: The Role of Technology and In-novation10. Climate Change and the Economy11. Congested Parks—A Pricing DilemmaUnit 3: The Economics of Work and Income12. Building a More-Humane Economy13. Outsized Offshore Outsourcing14. The New Suburban Poverty15. The Gender Gyp16. New Floor Set for Wages17. Workplace Abuse: Why the Golden Age of Labor May Be OverUnit 4: Macroeconomics18. Countdown to a Meltdown19. How Obama Will Stoke the Economy

20. Companies Slam on the Brakes21. The End of Economics22. The Elephant in the Room23. Growth Factor24. The Tax Reform Revolution25. Fixing the Tax System26. What Should Central Banks Do?27. How Does Monetary Policy Affect the U.S. Economy?28. Bank ATMs and ATM Surcharges29. A Quiet Revolution in Money30. Toward a Cashless Society31. Record $482 Billion ‘09 Deficit ForecastUnit 5: The Changing Global Economy32. Update on the State of the Future33. Consumer Trends in Three Different “Worlds,” 34. Refighting NAFTA35. Fighting The Global Slump: Less Is Dangerous36. Eliminating Child Labor37. Asymmetric Globalization: Global Markets Require Good Global Politics38. Will the World Run Dry? Global Water and Food Security39. Half a Tank: The Impending Arrival of Peak Oil40. Do Global Attitudes and Behaviors Support Sustainable Devel-opment?

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF EASY OUTLINE OF PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICSBy Dominick Salvatore, Fordham University in New York and Eugene Diulio2003 / 144 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-139873-2 A Schaum Publication

CONTENTS

Chapter 1: Introduction to Economics Chapter 2: Demand, Supply, and Equilibrium Chapter 3: Unemployment, Inflation, and National Income Chapter 4: Consumption, Investment, Net Exports, and Government Expenditures Chapter 5: Traditional Keynesian Approach to Equilibrium OutputChapter 6: Fiscal Policy Chapter 7: Money, Banking, and the Federal Reserve Chapter 8: Monetary Policy Chapter 9: Economic Growth and ProductivityChapter 10: International Trade and Finance Chapter 11: Theory of Consumer Demand and Utility Chapter 12: Production Costs Chapter 13: Perfect Competition Chapter 14: Monopoly Chapter 15: Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly Chapter 16: Demand for Economic Resources Chapter 17: Pricing of Wages, Rent, Interest, and ProfitsIndex

21

ECONOMICS

International Edition EXPERIMENTS WITH ECONOMIC PRINCIPLES Microeconomics, 2nd EditionBy Theodore C. Bergstrom, University of California-Santa Barbara and John H Miller, Carnegie Mellon University2000 / 448 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-229518-4 ISBN: 978-0-07-116172-5 [IE] - Out of Print

www.econ.ucsb.edu/~tedh/eep/eep.html

CONTENTS

I Competitive Markets 1. Supply and Demand 2. Shifting Supply and Demand II Market Intervention and Public Policy 3. A Sales Tax 4. Prohibition 5. A Minimum Wage III. Imperfect Markets 6. Externalities 7. Monopolies and Cartels IV Firms and Technology 8. Entry and Exit 9. Network Externalities 10. Entry and Exit 11. Measuring Productivity 12. Comparative Advantage V Information, Auctions, and Bargaining 13. Adverse selection 14. Auctions 15. Fundamental Concepts VI Essential Economic Concepts

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF MACROECONOMICS 3rd EditionBy Eugene Diulio1999 / 333 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-017053-7 A Schaum Publication

CONTENTS

1. Introduction to Macroeconomic Analysis. 2. Measures of Output, Prices, and Employment. 3. Output in the Short and Long Run. 4. Models of Spending Equilibrium. 5. The IS-LM Framework. 6. Monetary and Fiscal Policy in a Closed Economy. 7. Monetary and Fiscal Policy in an Open Economy. 8. Schedules of Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply. 9. Aggregate Supply and Aggregate Demand Analysis. 10. Aggregate Supply, Aggregate Demand, and Inflation. 11. Economic Growth. 12. The Supply of and Demand for Money. 13. Consumption. 14. Theories of Investment.

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS2nd EditionBy Dominick Salvatore and Eugene A. Diulio 1996 / 368 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-054629-5 A Schaum Publication

CONTENTS

1. Introduction to Economics. 2. The Economic Problem. 3. Demand, Supply, and Equilibrium. 4. Introduction to Macroeconomics. 5. Unemployment, Inflation, and National Income. 6. Consumption, Investment, and Net Exports. 7. Keynesian Approach to Equilibrium Output. 8. Fiscal Policy. 9. Money and Banking. 10. The Federal Reserve and the Money Supply. 11. Monetary and Fiscal Policy. 12. Inflation, Unemployment, Deficits, and Debt. 13. Economic Growth and Productivity. 14. Demand, Supply and Elasticity. 15. The Theory of Consumer Demand and Utility. 16. Costs of Production. 17. Price and Output. 18. Perfect Competition. 19. Price and Output: Monopoly. 20. Price and Output: Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly. 21. Production and the Demand for Economic Resources. 22. Wage Determination.23. Rent, Interest, and Profits.





ECONOMICS

22

Principles of Macroeconomics

- Textbooks


MACROECONOMICS Brief Edition

By Campbell R McConnell, University of Ne-braska--Lincoln, Stanley L Brue, Pacifi c Lutheran University and Sean Masaki Flynn, Vassar College

2010 (February 2009) / 288 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-723097-5ISBN: 978-0-07-018328-5 [IE]

http://www.mcconnellbriefmicro1e.com

McConnell, Brue, and Flynn’s Macroeconomics, Brief Edition comes from the same author team as the market-leading Principles of Mac-roeconomics textbook. It continues to be innovative while teaching students in a clear, unbiased way. Like the 18th edition, Macroeco-nomics, Brief Edition has 3 main goals: help the beginning student master the principles essential for understanding the economizing problem, specifi c economic issues, and the policy alternatives; help the student understand and apply the economic perspective and reason accurately and objectively about economic matters; and promote a lasting student interest in economics and the economy. Although the Brief Edition is a derivative of Macroeconomics 18e, is not a cut-and-paste book that simply eliminates several chapters of Macroeconomics 18e and reorders and renumbers the retained content. Instead, Macroeconomics, Brief Edition is a very concise, highly integrated economics textbook that is distinct in purpose, style, and coverage from Macroeconomics 18e.

FEATURES

A Patient, Step-by-Step Approach: Realizing that for most stu-dents, this is their first introduction to economics, the authors take a patient, step-by step approach to teaching the material. The authors explain the theory and models slowly and thoroughly. This approach is easier to follow than that of many other texts on the market, which make assumptions and jump through material quickly, leaving stu-dents behind.

Balanced Coverage: McConnell and Brue have been the number one selling authors over the years because of their thorough and neutral coverage of the material—they present both sides and let instructors and students make up their own minds.

Focus on Core Models and Concepts: Macroeconomics, Brief Edition shortens and simplifies explanations where appropriate but stresses the importance of the economic perspective, including ex-plaining and applying core economic models. The authors’ strategy is to develop a limited set of essential models, illustrate them with analogies or anecdotes, explain them thoroughly, and apply them to real-world situations.

“Illustrating the Idea” features. “Illustrating the Idea” features use analogies to illustrate theory discussed in the book. For example, a piece on Bill Gates, Oprah Winfrey, and Alex Rodriquez illustrates the importance of opportunity costs in decision-making. Art in the public

square brings clarity to public goods and the free-rider problem. In the principles course where there is limited time to linger over topics, such discussions help students learn more quickly and breathe some life into what can otherwise be rather tedious discussions.

Interesting, Memorable Applications. “Applying the Analysis” sections walk students through economic theories and ideas and help cement comprehension. For example, the basics of the economic per-spective are applied to why customers tend to try to wait in the shortest checkout lines. Photo sets under the title “Photo Op” are included throughout the book to add visual interest, break up the density, and highlight important distinctions. These photo sets photo sets illustrate normal versus inferior goods, complements versus substitutes in consumption, public versus private investment, and more.

Assessment-Ready Learning Objectives and Testing: Each chapter begins with measurable learning objectives. These learning objectives are cross-referenced to specific test bank questions to allow construction of measurement instruments. This direct link between objectives and content facilitates now common accreditation efforts necessary to meet assurance of learning requirements.

CONTENTS

PART 1: INTRODUCTIONCh 1 Limits, Alternatives, and Choices (+ Appendix on Graphs) Ch 2 The Market System and the Circular FlowPART 2: PRICE, QUANTITY, and EFFICIENCYCh 3 Demand, Supply and Market Equilibrium (+ Web Appendix on Supply and Demand) Ch 4 Pubic Goods and ExternalitiesPART 3: GDP, GROWTH, AND INSTABILITYCh 5 GDP and Economic Growth Ch 6 Business Cycles, Unemployment, and Inflation Ch 7 Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply Ch 8 Fiscal Policy, Deficits, and DebtPART 4: MONEY, BANKING, AND MONETARY POLICYCh 9 Money and Banking Ch 10 Interest Rates and Monetary PolicyPART 5: LONG-RUN CONSIDERATIONS AND INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICSCh 11 Long Run Aggregate Supply and Aggregate Demand Ch 12 International Trade and Exchange Rates


MACROECONOMICS19th EditionBy Paul A Samuelson, Mass Institute of Tech and William D Nordhaus, Yale University2010 (May 2009) / 432 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-334422-5ISBN: 978-0-07-016494-9 [IE]


23

ECONOMICS


PRINCIPLES OF MACROECONOMICS4th Edition




In recent years, innovative texts in mathematics, science, foreign lan-guages, and other fi elds have achieved dramatic pedagogical gains by abandoning the traditional encyclopedic approach in favor of attempt-ing to teach a short list of core principles in depth. Two well-respected writers and researchers, Bob Frank and Ben Bernanke, have shown that the less-is-more approach affords similar gains in introductory economics. Although a few other texts have paid lip service to this new approach, Frank/Bernanke is by far the best throughout, and the best executed principles text in this mold. Avoiding excessive reliance on formal mathematical derivations, it presents concepts intuitively through examples drawn from familiar contexts. The authors introduce a coherent short list of core principles and reinforce them by illustrating and applying each in numerous contexts. Students are periodically asked to apply these principles and to answer related questions and exercises. Frank/Bernanke also encourages students to become “Economic Naturalists,” by employing basic economic principles to understand and explain what they observe in the world around them. An economic naturalist understands, for example, that infant safety seats are required in cars but not in airplanes because the marginal cost of space to accommodate these seats is typically zero in cars but often hundreds of dollars in airplanes. Such examples engage student interest while teaching them to see each feature of their economic landscape as the refl ection of an implicit or explicit cost-benefi t calculation.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

Significant revision of the macro chapter organization, based on reviewer and user feedback, to improve the flow of material, streamline and eliminate redundancies and to make material clearer for student understanding.

Material from 3e’s Chapter 17: International Trade is now found in Chapter 2: Comparative Advantage, and Chapter 16: International Trade and Capital Flows.

Labor market material from 3e’s Chapter 5: GDP and Unem-ployment, and Chapter 8: Workers, Wages and Unemployment has been combined into new Chapter 6: Wages and Unemployment. This eliminates the redundancy of unemployment coverage in 2 chapters, placing it now in just one (6).

GDP coverage from 3e Chapter 5: GDP and Unemployment is now placed within new Chapter 4: Spending, Income and GDP.

Material from 3e’s Chapter 10: Money, Prices and the Federal Reserve is now covered in new Chapter 9: The Financial System, Money, and Prices, as well as Chapter 12: Stabilizing the Economy: The Federal Reserve.

Material from 3e’s Chapter 11: Financial Markets and Interna-tional Capital Flows is now covered in new Chapter 8: Saving, Capital Formation, and Financial Markets, as well as Chapter 16: International Trade and Capital Flows.

Logic chains are now used to summarize the effects of monetary policy for better student understanding.

The relationship between output gaps, inflation and monetary policy developed in the simple Keynesian model is used to motivate the Fed’s Monetary Policy Rule.

New graphs and treatment of simple Keynesian model and AS/AD content (chapters 13-14). The new graphs and narrative clarify content, and match with the way our users and reviewers tell us they teach. Treatment now includes the upward sloping AS short-run curve that instructors like to use, but is based on Bernanke’s modern perspective on macroeconomic theory.

Graphs are also labeled with numbers and annotated in order to more clearly communicate shifts and changes in the graphs.





In introductory chapters, authors have combined Pitfalls 3 and 4 to into one Pitfall called: “Failing to Think at the Margin: Ignoring Sunk Costs and Confusing Average and Marginal Costs.” Former Pitfall 3 and 4 both dealt with Thinking at the Margin, so their combination eliminates redundancy and streamlines the material for students to digest.

Clarification of Formulas and Notation: Changed the equation for output gap from (Y* - Y) to (Y – Y*); this ensures that the calculation of the output gap yields a negative number in the case of a negative economic event, i.e. a recession.

CONTENTS

Part I IntroductionCh 1 Thinking Like an Economist Ch 2 Comparative Advantage Ch 3 Supply and DemandPart II Macroeconomics: Data and IssuesCh 4 Spending, Income, and GDP Ch 5 Inflation and the Price Level Ch 6 Wages and UnemploymentPart III The Economy in the Long RunCh 7 Economic Growth Ch 8 Saving, Capital Formation, and Financial Markets Ch 9 The Financial System, Money, and PricesPart IV The Economy in the Short RunCh 10 Short-Term Fluctuations Ch 11 Spending and Output in the Short Run Ch 12 Stabilizing the Economy: The Role of the Federal Reserve Ch 13 Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply Ch 14 Macroeconomic PolicyPart V The International EconomyCh 15 Exchange Rates and the Open Economy Ch 16 International Trade and Capital FlowsGlossary

ECONOMICS

24

NEW

PRINCIPLES OF MACROECONOMICSBrief Edition


2009 (October 2008) / 368 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-723182-8


CONTENTS

Part I IntroductionCh 1 Thinking Like an Economist Ch 2 Comparative Advantage Ch 3 Supply and DemandPart II Macroeconomics: Data and IssuesCh 4 Spending, Income, and GDP Ch 5 Inflation and the Price Level Ch 6 Wages and UnemploymentPart III The Economy in the Long RunCh 7 Economic Growth Ch 8 Saving, Capital Formation, and Financial Markets Ch 9 The Financial System, Money, and PricesPart IV The Economy in the Short RunCh 10 Short-Term Economic Fluctuations Ch 11 Spending and Output in the Short Run Ch 12 Stabilizing the Economy: The Role of the Federal Reserve Ch 13 Aggregate Demand, Aggregate Supply, and Macroeconomic PolicyPart V The International EconomyCh 14 Exchange Rates, International Trade, and Capital Flows


MACROECONOMICS18th Edition

By Campbell R McConnell, University of Ne-braska--Lincoln, Stanley L Brue, Pacifi c Lutheran University and Sean Masaki Flynn, Vassar Col-lege



McConnell and Brue’s Macroeconomics: Principles, Problems, and Policies is the leading Principles of Macroeconomics textbook. It con-tinues to be innovative while teaching students in a clear, unbiased way. The 18th Edition builds upon the tradition of leadership by sticking to 3 main goals: help the beginning student master the principles es-sential for understanding the economizing problem, specifi c economic issues, and the policy alternatives; help the student understand and apply the economic perspective and reason accurately and objectively about economic matters; and promote a lasting student interest in

economics and the economy.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

Updated, Contemporary Macroeconomics. The entire macro analysis in 18e reflects the modern, dominant paradigm. It uses economic growth as the central backdrop, and views business fluctua-tions as significant and costly variations in the rate of growth. In the models presented, the immediate short run is a period in which the price level and wages are not only sticky, but stuck; the short-run is a period in which product prices are flexible and wages are not; the long-run is a period in which both prices and wages are fully flexible. Each of these three periods—and thus each of the models based on them—are relevant to understanding the actual macro economy and its occasional difficulties.

Modern Macroeconomic Chapters:

New Chapter 6 introduces the macro framework in a lively, intuitive way, using a hypothetical single-fi rm economy. It also makes a clear, critical distinction between the broader concept of fi nancial economics and the narrower subset of investment called economic investment in a way that allows us to use both ideas in the macro.

Chapter 7 covers the measurement of nominal and real GDP, and clearly defi nes and measures real GDP, before moving to Chapter 8 on economics growth. This early placement of the growth chapter allows students to understand the importance of economic growth and the factors that drive it.

Chapter 9 then introduces business fl uctuations along the economy’s growth path and the problems of unemployment and infl ation that may result.

Following these core macro chapters (6-9), McConnell 18e begins to build models of the economy for the immediate short run and the short run. Students are therefore quickly introduced to models in which recessions and infl ation can occur. This approach uses the short-run AD-AS model to address fi scal policy and monetary policy earlier in the macro. Students are made fully aware from the start of the macro that the rate of economic growth is fundamentally impor-tant for standards of living. Yet, the quick introduction of sticky price models enables students to understand demand shocks, recession, stimulatory fi scal policy, Fed monetary policy actions, and other topics that dominant the news about the macro economy.

Because Chapter 5 provides an early introduction to interna-tional trade and international fi nance, the global economy is integrated from the start of the macro analysis. Then, after eventually developing the long-run AD-AS model, long-run analysis is linked back to our earlier discussions of growth.

Macro content is also fully modern in terms of its coverage of contemporary problems and policies. For example, the mortgage loan crisis, the economic slowdown, the Fed reductions of Federal funds rates, the Fed’s term auction facility, and the stimulus tax package of 2008 are covered.

Two New Chapters. These chapters incorporate contemporary analytical themes and address current economic issues.

Chapter 6 Introduction to Macroeconomics. As previously noted, this new chapter introduces the revised macroeconomic content in an interesting, concise way. It motivates the study of macroeco-nomics and establishes the analytical framework to the subject that is used in the book.

Chapter 17 Financial Economics. This new chapter exam-ines ideas such as compound interest, present value, arbitrage, risk, diversifi cation, and the risk-return relationship. Students need a better grounding in such ideas to truly understand the modern economy.

New (or Relocated) “Consider This” Boxes. “Consider This” boxes are used to provide analogies, examples, or stories that help drive home central economic ideas in a student-oriented, real-world manner. These brief vignettes, each accompanied by a photo, illustrate key points in a lively, colorful, and easy-to-remember way. New or relocated “Consider This” boxes include engaging topics such as: an

»

»

»

25

ECONOMICS

economic comparison of the two Koreas (Chapter 2), “buying Ameri-can” (Chapter 5), patent reform in India (Chapter 8), and the relative returns on standard versus ethical investing (Chapter 17).

New (or Relocated) “Last Word” Boxes. “Last Word” boxes are applications and case studies located toward the end of each chapter. New or relocated Last Words include: fair trade products (Chapter 5); the role of inventory management in reducing recessions (Chapter 6); the Fed’s response to the mortgage loan crisis (Chapter 16); the relative performance of index funds versus actively managed funds (Chapter 17); and Bastiat’s “Petition of the Candlemakers” (Chapter 20).

Contemporary Discussions and Examples. McConnell 18e is thoroughly updated with current references and discussions. Top-ics include: China’s rapid growth rate, the business downturn of late 2007 and early 2008, the stimulus package of 2008, Federal budget defi cits, the mortgage loan crisis, recent Fed monetary policy, the Fed’s new term auction facility, the Taylor rule, U.S. trade defi cits, and many more.

CONTENTS

Part 1: Introduction to Economics and the EconomyChapter 1: Limits, Alternatives, and Choices (+ Appendix) Chapter 2: The Market System and the Circular Flow Chapter 3: Demand, Supply and Market Equilibrium (+ Appendix) Chapter 4: The U.S. Economy: Private and Public Sectors Chapter 5: The United States in the Global EconomyPart 2: GDP, Growth, and InstabilityChapter 6: Introduction to Macroeconomics Chapter 7: Measuring Domestic Output and National Income Chapter 8: Economic Growth Chapter 9: Business Cycles, Unemployment, and InflationPart 3: Macroeconomic Models and Fiscal PolicyChapter 10: Basic Macroeconomic Relationships Chapter 11: The Aggregate Expenditures Model Chapter 12: Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply (+ Appen-dix) Chapter 13: Fiscal Policy, Deficits, and DebtPart 4: Money, Banking, and Monetary PolicyChapter 14: Money and Banking Chapter 15: Money Creation Chapter 16: Interest Rates and Monetary Policy Chapter 17: Financial EconomicsPart 5: Extensions and IssuesChapter 18: Extending the Analysis of Aggregate Supply Chapter 19: Current Issues in Macro Theory and PolicyPart 6: International EconomicsChapter 20: International Trade Chapter 21: Exchange Rates, Balance of Payments, and Trade Deficits Chapter 21 Web Supplement: Previous International Exchange-Rate Systems Chapter 22W: The Economics of Developing Countries

»

»

NEW

MACROECONOMICS9th Edition

By Stephen L Slavin, Union County College

2009 (July 2008) / 552 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-336246-5

CONTENTS

1 A Brief Economic History of the United States 2 Resource Utilization 3 The Mixed Economy 4 Supply and Demand 5 The Household-Consumption Sector 6 The Business-Investment Sector 7 The Government Sector 8 The Export-Import Sector 9 Gross Domestic Product 10 Economic Fluctuations, Unemployment, and Inflation 11 Classical and Keynesian Economics 12 Fiscal Policy and National Debt 13 Money and Banking 14 The Federal Reserve and Monetary Policy 15 A Century Of Economic Policy 16 Economic Growth and Productivity 17 Income Distribution and Poverty 18 International Trade 19 International Finance

NEWAust Adaptation

PRINCIPLES OF MACROECONOMICS2nd Edition

By Ben Bernanke, Princeton University, Nilss Olekalns, University of Melbourne and Robert H Frank, Cornell University

2008 (May 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-013527-7 ISBN: 978-0-07-009142-9 (with eBook)McGraw-Hill Australia Title

http://www/mhhe.com/au/bernanke2e

The outstanding pedigree of this author team sets the bar very high and this second Australian edition does not disappoint. Ben Bernanke, Bob Frank and Nilss Olekalns—Head of Economics at the University of Melbourne—introduce new material whilst maintaining their core approach of promoting a solid grounding in basic macroeconomic principles. Do you believe students should be trained to think criti-cally and analytically? If so, then this is the book for you. Economic issues and principles are introduced through simple examples, and then repeated and reinforced through illustrations, examples and background briefs. This text motivates students, is effective and





ECONOMICS

26

enjoyable to teach and is the essential text for introductory courses in macroeconomics.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

New chapter on fiscal policy

Innovative blend of economic theory and practice—key concepts communicated via everyday scenarios

Relaxed writing style and numerous practical illustrations to facilitate student learning

CONTENTS

Part 1: Core Principles of Economics1. Economics and the market2. Comparative advantage: the basis for tradePart 2: Issues in Macroeconomics3. Measuring macroeconomic performance: output and prices4. Measuring macroeconomic performance: savings and wealth5. Measuring macroeconomic performance: unemployment and the labour marketPart 3: Short-run Macroeconomics: The Analysis of the Busi-ness Cycle6. Short-run economic fluctuations7. Spending and output in the short run8. Fiscal policy 9. Money, prices and the Reserve Bank10. The Reserve Bank and the economy11. The aggregate demand aggregate supply modelPart 4: Long-run Macroeconomics: The Analysis of Economic Growth12. The economy in the long run: an introduction to economic growth13. The production function approach to understanding growth14. Savings, capital formation and comparative economic growthPart 5: Open Economy Macroeconomics15. An introduction to the open economy16. Exchange rates and the open economy17. The balance of payments—net exports and international capital flowsPart 6: Concluding Thoughts18. Macroeconomics: what have we learnt?Appendix A: Answers to in-chapter exercisesGlossaryIndex

MACROECONOMICS7th EditionBy David C Colander, Middlebury College2008 (October 2007) / 576 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-334366-2

Written in an informal colloquial style, this student-friendly Principles of Macroeconomics textbook does not sacrifice intellectual depth in its quest for accessibility. The author’s primary concern is to instill “eco-nomic sensibility” in the student. Colander emphasizes the intellectual and historical context to which the economic models are applied. The seventh edition has been significantly revised to make it simpler, shorter, more organized and more applicable to the real world.

CONTENTS

I: Introduction: Thinking like an EconomistChapter 1: Economics and Economic Reasoning Chapter 2: The Production Possibility Model, Trade, and Globaliza-tion.Appendix A: Graphish: The Language of GraphsChapter 3: Economic institutionsAppendix A: The History of Economic SystemsChapter 4: Supply and Demand

Chapter 5: Using Supply and DemandI: Macroeconomics ProblemsChapter 6: Economic Growth, Business Cycles, Unemployment, and Inflation Chapter 7: Measuring the Aggregate EconomyII: The Macroeconomic FrameworkChapter 8: Growth, Productivity, and the Wealth of Nations Chapter 9: The Aggregate Demand/Aggregate Supply Model Chapter 10: The Multiplier ModelIII: Money, Inflation, and Monetary PolicyChapter 11: The Financial Sector and the Demand for Money Chapter 12: Monetary Policy Chapter 13: Inflation and the Phillips CurveIV: Taxes, Budgets, and Fiscal PolicyChapter 14: Fiscal Policy and Public Finance Chapter 15: Politics, Deficits, and Debt Chapter 16: International Trade Policy, Comparative Advantage, and Outsourcing Chapter 17: International Policy Issues Chapter 18: Macro Policy in a Global Setting Chapter 19: Macro Policies in Developing Countries

THE MACRO ECONOMY TODAY11th EditionBy Bradley R Schiller, American University2008 (October 2007) / 544 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-328711-9


Brad Schiller’s text, The Macro Economy Today, 11e, is noted for three great strengths: readability, policy orientation, and pedagogy. His accessible writing style engages students and brings some of the excitement of domestic and global economic news into the classroom. Schiller emphasizes how policymakers must choose between govern-ment intervention and market reliance to resolve the core issues of what, how, and for whom to produce. This strategic choice is high-lighted throughout the full range of micro, macro, and international issues. Every chapter ends with a policy issue that emphasizes the markets vs. government dilemma. And Schiller packs his chapters with the facts of economic life—real stories and applications. This is a book that teaches economics in a relevant context with careful pedagogy. It is also the only principles text that presents all macro theory in the single consistent context of the AS/AD framework. Schiller, 11e is for students motivated by real-world policy issues who want to become economically literate. This is a book students actually READ. Schiller is also known for its cutting-edge and current coverage of today’s issues.

CONTENTS

PrefacePart 1 The Economic ChallengeChapter 1 Economics: The Core IssuesAppendix: using GraphsChapter 2 The U.S. Economy: A Global View Chapter 3 Supply and Demand Chapter 4 The Public SectorPart 2 Measuring Macro OutcomesChapter 5 National-Income Accounting Chapter 6 Unemployment Chapter 7 InflationPart 3 Cyclical InstabilityChapter 8 The Business Cycle Chapter 9 Aggregate DemandAppendix: The Keynesian CrossChapter 10 Self-Adjustment or Instability?Part 4 Fiscal Policy LeversChapter 11 Fiscal Policy Chapter 12 Deficits, Surpluses, and DebtPart 5 Monetary Policy OptionsChapter 13 Money and Banks

27

ECONOMICS

Chapter 14 The Federal Reserve System Chapter 15 Monetary PolicyPart 6 Supply-Side OptionsChapter 16 Supply-Side Policy: Short-run Options Chapter 17 Growth and Productivity: Long-run PossibilitiesPart 7 Policy ConstraintsChapter 18 Global Macro Chapter 19 Theory versus RealityPart 8 International EconomicsChapter 20 International trade Chapter 21 International Finance Chapter 22 Global PovertyGlossary Index Reference Tables

MACROECONOMICS8th EditionBy Stephen Slavin, Union College2008 (September 2006) / 544 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-328148-3


Steve Slavin’s lively and comprehensive Macroeconomics has a student-friendly, step-by-step approach; value pricing; and a built-in Workbook/Study Guide. Instructors and students like the author’s humorous anecdotes, direct language, and easy conversational style. The text encourages active rather than passive reading.

CONTENTS

1 A Brief Economic History of the United States. 2 Resource Utilization. 3 Supply and Demand. 4 The Mixed Economy. 5 The Household-Consumption Sector. 6 The Business-Investment Sector. 7 The Government Sector. 8 The Export-Import Sector. 9 Gross Domestic Product. 10 Economic Fluctuations, Unemployment, and Inflation. 11 Classical and Keynesian Economics. 12 Fiscal Policy and National Debt. 13 Money and Banking. 14 The Federal Reserve and Monetary Policy. 15 A Century Of Economic Policy. 16 Economic Growth and Productivity. 17 Income Distribution and Poverty. 18 International Trade. 19 International Finance

CONCISE GUIDE TO MACROECONOMICSBy David Moss2007 (July 2007) / 208 pagesISBN: 978-1-42-210179-7 A Harvard Professional Reference Title

Now more than ever before, executives and managers need to understand their larger economic context. In A Concise Guide to Macroeconomics, David Moss leverages his many years of teaching experience at Harvard Business School to lay out important macroeco-nomic concepts in engaging, clear, and concise terms. In a simple and intuitive way, he breaks down the ideas into “output,” “money,” and “expectations.” In addition, Moss introduces powerful tools for interpreting the big-picture economic developments that shape events in the contemporary business arena. Detailed examples are also drawn from history to illuminate important concepts. This book

is destined to become a staple in MBA courses—as well as the go-to resource for executives and managers at all levels seeking to brush up on their knowledge of macroeconomic dynamics.

CONTENTS

Acknowledgments Introduction PART I: UNDERSTANDING THE MACRO ECONOMYChapter 1: OutputChapter 2: MoneyChapter 3: Expectations PART II: SELECTED TOPICS – BACKGROUND AND MECHAN-NICSChapter 4: A Short History of Money and Monetary Policy in the United States Chapter 5: The Fundamentals of GDP Accounting Chapter 6: Reading a Balance of Payments Statement Chapter 7: Understanding Exchange Rates Conclusion: Putting the Pieces Together

MACROECONOMICS8th EditionBy John Jackson and Ron McIver, University of South Australia2006 (September 2006) ISBN: 978-0-07-471698-4 McGraw-Hill Australia Title

Now in its 8th edition, Jackson & McIver has successfully introduced many new students of economics to the principles essentials to a proper and clear understanding of fundamental economic problems. Written for business students, the authors aim to equip tomorrow’s business manager with the necessary knowledge and tools, to ana-lyse and interpret data, and to under the implication of government policies on business.

Thorough Grounding: Written primarily for business majors, Jack-son & McIver is a refined and mature, yet up-to-date, text that gives students a thorough grounding in economic principles and theories.

Balanced Approach that Builds Critical Thinking Skills: Jackson & McIver continues to introduce business students to key principles essential to an understanding of fundamental economic problems. Students are introduced to a number of alternative viewpoints, ena-bling them to form their own views about the benefits and limitations of economic ideology, and to actively analyse economic debates in both the public and private sectors.

International and Current: Jackson & McIver is a text that reflects the increasing global environment that tomorrow’s Business Manager will face. It has updated data throughout, with some new case studies included. The “Practising Economist” feature encourages students to analyse and interpret statistical information for use in the business everyday. Data has been updated throughout the text. Previous Chapters 6 & 7 have been amalgamated and streamlined into a new chapter Aggregate Expenditures, Output and Multipliers. Chapters 16 & 17 have also been substantially revised and updated.

CONTENTS

Part 1, Introduction to Economics Ch 1, The nature and method of economics /Appendix: Graphs and their meaning Ch 2, The economising problem Ch 3, Demand and supply Part 2, Macroeconomic Activity and Fiscal Policy Ch 4, Australia’s national and international accounts/Appendix: Other national accounting concepts Ch 5, The macroeconomic environment Ch 6, Aggregate expenditures model and multipliers/Appendix: Deri-vation of the multipliers Ch 7, Aggregate demand and aggregate supply Ch 8, Fiscal policy and the public debate

ECONOMICS

28

Part 3, Monetary Policy and Economic Stability Ch 9, Money, banking and the financial system Ch 10, How banks create money Ch 11, Monetary policy Ch 12, Macroeconomic ideas--evolution and debates Ch 13, Inflation Ch 14, Aggregate supply and the labour market Part 4, Growth and Development Ch 15, The economics of growth Ch 16, Growth and the developing countries Part 5, Exchange Rates and the International Monetary System Ch 17, Models of the exchange rate Ch 18, The international monetary system

International Edition MACROECONOMICS18th EditionBy Paul Samuelson, Massachusetts Institute of Technology and William Nordhaus, Yale University2005 / 480 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-287206-4 ISBN: 978-0-07-111188-1 [IE]


CONTENTS

PART ONE: BASIC CONCEPTS 1 The Fundamentals of Economics Appendix 1 How to Read Graphs 2 Markets and Government in a Modern Economy 3 Basic Elements of Supply and Demand PART TWO: MACROECONOMICS: ECONOMIC GROWTH AND BUSINESS CYCLES Chapter 4 Overview of Macroeconomics Appendix 4 Macroeconomic Data Chapter 5 Measuring Economic Activity Chapter 6 Consumption and Investment Chapter 7 Business Fluctuations and the Theory of Aggregate De-mand Chapter 8 The Multiplier Model Chapter 9 Money, Banking, and Financial Markets Chapter 10 Central Banking and Monetary Policy PART THREE: ECONOMIC GROWTH AND MACROECONOMIC POLICY Chapter 11 The Process of Economic Growth Chapter 12 The Challenge of Economic Development Chapter 13 Exchange Rates and the International Financial System Chapter 14 Open-Economy Macroeconomics PART FOUR: UNEMPLOYMENT, INFLATION, AND ECONOMIC POLICY Chapter 15 Unemployment and the Foundations of Aggregate Supply Chapter 16 Ensuring Price Stability Chapter 17 The Warring Schools of Macroeconomics Chapter 18 Policies for Growth and Stability

Principles of Microeconomics

- Textbooks


MICROECONOMICSBrief Edition

By Campbell R McConnell, University of Ne-braska--Lincoln, Stanley L Brue, Pacifi c Lutherarn University and Sean Masaki Flynn, Vassar College


http://www.mcconnellbriefmicro1e.com

McConnell and Brue’s Microeconomics, Brief Edition comes from the same author team as the market-leading Principles of Microeconom-ics textbook. It continues to be innovative while teaching students in a clear, unbiased way. Like the 18th edition, Microeconomics, Brief Edition has 3 main goals: help the beginning student master the prin-ciples essential for understanding the economizing problem, specifi c economic issues, and the policy alternatives; help the student under-stand and apply the economic perspective and reason accurately and objectively about economic matters; and promote a lasting student interest in economics and the economy. Although the Brie Editionf is a derivative of Microeconomics 18e, is not a cut-and-paste book that simply eliminates several chapters of Economics 18e and reorders and renumbers the retained content. Instead, Microeconomics, Brief Edition is a very concise, highly integrated economics textbook that is distinct in purpose, style, and coverage from Microeconomics 18e.

FEATURES

A Patient, Step-by-Step Approach: Realizing that for most stu-dents, this is their first introduction to economics, the authors take a patient, step-by step approach to teaching the material. The authors explain the theory and models slowly and thoroughly. This approach is easier to follow than that of many other texts on the market, which make assumptions and jump through material quickly, leaving stu-dents behind.

Balanced Coverage: McConnell and Brue have been the number one selling authors over the years because of their thorough and neutral coverage of the material—they present both sides and let instructors and students make up their own minds.

Focus on Core Models and Concepts: Microeconomics, Brief Edition shortens and simplifies explanations where appropriate but stresses the importance of the economic perspective, including ex-plaining and applying core economic models. The authors’ strategy is to develop a limited set of essential models, illustrate them with analogies or anecdotes, explain them thoroughly, and apply them to real-world situations.

“Illustrating the Idea” features. “Illustrating the Idea” features use analogies to illustrate theory discussed in the book. For instance, elastic versus inelastic demand is illustrated by comparing the stretch of an Ace bandage and that of a tight rubber tie-down. A piece on Bill Gates, Oprah Winfrey, and Alex Rodriquez illustrates the importance of opportunity costs in decision-making. In the principles course where there is limited time to linger over topics, such discussions

29

ECONOMICS

help students learn more quickly and breathe some life into what can otherwise be rather tedious discussions.

Interesting, Memorable Applications. “Applying the Analysis” sections walk students through economic theories and ideas and help cement comprehension. For example, the basics of the eco-nomic perspective are applied to why customers tend to try to wait in the shortest checkout lines. Photo sets under the title “Photo Op” are included throughout the book to add visual interest, break up the density, and highlight important distinctions. These photo sets photo sets illustrate normal versus inferior goods, complements versus sub-stitutes in consumption, homogeneous versus differentiated products, substitute resources versus complementary resources, and more.

Assessment-Ready Learning Objectives and Testing: Each chapter begins with measurable learning objectives. These learning objectives are cross-referenced to specific test bank questions to allow construction of measurement instruments. This direct link between objectives and content facilitates now common accreditation efforts necessary to meet assurance of learning requirements.

CONTENTS

PART 1: INTRODUCTIONCh 1 Limits, Alternatives, and Choices (+ Appendix on Graphs) Ch 2 The Market System and the Circular FlowPART 2: PRICE, QUANTITY, and EFFICIENCYCh 3 Demand, Supply and Market Equilibrium (+ Web Appendix on Supply and Demand) Ch 4 Elasticity of Demand and Supply Ch 5 Pubic Goods and ExternalitiesPART 3: PRODUCT MARKETSCh 6 Businesses and Their Costs Ch 7 Pure Competition Ch 8 Pure Monopoly Ch 9 Monopolistic Competition and OligopolyPART 4: RESOURCE MARKETSCh 10 Wage Determination Ch 11 Income Inequality and PovertyPART 5: INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICSCh 12 International Trade and Exchange Rates


MICROECONOMICS19th EditionBy Paul A Samuelson, Mass Institute of Tech and William D Nordhaus, Yale University2010 (April 2009) / 432 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-334423-2ISBN: 978-0-07-016495-6 [IE]


NEW

PRINCIPLES OF MICROECONOMICSBrief Edition


2009 (September 2008) / 368 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-723183-5


CONTENTS

Part I IntroductionCh 1 Thinking Like an Economist Ch 2 Comparative Advantage Ch 3 Supply and DemandPart II Competition and the Invisible HandCh 4 Elasticity Ch 5 Demand Ch 6 Perfectly Competitive Supply Ch 7 Efficiency, Exchange, and the Invisible Hand in ActionPart III Market ImperfectionsCh 8 Monopoly, Oligopoly, and Monopolistic Competition Ch 9 Games and Strategic Behavior Ch 10 Externalities and Property RightsPart IV Economics of Public PolicyCh 11 Using Economics to Make Better Policy Choices


PRINCIPLES OF MICROECONOMICS4th Edition


2009 (August 2008) / 480 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-336266-3ISBN: 978-0-07-128540-7 [IE]


In recent years, innovative texts in mathematics, science, foreign lan-guages, and other fi elds have achieved dramatic pedagogical gains by abandoning the traditional encyclopedic approach in favor of attempt-ing to teach a short list of core principles in depth. Two well-respected writers and researchers, Bob Frank and Ben Bernanke, have shown that the less-is-more approach affords similar gains in introductory economics. Although a few other texts have paid lip service to this new approach, Frank/Bernanke is by far the best throughout, and the best executed principles text in this mold. Avoiding excessive reliance on formal mathematical derivations, it presents concepts intuitively through examples drawn from familiar contexts. The authors introduce a coherent short list of core principles and reinforce them by illustrating and applying each in numerous contexts. Students are

ECONOMICS

30

periodically asked to apply these principles and to answer related questions and exercises. Frank/Bernanke also encourages students to become “Economic Naturalists,” by employing basic economic principles to understand and explain what they observe in the world around them. An economic naturalist understands, for example, that infant safety seats are required in cars but not in airplanes because the marginal cost of space to accommodate these seats is typically zero in cars but often hundreds of dollars in airplanes. Such examples engage student interest while teaching them to see each feature of their economic landscape as the refl ection of an implicit or explicit cost-benefi t calculation.

NEW TO THIS EDITION





In introductory chapters, authors have combined Pitfalls 3 and 4 to into one Pitfall called: “Failing to Think at the Margin: Ignoring Sunk Costs and Confusing Average and Marginal Costs.” Former Pitfall 3 and 4 both dealt with Thinking at the Margin, so their combination eliminates redundancy and streamlines the material for students to digest.

The material on outsourcing and international trade (previously Chapter 9) has been integrated into the discussions within Chapter 2: Comparative Advantage.

Clarification of Formulas and Notation: MQ in the Economies of Scale section is now portrayed as M*Q to clarify that this indicates a multiplication and M times Q.

CONTENTS

Part I IntroductionCh 1 Thinking Like an Economist Ch 2 Comparative Advantage Ch 3 Supply and DemandPart II Competition and the Invisible HandCh 4 Elasticity Ch 5 Demand Ch 6 Perfectly Competitive Supply Ch 7 Efficiency and Exchange Ch 8 The Invisible Hand in ActionPart III Market ImperfectionsCh 9 Monopoly, Oligopoly, and Monopolistic Competition Ch 10 Games and Strategic Behavior Ch 11 Externalities and Property Rights Ch 12 The Economics of InformationPart IV Economics of Public PolicyCh 13 Labor Markets, Poverty, and Income Distribution Ch 14 The Environment, Health, and Safety Ch 15 Public Goods and Tax Policy


MICROECONOMICS18th Edition

By Campbell R McConnell, University of Ne-braska--Lincoln, Stanley L Brue, Pacifi c Lutheran University and Sean Masaki Flynn, Vassar Col-lege



McConnell and Brue’s Microeconomics: Principles, Problems, and Policies is the leading Principles of Microeconomics textbook. It con-tinues to be innovative while teaching students in a clear, unbiased way. The 18th Edition builds upon the tradition of leadership by sticking to 3 main goals: help the beginning student master the principles es-sential for understanding the economizing problem, specifi c economic issues, and the policy alternatives; help the student understand and apply the economic perspective and reason accurately and objectively about economic matters; and promote a lasting student interest in economics and the economy.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

Micro First Organization. McConnell 18e’s organization now places micro chapters first, to reflect how contemporary economists are thinking about the linkage between micro and macro economics. Professors have increasingly changed their course sequencing to micro-first, and now McConnell 18e matches up with this modern direction. Of course, chapters are still written in a self-contained manner, so that an instructor could still choose to cover chapters in any order they prefer.

Two New Chapters. These chapters incorporate contemporary analytical themes and address current economic issues.

Chapter 15 Natural Resource and Energy Economics. Brought from the 17e Website, this chapter is now included in the book. An understanding of basic economic principles of natural resource eco-nomics will be critical to future citizens and leaders.

Chapter 22 Immigration. This chapter covers the economics of immigration—both legal and illegal—in an analytical and balanced way. Students are highly interested in this subject, yet often lack the economic knowledge and tools to grasp the issues and debates. The chapter also serves as a timely application of the economic principles developed in the prior chapters on resource markets.

Three New Appendixes. Three additional chapter appendixes are available for optional assignment and are supported by supple-mentary materials. The concise new appendixes are:

Chapter 3: Additional Examples of Supply and Demand. Additional examples of supply and demand are provided, including concrete examples of simultaneous shifts in supply and demand curves. Products covered include lettuce, corn and ethanol, pink salmon, gasoline, and sushi. The Olympic Games illustrate examples of pre-set prices, shortages, and surpluses.

Chapter 11: Additional Game Theory Applications. Several applications of game theory are placed in an appendix at the end of the micro chapter on monopolistic competition and oligopoly. Concepts such as dominant strategies, Nash equilibrium, repeated games, and fi rst-mover advantages are included for instructors who like to stress game theory in dealing with oligopoly.

»

»

31

ECONOMICS

Chapter 13: Labor Unions and their Impacts. This compact appendix covers union membership, the decline of unions, collective bargaining, and the economic effects of unions.

New (or Relocated) “Consider This” Boxes. “Consider This” boxes are used to provide analogies, examples, or stories that help drive home central economic ideas in a student-oriented, real-world manner. These brief vignettes, each accompanied by a photo, illustrate key points in a lively, colorful, and easy-to-remember way. New or relocated “Consider This” boxes include engaging topics such as: an economic comparison of the two Koreas (Chapter 2), “buying American” (Chapter 5), the prisoner’s dilemma (Chapter 11), government policies and birth rates (Chapter 15), putting corn in our gas tanks (Chapter 19).

New (or Relocated) “Last Word” Boxes. “Last Word” boxes are applications and case studies located toward the end of each chapter. New or relocated Last Words include: fair trade products (Chapter 5); insights from behavioral economics (Chapter 7); the economic growth-environmental protection link (Chapter 15); and past, current, and proposed U.S. immigration laws (Chapter 22).

Contemporary Discussions and Examples. McConnell 18e is thoroughly updated with current references and discussions. Topics include: the cost of the war in Iraq, surpluses and shortages of tickets at the Olympics, impacts of ethanol subsides, off shoring of American jobs, trade adjustment assistance, the additions of countries to the European Union, normal trade relations status, aspects of be-havioral economics, game theory, impacts of ethanol subsidies, the most rapidly expanding and disappearing U.S. jobs, oil and gasoline prices, climate change, ethanol subsidies, the Farm Act of 2008, consumption versus income inequality, prescription drug coverage under Medicare, Health Savings Accounts (HSAs), comprehensive immigration reform, and many more.

CONTENTS

Part 1: Introduction to Economics and the EconomyChapter 1: Limits, Alternatives, and Choices (+ Appendix) Chapter 2: The Market System and the Circular Flow Chapter 3: Demand, Supply and Market Equilibrium (+ Appendix) Chapter 4: The U.S. Economy: Private and Public Sectors Chapter 5: The United States in the Global EconomyPart 2: Microeconomics of Product MarketsChapter 6: Elasticity, Consumer Surplus, and Producer Surplus Chapter 7: Consumer Behavior (+ Appendix) Chapter 8: The Costs of Production Chapter 9: Pure Competition Chapter 10: Pure Monopoly Chapter 11: Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly (+ Appendix) Chapter 11W: Technology, R&D, and EfficiencyPart 3: Microeconomics of Resource MarketsChapter 12: The Demand for Resources Chapter 13: Wage Determination (+ Appendix) Chapter 14: Rent, Interest, and Profit Chapter 15: Natural Resource and Energy EconomicsPart 4: Microeconomics of GovernmentChapter 16: Government and Market Failure Chapter 17: Public Choice Theory and the Economics of TaxationPart 5: Microeconomic Issues and PoliciesChapter 18: Antitrust Policy and Regulation Chapter 19: Agriculture: Economics and Policy Chapter 20: Income Inequality, Discrimination, and Poverty Chapter 21: Health Care Chapter 22: ImmigrationPart 6: International EconomicsChapter 23: International Trade

»

»

»

»


PRINCIPLES OF MICROECONOMICS

By James D Miller, Smith College


http://www.mhhe.com/millermicro1e

Miller, Principles of Microeconomics, 1e is written on the premise that Microeconomics should fascinate. The book was written to read more like a non-fi ction book than a traditional textbook, and uses engaging and sometimes irreverent examples to capture student interest. Miller 1e aims to introduce concepts clearly with a realistic world view, so students are able to reconcile economic theory with their immediate surroundings. Uniquely, Miller 1e makes use of many original, fi ctional stories to explain and complement the material. The stories do not displace analysis of traditional microeconomic theory; they stimulate student interest and provide an intuitive introduction to numerous concepts. Rather than implicitly assume that politicians always put the common good ahead of their own self-interests as most texts do, Miller 1e uses public choice theory to present a realistic view of politicians and their effect on economics. In addition, while many texts ignore, or briefl y cover, the important topic of Innovation, Miller 1e considers the powerful force of Innovation extensively in the text, addressing it in over half of the chapters, and creating an instant tie-in for today’s digital-age students.

FEATURES

Student Engagement: Effectively engages students inside and outside the classroom.

Intuition. Takes students on a journey of economics intuition, making concepts clear through fi ctional situations. Using many origi-nal, fi ctional stories to explain and complement the material, Miller does not displace analysis of traditional microeconomic theory, rather, uses the stories to stimulate student interest and provide a non-math-ematical, intuitive introduction to numerous concepts.

Innovation. A majority of the chapters feature a focus on tech-nological innovation, one of the main driving factors in the modern economy. Examples are chosen that will resonate with students, such as iPods and open-source software.

Humor. Each chapter incorporates cartoons, anecdotes or quips that offer perspective, and help bring levity to complex subject matter.

Design. Bold graphics and design features keep students’ at-tention and reinforce the real-world ties of even the fi ctional stories.

Economics Concepts: Presents a clear, complete approach to teaching microeconomics. Covers all sides of the economics picture today, including the gritty questions that students really want to know, but are often avoided.

Fallibility of Government. While most texts tend to portray govern-ment as having only a positive effect on economics, Miller 1e strives to show that governments, as well as markets, can be imperfect. This approach actually clarifies learning for the students, enabling them to reconcile economic theory with their own experiences in an imperfect world.

ECONOMICS

32

Property Rights. Devotes an entire chapter to the concepts and controversies surrounding property rights both domestically and abroad.

National and International Examples. Since microeconomics encompasses more than just domestic issues, Miller 1e uses an international lens when dealing with the concepts presented in the text to help students make connection between economic theory and the reality of the world today.

Costs. Presents the typically dry topic of costs in a new and fresh way, emphasizing real-world examples that are relevant to students’ lives and experiences.

Intuitive Organization. The chapters can be covered in order up to Chapter 13, and Chapters 14-17 can be covered in any order the instructor deems appropriate. Additionally, for condensed courses, Chapters 11-13 can be skipped without any loss of continuity.

Pedagogy: Avoids clutter and keeps text streamlined and acces-sibly by employing only those pedagogical elements that instructors have said actually facilitate learning.

Class Discussion. Most chapters feature thought-provoking top-ics and extensive end-of-chapter questions that encompass a variety of discussion topics perfect for classroom dialogue.

Rhetorical Questions. Poses several questions that prompt stu-dents to think about what they would do in a given situation. This allows them to apply economic concepts to their everyday lives, and encour-ages them to reevaluate the world they often take for granted.

Learning Objectives. Complete learning objectives are outlined on the first page of each chapter to tie the text seamlessly with the supplements and provide easy metrics by which to measure student achievement.

Short Intro Section. Combines the first two introductory chapters into one chapter to eliminate a great deal of needless textbook exposi-tion in favor of using examples that students can identify immediately, without extensive set-up.

CONTENTS

PART ONE: INTRODUCTIONChapter 1: What is Microeconomics?PART TWO: THE MAGIC OF THE MARKETPLACEChapter 2: Introducing Supply and Demand Chapter 3: Supply and Demand Intertwined Chapter 4: Elasticities Chapter 5: Policy Analysis with Supply and Demand Chapter 6: Wealth Creation and Destruction Chapter 7: Trade Chapter 8: Costs Chapter 9: Perfect CompetitionPART THREE: IMPERFECT MARKETS/IMPERFECT GOVERN-MENTSChapter 10: Challenge to Market Effectiveness 1: Monopolies Chapter 11: Challenge to Market Effectiveness 2: Oligopolies Chapter 12: Government Imperfections Chapter 13: Challenge to Market Effectiveness 3: Externalities and the Environment Chapter 14: Challenge to Market Effectiveness 4: Inadequate Prop-erty Rights Chapter 15: Challenge to Market Effectiveness 5: Incomplete Infor-mation Chapter 16: Challenge to Market Effectiveness 6?: InequalityPART FOUR: ECONOMICS IS EVERYWHEREChapter 17: Economics is Everywhere

NEW

MICROECONOMICS9th Edition

By Stephen L Slavin, Uion County College

2009 (August 2008) / 552 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-336245-8

CONTENTS

1 A Brief Economic History of the United States 2 Resource Utilization 3 The Mixed Economy 4 Supply and Demand 5 Demand, Supply, and Equilibrium 6 Elasticities of Supply and Demand 7 Theory of Consumer Behavior 8 Cost 9 Profit, Loss, and Perfect Competition 10 Monopoly 11 Monopolistic Competition 12 Oligopoly 13 Corporate Mergers and Antitrust 14 Demand in the Factor Market 15 Labor Unions 16 Labor Markets and Wage Rates 17 Rent, Interest, and Profit 18 Income Distribution and Poverty 19 International Trade 20 International Finance





33

ECONOMICS

MICROECONOMICS7th EditionBy David C Colander, Middlebury College2008 (September 2007) / 576 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-334365-5

Written in an informal colloquial style, this student-friendly Principles of Microeconomics textbook does not sacrifi ce intellectual depth in its quest for accessibility. The author’s primary concern is to instill ‘economic sensibility’ in the student. Colander emphasizes the intellec-tual and historical context to which the economic models are applied. The seventh edition has been signifi cantly revised to make it simpler, shorter, more organized and more applicable to the real world.

CONTENTS

I: Introduction: Thinking like an EconomistChapter 1: Economics and Economic Reasoning Chapter 2: The Production Possibility Model, Trade, and Globaliza-tion. Chapter 3: Economic institutions Chapter 4: Supply and Demand Chapter 5: Using Supply and DemandII: MicroeconomicsI: Microeconomics: The BasicsChapter 6: Describing Supply and Demand: Elasticities Chapter 7: Taxation and Government InterventionII: Foundations of Supply and DemandChapter 8: The Logic of Individual Choice: The Foundation of Supply and Demand Chapter 9: Production and Cost Analysis I Chapter 10: Production and Cost Analysis IIIII: Market StructureChapter 11: Perfect Competition Chapter 12: Monopoly Chapter 13: Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly IV: Real World Competition Chapter 14: Game Theory, Strategic Decisions Marking, and Behav-ioral Economics Chapter 15: Real-World Competition and Technology Chapter 16: Antitrust Policy and RegulationV: Factor MarketsChapter 17: Work and the Labor MarketChapter 17w: Non wage and Asset Income: Rents, Profits, and InterestChapter 18: Who Gets What? The Distribution of IncomeV: Applying Economic Reasoning to PolicyChapter 19: Government Policy and Market FailuresChapter 19w: Politics and Economics: The Case of Agriculture MarketsChapter 20: Microeconomic Policy, Economic Reasoning, and Be-yond Chapter 21: International Trade Policy, Comparative Advantage, and OutsourcingIII: MacroeconomicsI: Macroeconomic ProblemsChapter 23: Economic Growth, Business Cycles, Unemployment, and Inflation Chapter 24: National Income AccountingII: The Macroeconomic FrameworkChapter 25: Growth, Productivity, and the Wealth of Nations Chapter 26: Aggregate Demand, Aggregate Supply, and Modern Macroeconomics Chapter 27: The Multiplier ModelIII: Money, Inflation, and Monetary PolicyChapter 28: Money, Banking, and the Financial Sector Chapter 29: Monetary Policy and the Debate about Macro Policy Chapter 30: Inflation and Its Relationship to Unemployment and GrowthIV: Macro Policy in PerspectiveChapter 31: Aggregate Demand Policy in Perspective Chapter 32: Politics, Deficits, and Debt Chapter 33: Macro Policies in Developing Countries

V: International Policy IssuesChapter 34: International Financial Policy Chapter 35: Macro Policy in a Global Setting

NEW

PRINCIPLES OF MICROECONOMICS2nd Edition

By Robert H Frank, Cornell University, Sarah Jennings, University of Tasmania and Ben Bern-anke, Princeton University

2008 (September 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-014444-6McGraw-Hill Australia Title

http://www.mhhe.com/au/frank2e

Now in its second edition and authored by a highly regarded interna-tional team, Principles of Microeconomics is the ideal introduction to modern microeconomics. This book encourages students to develop an intuitive understanding of economics and view it as a way of solving problems. Core economic concepts are introduced in straightforward examples and their application reinforced through real-life scenarios, topical vignettes and review exercises. Providing a comprehensive grounding in microeconomic principles, this text is perfectly suited for a fi rst course at both undergraduate and postgraduate level.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

Promotes critical and analytical thinking - Thinking As An Econo-mist cases train students to observe life with an economist’s eye. Students come to understand the economic motivations and issues behind everyday behaviour, to recognise related economic policies and propose effective solutions.

Engaging and easy to read - a relaxed and conversational writing style is a hallmark of this text. This successful approach is continued and supported in this edition through the use of clear full-colour illustrations, topical background briefings and extensive end-of-chapter material

CONTENTS

Part 1: Introduction1. Thinking as an economist 2. Comparative advantage: the basis for exchange 3. Supply and demand: an introductionPart 2: Competition4. Elasticity 5. Demand: the benefit side of the market 6. Perfectly competitive supply: the cost side of the market 7. Efficiency and exchange 8. International trade and trade policy 9. The quest for profit and the invisible handPart 3: Imperfect Competition10. Monopoly and other forms of imperfect competition 11. Thinking strategicallyPart 4: Market Failure And Public Policy12. Externalities, common resources and property rights 13. Public goods and tax policy 14. The economics of information 15. Labour markets, poverty and income distribution Appendix A: Answers to in-chapter exercises Glossary Index

ECONOMICS

34

THE MICRO ECONOMY TODAY11th EditionBy Bradley R Schiller, American University2008 (October 2007) / 544 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-328712-6


Brad Schiller’s text, The Micro Economy Today, 11e, is noted for three great strengths: readability, policy orientation, and pedagogy. His accessible writing style engages students and brings some of the excitement of domestic and global economic news into the classroom. Schiller emphasizes how policymakers must choose between govern-ment intervention and market reliance to resolve the core issues of what, how, and for whom to produce. This strategic choice is high-lighted throughout the full range of micro, macro, and international issues. Every chapter ends with a policy issue that emphasizes the markets vs. government dilemma. And Schiller packs his chapters with the facts of economic life—real stories and applications. This is a book that teaches economics in a relevant context with careful pedagogy. It is also the only principles text that presents all macro theory in the single consistent context of the AS/AD framework. Schiller 11e is for students motivated by real-world policy issues who want to become economically literate. This is a book students actually READ. Schiller is also known for its cutting-edge and current coverage of today’s issues.

CONTENTS

PrefacePart 1 The Economic ChallengeChapter 1 Economics: The Core IssuesAppendix: using GraphsChapter 2 The U.S. Economy: A Global View Chapter 3 Supply and Demand Chapter 4 The Public SectorPart 2 Product Markets: The BasicsChapter 5 Consumer DemandAppendix: Indifference CurvesChapter 6 The Costs of ProductionPart 3 Market StructureChapter 7 The Competitive Firm Chapter 8 Competitive Markets Chapter 9 Monopoly Chapter 10 Oligopoly Chapter 11 Monopolistic CompetitionPart 4 Regulatory IssuesChapter 12 (De)Regulation of Business Chapter 13 Environmental Protection Chapter 14 The Farm ProblemPart 5 Factor Markets: Basic TheoryChapter 15 The Labor Market Chapter 16 Labor Unions Chapter 17 Financial MarketsPart 6 Distributional IssuesChapter 18 Taxes: Equity versus Efficiency Chapter 19 Transfer Payments: Welfare and Social SecurityPart 7 International EconomicsChapter 20 International trade Chapter 21 International Finance Chapter 22 Global PovertyGlossary Index Reference Tables

MICROECONOMICS8th EditionBy Stephen Slavin, Union College2008 (September 2006) / 544 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-328147-6


Steve Slavin’s lively and comprehensive Microeconomics has a student-friendly, step-by-step approach; value pricing; and a built-in Workbook/Study Guide. Instructors and students like the author’s humorous anecdotes, direct language, and easy conversational style. The text encourages active rather than passive reading.

CONTENTS

1 A Brief Economic History of the United States 2 Resource Utilization 3 Supply and Demand 4 The Mixed Economy 5 Demand, Supply, and Equilibrium 6 Elasticities of Supply and Demand 7 Theory of Consumer Behavior 8 Cost 9 Profit, Loss, and Perfect Competition 10 Monopoly 11 Monopolistic Competition 12 Oligopoly 13 Corporate Mergers and Antitrust 14 Demand in the Factor Market 15 Labor Unions 16 Labor Markets and Wage Rates 17 Rent, Interest, and Profit 18 Income Distribution and Poverty 19 International Trade 20 International Finance

Aust Adaptation

PRINCIPLES OF MICROECONOMICSBy Robert H Frank, Cornell University, Sarah Jennings, University of Tasmania and Ben Bernanke, Princeton University2006 (September 2006) ISBN: 978-0-07-471659-5 McGraw-Hill Australia Title

CONTENTS

Part 1: Introduction Ch 1, Thinking as an economist Ch 2, Comparative advantage: the basis for exchange Ch 3, Supply and demand: an introduction Part 2: Competition Ch 4, Elasticity Ch 5, Demand: the benefit side of the market Ch 6, Perfectly competitive supply: the cost side of the market Ch 7, Efficiency and exchange Ch 8, International trade and trade policy Part 3: Firms and Profit Ch 9, The quest for profit and the invisible hand Ch 10, Monopoly and other forms of imperfect competition Ch 11, Thinking strategically Part 4: Market Failure and Public Policy Ch 12, Externalities, common resources and property rights Ch 13, Public goods and tax policy Ch 14, The economics of information Ch 15, Labour markets, poverty and income distribution

35

ECONOMICS

MICROECONOMICS8th EditionBy John Jackson and Ron McIver of University of South Australia2006 (November 2006)ISBN: 978-0-07-471699-1 McGraw-Hill Australia Title

CONTENTS

Part 1, Introduction to Economics Ch 1, The nature and method of economics Appendix: Graphs and their meaning Ch 2, The economising problem Ch 3, Demand and supply Part 2, An Overview of Microeconomics Ch 4, Allocation and the market system Ch 5, Organisation of business in Australia Part 3, The Economics of Markets Ch 6, Elasticity and its applications Ch 7, Consumer behaviourAppendix: Indifference curve analysis Ch 8, An overview of market structures Ch 9, The costs of production Ch 10, Pure competition Ch 11, Pure monopoly Ch 12, Monopolistic competition Ch 13, Oligopoly Ch 14, The demand for economic resources Ch 15, Wage determination Ch 16, Rent, interest and profits Part 4, The Role of Government Ch 17, Market failure and resource allocation Ch 18, Inequality and poverty Part 5, International Economics Ch 19, Trade, free trade and protection Glossary / Index

International Edition MICROECONOMICS18th EditionBy Paul Samuelson, Massachusetts Institute of Technology and William Nordhaus, Yale University2005 / 464 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-287207-1 ISBN: 978-0-07-111298-7 [IE]


CONTENTS

Part One: Basic Concepts 1 The Fundamentals of Economics Appendix 1 How to Read Graphs 2 Markets and Government in a Modern Economy 3 Basic Elements of Supply and Demand Part Two: Microeconomics: Supply, Demand, and Product Markets 4 Applications of Supply and Demand 5 Demand and Consumer Behavior Appendix 5 Geometrical Analysis of Consumer Equilibrium 6 Production and Business Organization 7 Analysis of Costs Appendix 7 Production, Cost Theory, and Decision of the Firm 8 Analysis of Perfectly Competitive Markets 9 Imperfect Competition and Monopoly 10 Oligopoly and Monopolistic Competition 1 Uncertainty and Game Theory Part Three: Factor Markets: Labor, Land, and Capital 12 How Markets Determine Incomes 13 The Labor Market

14 Land and Capital Appendix 14 Markets and Economic Efficiency Part Four: Applied Microeconomics: International Trade, Govern-ment, and the Environment 15 Comparative Advantage and Protectionism 16 Government Taxation and Expenditure 17 Promoting More Efficient Markets 18 Protecting the Environment 19 Efficiency vs. Equality: The Big Tradeof

Survey of Economics


ESSENTIALS OF ECONOMICS2nd EditionBy Stanley L Brue, Pacifi c Lutheran University, Campbell McConnell, University of Nebraska--Lincoln and Sean Masaki Flynn, Vassar College2010 (January 2009) / 480 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351131-3ISBN: 978-0-07-017266-1 [IE]

http://www.brue2e.com

Building on the tremendous success of their best-selling Principles of Economics text, Brue, McConnell, and Flynn have revised their one-semester text to provide a fresh alternative. This 18-chapter textbook utilizes clear and careful language along with pedagogy and topic discussion suited to the needs of one-semester course.. Brue/McConnell/Flynn is a patient, substantive treatment of micro and macro economics for the one-semester course with many up-to-date, motivating examples.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

Reorganized and recast macro section in terms of the modern, dominant paradigm of macroeconomics, using economic growth as the central backdrop and viewing business fluctuations as arising from demand and supply shocks in conjunction with short-run price and wage stickiness.

A new set of 26 Worked Problems, identified by icons in the book margins and available at the book’s Web site.

A new appendix to the supply and demand chapter providing con-crete examples of changes in demand, changes in supply, changes in both, as well as situations in which pre-set prices can result in shortages or surpluses available on the Brue/McConnell/Flynn Es-sentials Web site.

Updated and expanded discussion of elasticity to include income elasticity, with an example of how it can help predict which products will fall off in demand more than others during recessions.

Up-to-date discussions and examples, such as: climate change policies, ethanol subsidies and their myriad impacts, the most rapidly expanding and disappearing U.S. jobs, the mortgage debt crisis, the sharp business downturn of late 2007 and 2008, the Fed term auction facility, recent Fed monetary policy, the stimulus package of 2008, the additions of countries to the European Union and the euro zone, changes in exchange rates, and many more.

CONTENTS

PART ONE: Introduction1 Limits, Alternatives, and Choices Appendix: Graphs and Their

ECONOMICS

36

Meaning 2 The Market System and the Circular FlowPART TWO: Price, Quantity, and Efficiency3 Demand, Supply, and Market Equilibrium 4 Elasticity of Demand and Supply 5 Public Goods and ExternalitiesPART THREE: Product Markets6 Businesses and Their Costs 7 Pure Competition 8 Pure Monopoly 9 Monopolistic Competition and OligopolyPART FOUR: Resource Markets10 Wage Determination 11 Income Inequality and PovertyPART FIVE: GDP, Growth and Instability12 GDP and Economic Growth 13 Business Cycles, Unemployment, and Inflation 14 Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply 15 Fiscal Policy, Deficits, and DebtPART SIX: Money, Banking, and Monetary Policy16 Money and Banking 17 Monetary PolicyPART SEVEN: International Economics18 International Trade and Exchange Rates

NEW

FOUNDATIONS OF ECONOMICS4th Edition

By David Begg, Principal of Tanaka Business School, Imperial College, University of London

2009 (March 2009) / 432 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-712188-4McGraw-Hill UK Title

http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/begg

Foundations of Economics, forth edition is ideal for students taking introductory economics modules as part of an interdisciplinary course. Building on the success of the second edition, the book provides accessible overviews of key economic topics, interweaving these with real-world examples and practical activities to equip students to think for themselves.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

Topical and up-to-date material, including real-world examples and policy problems, and mini case studies featuring examples such as Live 8 and the impact of China on the world steel industry

Benefi t : Up-to-date material with engaging real-world examples to help students apply economic theory in a practical and relevent context

Proof : Illustrated mini case studies in every chapter

Probe : Do you think it is easier for non-economics students to grasp core theories of they are presented through contemporary examples? How well does your current text do this? Are the examples engaging and up-to-date?

An extra chapter on microeconomics in the new edition, plus a revised structure to the macro section, introducing growth and cycles before developing the tools with which to analyse macro problems

Benefi t : Ensures a solid understanding of key concepts at a man-ageable pace

Proof : Separate chapters on suppky and demand, plus a revised structure to the macro chapters

Probe : At what pace do you teach micro and macroeconomic principles to students without an economic background? Does your current text have enough grounding in core theory before moving on to analyse specifi c issues?

Pedagogy: Learning outcomes, recaps, key terms, review questions and answers, signposted features and photos throughout the text

Benefi t : Guides students through the material at a comprehensible level and pace. The focus is on equipping studnets with the tools to apply knowledge for themselves and to text this as they work through the text

Proof : Features in every chapter

Probe : How important do you think rigorous pedagogy is in a book at this level? Does your current text provide opportunities for recaps and testing of students knowledge as they progress through the text? Does it provide them with the tools to think for themselves?

CONTENTS

1. What is Economics? Appendix 1: Graph MethodologyPart 1: Microeconomics2. Demand3. Supply4. Elasticity5. Costs, Supply and Perfect Competition6. Imperfect competition7. Input markets: Labour 8. Other Input Markets and Income DistributionPart 2: Macroeconomics9. Governing the market10. The income and output nations11. Short-run fluctuations in income and output12. Interest rates, money and inflation13. Aggregate supply, inflation and unemployment14. Exchange rates and the balance of payments15. The global economy16. European Integration





37

ECONOMICS


ECONOMICS: THE BASICS

By Mike Mandel, Business Week

2009 (December 2008) / 544 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-352311-8ISBN: 978-0-07-128039-6 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/mandel1e

Mandel 1e is one of the fi rst books on the market to be constructed “from the ground up” specifi cally for the 1-term survey course. Unlike most books in this market that are simply watered-down versions of existing Principles texts, Mandel 1e is written especially for the survey course, and designed for students who will not go on to take other econ courses. Mike Mandel, Chief Economist for BusinessWeek magazine, has written Economics: The Basics, 1e in a journalistic style, drawing upon BusinessWeek articles and experience throughout the text to deliver the basics of economics and develop a students’ economic literacy. Mandel’s current examples, journalistic writing style and accessible math will help instructors overcome the common challenges of this course, and make the material more approachable and attractive to students.

FEATURES

Modern Approach and Organization: Mandel presents basic tools of economics, as well as the modern context in which students will observe economics, so they will leave the course with a new way of thinking about today’s world.

Mandel 1e provides the basic tools of economics, starting in Chapter 2 with supply and demand.

Mandel 1e emphasizes the main forces that are shaping today’s economy--Technological Change, Globalization, and the evolution of Financial Markets.

Using these tools and forces of economics, Mandel helps students understand markets and the 21st century global market economy.

Journalistic/Conversational Writing Style: Accustomed to dry textbook prose, students can easily warm up to Michael Mandel’s journalistic, conversational writing style.

Engaging Design: Mandel 1e uses a colorful and inviting design that looks more like a magazine than a traditional textbook. While not a true magazine edition, students will fi nd Mandel’s layout and use of color, photos and clear exhibits to be a more familiar and inviting medium.

Current and Real Examples: Mandel connects economic ideas to recent, newsworthy events that students really care about from sources they actually read; topics include technology, competition, the job market, the college market, globalization and the environment. Mandel’s unique “Hot News” features at the end of each chapter con-tain application questions directly related to recent news events and articles, and will be updated every few months by the author.

Clear & Simple Graphs: Many textbooks overwhelm students with too much text and too few graphs. Mandel breaks selected economic concepts into their own simple, easy-to-follow graphs that effectively translate to a beginning student.

Appropriate & Flexible Level: The book clearly covers funda-mental concepts to help students develop economic intuiton without overwhelming them. Mandel incorporates less formal math than much of the competition, and each chapter is short and accessible. Two “Delving Deeper” chapters, one for micro and one for macro, offer further explanation and exposition of topics for instructors who want to add rigor or prepare their students for additional Economics courses.

Appropriate Length: Textbooks are often too long to allow enough class time to cover all the basic topics. Mandel 1e covers all of the most relevant economic topics while remaining short enough to fi nish in one quarter or semester, enabling instructors to cover everything they need and still have time to extend class discussions or bring in additional material for enrichment.

Real Data: Mandel uses real-life, interesting data directly from government sources such as the Bureau of Labor Statistics and the U.S. Census Bureau and presents it in a clean, understandable way.

Historical Context: “Economic Milestone” boxes help students connect economics to history by providing interesting historical facts and references that relate to the economic concepts they are learning.

CONTENTS

Ch 01 Introduction Ch 02 Demand And Supply: The Basics Of The Market Economy Ch 03 Market Equilibrium And Shifts Ch 04 How Businesses Work Ch 05 Competition And Market Power Ch 06 Government And The Economy Ch 07 The First Step Into Macroeconomics Ch 08 Inflation Ch 09 Growth Ch 10 Business Cycles, Unemployment, And Inflation Ch 11 Fiscal Policy Ch 12 Managing The Economy: Monetary Policy Ch 13 The Financial Markets Ch 14 International Trade Ch 15 Technological Change Ch 16 Economics Of The Labor Market Ch 17 The Distribution Of Income Ch 18 Delving Deeper Into Microeconomics Ch 19 Delving Deeper Into Macroeconomics Ch 20 The Economics Of Retirement And Health Care Ch 21 The Economics Of Energy, The Environment, And Global Climate ChangeGlossary Index

ECONOMICS

38


ESSENTIALS OF ECONOMICS7th Edition

By Bradley R Schiller, American University

2009 (April 2008) / 448 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337580-9 ISBN: 978-0-07-128348-9 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/schilleressentials7e

Essentials of Economics is the market leader for the one-semester survey course. In just about 400 pages, it provides a solid introduction to the core concepts of economics with an emphasis on real-world ex-amples and current events. Essentials has earned its popular success because, unlike other books on the market, it is free of the abstract and complex theory that requires more time than this course allows. Instead, the text is clean and concise, with many examples of signifi -cance to students today, including Headlines and Policy Perspectives that use current events to help illustrate the topics discussed. This real-world policy emphasis is a distinctive feature of Schiller’s text and is integral to its dominance of the survey text market.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

Full Updates Throughout the Text. Every chapter of the Seventh Edition of Schiller’s Essentials of Economics includes a myriad of updates including new and updated Policy Perspective discussions, recent headlines, and the latest data on topics such as college gradu-ate salaries and growth and productivity.

CONTENTS

Section I: BasicsChapter 1 The Challenge of Economics Chapter 2 The U.S. Economy Chapter 3 Supply and DemandSection II: MicroeconomicsChapter 4 Consumer Demand Chapter 5 Supply Decisions Chapter 6 Competition Chapter 7 Monopoly Chapter 8 The Labor Market Chapter 9 Government InterventionSection III: MacroeconomicsChapter 10 The Business Cycle Chapter 11 Aggregate Supply and Demand Chapter 12 Fiscal Policy Chapter 13 Money and Banks Chapter 14 Monetary Policy Chapter 15 Economic Growth Chapter 16 Theory and RealitySection IV: InternationalChapter 17 International Trade

International Edition ESSENTIALS OF ECONOMICSBy Stanley L Brue, Pacifi c Lutheran University and Campbell R McConnell2007 (November 2005) / 480 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-301967-3 ISBN: 978-0-07-110634-4 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/brueonline.com

Building on the tremendous success of their best-selling Principles of Economics text, Brue and McConnell have written a new one semester text to provide a fresh alternative. This new, 18-chapter textbook will appeal to anyone teaching a one-semester introductory course. Brue/McConnell is a patient, substantive treatment of micro and macro economics for the one-semester course with many, up-to-date, motivating examples.

CONTENTS

Part One: Introduction Chapter 1: Limits, Alternatives, and Choices Chapter 2: The Market System and the Circular Flow Part Two: Price, Quantity, and Efficiency Chapter 3: Demand, Supply, and Market Equilibrium Chapter 4: Elasticity of Demand and Supply Chapter 5: Market Failure: A Role for Government Part Three: Product Markets Chapter 6: Businesses and Their Costs Chapter 7: Pure Competition Chapter 8: Pure Monopoly Chapter 9: Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly Chapter 10: Wage Determination Chapter 11: Income Inequality and Poverty Part Four: Macroeconomic Measurement, Models, and Fiscal Policy Chapter 12: Introduction to GDP, Growth, and Instability Chapter 13: Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply Chapter 14: Fiscal Policy, Deficits, and Debt Part Five: Money, Banking, and Monetary Policy Chapter 15: Money and Banking Chapter 16: Monetary Policy Part Six: Economic Growth and International Economics Chapter 17: Economic Growth Chapter 18: International Trade Glossary

39

ECONOMICS

Economics for Business

ECONOMICS FOR BUSINESS2nd EditionBy David Begg, University of London and Damian Ward, Bradford University2006 (November 2006) / 432 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-711451-0 McGraw-Hill UK Title

www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/beggandward

CONTENTS

Part I: Introduction Chapter 1: Economics for business Part II: Understanding markets Chapter 2: Consumers in the market place Chapter 3: Firms in the market place Chapter 4: Markets in action Part III: Competition and profitability Chapter 5: Market structure and firm performance Chapter 6: Strategic rivalry Chapter 7: Growth strategies Chapter 8: Governing business Part IV: Domestic macroeconomics Chapter 9: Introduction to the macroeconomy Chapter 10: Measuring macroeconomic variables and policy issues Chapter 11: Economic stability and demand side policies Chapter 12: Supply side policies and economic growth Part V: Global economics Chapter 13: Exchange rates and the balance of payments Chapter 14: Globalization

Economics Issues

NEW

TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS ON ECONOMIC ISSUES14th EditionBy Frank J Bonello, University of Notre Dame, Isobel Lobo, Benedictine University2010 (April 2009) / 416 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-352730-7A Dushkin Title


TAKING SIDES: WORLD POLITICS, 14/e presents current contro-versial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual with testing material is available for each vol-ume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is also an excel-lent instructor resource with practical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by a book website. Visit www.mhcls.com.

NEW TO THIS EDITION


NEW

ANNUAL EDITIONS: ECONOMICS 35th Edition

By Don Cole, Drew University

2010 (February 2009) / 256 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-352856-4


Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instruc-tor’s Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is the general instructor’s guide for our popular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906) or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details.





ECONOMICS

40

NEW TO THIS EDITION


CONTENTS

Unit 1: Introduction1. How Much for a Life? Try $3 Million to $5 Million2. There Is No Such Thing as a War for Free,3. More, Bigger, Faster4. Counter-Terrorism: The Private Cost of More SecurityUnit 2: Microeconomics5. Gas Costs Squeeze Daily Life6. Airlines7. The Real Price of Gas8. Antitrust Inquiry Launched into Intel,9. Modernizing U.S. Antitrust Law: The Role of Technology and In-novation10. Climate Change and the Economy11. Congested Parks—A Pricing DilemmaUnit 3: The Economics of Work and Income12. Building a More-Humane Economy13. Outsized Offshore Outsourcing14. The New Suburban Poverty15. The Gender Gyp16. New Floor Set for Wages17. Workplace Abuse: Why the Golden Age of Labor May Be OverUnit 4: Macroeconomics18. Countdown to a Meltdown19. How Obama Will Stoke the Economy20. Companies Slam on the Brakes21. The End of Economics22. The Elephant in the Room23. Growth Factor24. The Tax Reform Revolution25. Fixing the Tax System26. What Should Central Banks Do?27. How Does Monetary Policy Affect the U.S. Economy?28. Bank ATMs and ATM Surcharges29. A Quiet Revolution in Money30. Toward a Cashless Society31. Record $482 Billion ‘09 Deficit ForecastUnit 5: The Changing Global Economy32. Update on the State of the Future33. Consumer Trends in Three Different “Worlds,” 34. Refighting NAFTA35. Fighting The Global Slump: Less Is Dangerous36. Eliminating Child Labor37. Asymmetric Globalization: Global Markets Require Good Global Politics38. Will the World Run Dry? Global Water and Food Security39. Half a Tank: The Impending Arrival of Peak Oil40. Do Global Attitudes and Behaviors Support Sustainable Devel-opment?

International Edition ISSUES IN ECONOMICS TODAY4th EditionBy Robert Guell, Indiana State University--Terre Haute2008 (October 2007) / 480 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337570-0 ISBN: 978-0-07-128795-1 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/guell4e

Issues in Economics Today is a modern issues book that presents the latest and most interesting topics. It was developed to allow instructors the maximum fl exibility to teach this material in a manner that fi ts their personal style. Some professors like to intertwine theory and issues while others like to lay the theoretical foundation fi rst before heading into the issues. Faculty may choose to set a theme for their course and pick issues consistent with that theme, while others may let their students decide what issues interest them. Beginning with eight core theory chapters and followed by 35 shorter issues chapters, there is no right way to use the book. As a result of this structure, instructors do not have to teach the same course every semester. The Fourth edition continues to stay on the cusp of recent events and topics, such as outsourcing, infl ation targeting, the impact of trade agree-ments, the cost of adhering to the Kyoto protocols, induced demand in pharmaceuticals, myths surrounding affi rmative action, the impact of gasoline prices on ethanol and corn demand, Apple’s troubles with the EU, textbook price infl ation relative to tuition costs, poverty in the US vs. other developed countries, and a recasting of the War chapter to focus more heavily on occupation costs.

CONTENTS

Chapter 1: Economics: The Study of Opportunity Cost1A Graphing: Yes, You CanChapter 2: Supply and Demand Chapter 3: The Concept of Elasticity and Consumer and Producer Surplus Chapter 4: Firm Production, Cost, and Revenue Chapter 5: Perfect Competition, Monopoly, and Economic versus Normal Profit Chapter 6: Every Macroeconomic Word You Ever Heard: Gross Domestic Product, Inflation, Unemployment, Recession, and De-pression Chapter 7: Interest Rates and Present Value Chapter 8: Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply Chapter 9: Federal Spending Chapter 10: Federal Deficits, Surpluses, and the National Debt Chapter 11: Fiscal Policy Chapter 12: Monetary Policy Chapter 13: International Trade: Does It Jeopardize American Jobs? Chapter 14: The International Monetary Fund: Doctor or Witch Doc-tor? Chapter 15: NAFTA, GATT, WTO: Are Trade Agreements Good for Us? Chapter 16: Tobacco, Alcohol, Drugs, and Prostitution Chapter 17: The Environment Chapter 18: Health Care Chapter 19: Government Provided Health Insurance: Medicaid, Medicare, and the Child Health Insurance Program Chapter 20: The Economics of Prescription Drugs Chapter 21: Economics and the Law Chapter 22: The Economics of Crime Chapter 23: Race, Gender, and Affirmative Action Chapter 24: Farm Policy Chapter 25: Minimum Wage Chapter 26: Rent Control Chapter 27: Ticket Brokers and Ticket Scalping Chapter 28: Antitrust Chapter 29: Why Did This Textbook Cost so Much? Chapter 30: Education Chapter 31: Poverty and Welfare Chapter 32: Social Security

41

ECONOMICS

Chapter 33: Head Start Chapter 34: Personal Income Taxes Chapter 35: Energy Prices Chapter 36: If We Build It, Will They Come? And Other Sports Ques-tions Chapter 37: The Stock Market and Crashes Chapter 38: Unions Chapter 39: The Cost of War and Occupation Chapter 40: The Economics of Terrorism Chapter 41: Wal-Mart: Always Low Prices (and Low Wages)...Always Chapter 42: The Economic Impact of Casino Gambling Chapter 43: Economic Growth and Development Chapter 44: The Housing Bubble (Bonus Web Chapter)

TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS ON ECONOMIC ISSUES13th EditionBy Frank J Bonello, University of Notre Dame and Isobel Lobo, Benedic-tine University2008 (April 2007) / 432 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-352725-3 A Dushkin Title

http:///www.mhcls.com/textdata/catalog/0073527254. mhmtl

This Thirteenth Edition of TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS ON ECONOMIC ISSUES presents current controversial issues in a de-bate-style format designed to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual with testing material is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resource with practical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.

CONTENTS

Unit 1 Microeconomic Issues. Issue 1. Are Profits the Only Business of Business? Issue 2. Are CEOs Paid What They Are Worth? Issue 3. Is There Discrimination in U.S. Labor Markets? Issue 4. Is the New Medicare Part D Drug Benefit Good Health Care Policy? Issue 5. Are Health Savings Accounts the Right Medicine for the Ills of the Health Care Industry? Issue 6. Is It Time to Reform Medical Malpractice Litigation? Unit 2 Macroeconomics IssuesIssue 7. Is Wal-Mart Good for the Economy?Issue 8. Should Social Security Be Changed to Include Personal Retirement Accounts? Issue 9. Should the Double Taxation of Corporate Dividends Be Eliminated? Issue 10. Are Credit Card Companies Exploiting American Consum-ers? Issue 11. Should Minimum Wage and Living Wage Laws Be Elimi-nated? Issue 12. Do Unskilled Immigrants Hurt the Economy? Unit 3 The World Around Us Issue 13. Are Protectionists Policies Bad for America? Issue 14. Should We Sweat About Sweatshops? Issue 15. Are the Costs of Global Warming Too High to Ignore? Issue 16. Are Spending Cuts the Right Way to Balance the Federal Government’s Budget?Issue 17. Has the North American Free Trade Agreement Benefited the Economies of Canada, Mexico, and the U.S.? Issue 18. Is the No Child left Behind Act Working? Issue 19. Will the Creation of an Ownership Society Make the Ameri-can Economy More Efficient and More Equitable?

International Edition ECONOMICS OF SOCIAL ISSUES18th EditionBy Ansel M Sharp, University of the South, Charles A Register, Florida Atlantic University-Boca Raton and Paul W Grimes, Mississippi State University2008 (October 2007) / 512 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340280-2 ISBN: 978-0-07-127470-8 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/sharp18e

Sharp/Register/Grimes’ Economics of Social Issues originated the Social Issues approach to teaching basic economic principles. Designed as an introduction to general economics for non-majors, it presents economic concepts as useful tools to analyze contempo-rary social issues. Each chapter presents economic concepts then places them within the context of very current issues facing society. The book may also be used to supplement principles courses with lively social issues to add relevance to the economic principles be-ing taught. Economics of Social Issues has garnered a loyal user following for its timely and impartial handling of current social issues that dominate newspapers and television news. As the major social issues facing our society change, so does this textbook. While the issues are contemporary and the supporting information updated, the authors remain objective.

CONTENTS

Chapter 1: Alleviating Human Misery: The Role of Economic Rea-soning Chapter 2: Economic Systems, Resource Allocation, and Social Well-Being: Lessons from China’s Transition Chapter 3: Government Control of Prices in Mixed Systems: What Are the Actual Outcomes? Chapter 4: Pollution Problems: Must We Foul Our Own Nests? Chapter 5: Economics of Crime and Its Prevention: How Much is Too Much Chapter 6: The Economics of Education: Crisis and Reform Chapter 7: Poverty Problems and Discrimination: Why Are So Many Still Poor? Chapter 8: The Economics of Big Business: Who Does What to Whom? Chapter 9: The Economics of Professional Sports: What is the Real Score? Chapter 10: Competition in the Global Marketplace: Should We Protect Ourselves From International Trade? Chapter 11: Economic Growth: Are We Living in a “New Econo-my”? Chapter 12: Unemployment Issues: Why Do We Waste Our Labor Resources? Chapter 13: Inflation: How to Gain and Lose at the Same Time Chapter 14: Government Spending, Taxation, and the National Debt: Who Wins and Who Loses? Chapter 15: Social Security and Medicare: How Secure Is Our Safety Net for the Elderly?

ECONOMICS

42

Intermediate Macroeconomics

International Edition MACROECONOMICS10th EditionBy Rudiger Dornbusch (deceased), Stanley Fischer, Mass Institute of Tech and Richard Startz, University of Washington2008 (August 2007) / 640 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-312811-5 ISBN: 978-0-07-125924-8 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/dornbusch10e

Dornbusch, Fischer, and Startz has been a long-standing, leading intermediate macroeconomic theory text since its introduction in 1978. This revision retains most of the text’s traditional features, including a middle-of-the-road approach and very current research, while updat-ing and simplifying the exposition. This revision focuses on making the text even easier to teach from. The only pre-requisite continues to be principles of economics.

CONTENTS

Part 1 – Introduction and National Income AccountingChapter 1 – Introduction Chapter 2 – National Income AccountingPart 2 – Growth, Aggregate Supply and Demand, and PolicyChapter 3 – Growth and Accumulation Chapter 4 – Growth and Policy Chapter 5 – Aggregate Supply and Demand Chapter 6 – Aggregate Supply: Wages, Prices, and Unemployment Chapter 7 – The Anatomy of Inflation and Unemployment Chapter 8 – Policy PreviewPart 3 – First ModelsChapter 9 – Income and Spending Chapter 10 – Money, Interest, and Income Chapter 11 – Monetary and Fiscal Policy Chapter 12 – International LinkagesPart 4 – Behavioral FoundationsChapter 13 – Consumption and Saving Chapter 14 – Investment Spending Chapter 15 – The Demand for Money Chapter 16 – The Fed, Money, and Credit Chapter 17 – Policy Chapter 18 – Financial Markets and Asset PricesPart 5 – Big Events, International Adjustments, and Advanced TopicsChapter 19 – Big Events: The Economics of Depression, Hyperinfla-tion, and Deficits Chapter 20 – International Adjustment and Interdependence Chapter 21 – Advanced Topics Appendix Glossary Index

International Edition MACROECONOMICSTheory and Policy, 3rd EditionBy G S Gupta, Professor at Ahmedabad2007 (November 2007) / 528 pagesISBN: 978- 0-07-066807-2 McGraw-Hill India Title

http://www.mhhe.com/guptamacro3e

This edition continues in the tradition of providing a concise account of concepts & theories in macroeconomics and a review of the present state of macroeconomics, with an emphasis on India. It seeks to improve the treatment by enhancing its topical coverage and learn-ing assistance, besides updating key economic data. This text is meant for the postgraduate students of business management and economics. It would also be immensely useful as a reference source to practising managers.

CONTENTS

PART I: INTRODUCTION AND MEASUREMENT 1. Introduction: An Overview 2. National Income 3. Inflation, Unemployment and Poverty 4. Money, Fiscal and Foreign Sector Variables PART II: BHEAVIOURAL AND TECHNOLOGICAL FUNCTIONS 5. Consumption Function 6. Investment Function 7. Government, Foreign Trade and Foreign Exchange Rate Func-tions 8. Money Demand and Supply Functions 9. Production Function, Factor Market and Aggregate Suply Func-tion PART III: ECONOMIC FLUCTUATIONS AND STABILISATION POLICY: MACROECONOMIC MODELS 10. Business Cycles, Stabilisation Policies and Economic Models 11. Classical and Keynesian Fixed Price Models 12. Keynesian Flexible Price Model, Open Economy and Policy Debates 13. New Classical and New Keynesian Models 14. Unemployment and Inflation: Causes, Consequences and Cures PART V: ECONOMIC GROWTH AND THE STATE OF MACROECO-NOMICS 15. Economic Growth 16. State of Macroeconomics Appendices Index





43

ECONOMICS

International Edition MACROECONOMICS2nd EditionBy Bradford DeLong, University of California—Berkeley2006 / 544 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-287758-8 ISBN: 978-0-07-111113-3 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/economics/delong2

CONTENTS

Part I Preliminaries 1 Introduction to Macroeconomics 2 Measuring the Macroeconomy 3 Thinking Like an Economist Part II Long-Run Economic Growth 4 The Theory of Economic Growth 5 The Reality of Economic Growth: History and Prospect Part III Flexible-Price Macroeconomics 6 Building Blocks of the Flexible-Price Model 7 Equilibrium in the Flexible-Price Model 8 Money, Prices, and Inflation Part IV Sticky-Price Macroeconomics 9 The Sticky-Price Income-Expenditure Framework: Consumption and the Multiplier 10 Investment, Net Exports, and Interest Rates: The IS Curve 11 The Money Market and the LM Curve 12 The Phillips Curve and Expectations Part V Macroeconomic Policy 13 Stabilization Policy: The Budget Balance, the National Debt, and Investment International Economic Policy 14 Changes in the Macroeconomy and Changes in Macroeconomic Policy 15 The Future of Macroeconomics Epiloge

Aust Adaptation

MACROECONOMICS 2nd EditionBy Rudiger Dornbusch (deceased), Philip Bodman, University of Queens-land, Mark Crosby, Melbourne Business School, Stanley Fischer, Mass Institute of Tech and Richard Startz, University of Washington2006 ISBN: 978-0-07-471568-0 McGraw-Hill Australia Title

http://www.mhhe.com/au/dornbusch2e

CONTENTS

Part 1, Introduction and National Income Accounting Ch 1, An introduction to macroeconomics Ch 2, National income accounting Part 2, Growth and Aggregate Supply and Demand Ch 3, Growth and accumulation Ch 4, Growth and policy Ch 5, Aggregate supply and demand Ch 6, Aggregate supply: wages, prices and unemployment Part 3, Early Models Ch 7, Income and Spending Ch 8, Money, interest and income Ch 9, Monetary and fiscal policy in the closed economy Part 4, Open Economy Macroeconomics Ch 10, Internatioanl linkages Ch 11, International adjustment and interdependence Part 5, Behavioural Foundations Ch 12, Consumption and saving Ch 13, Investment spending

Ch 14, The demand for money Ch 15, The RBA, money and credit Ch 16, Financial markets Part 6, Big Issues, Economic Policy and Advanced Topics Ch 17, Big issues #1: Inflation Ch 18, Big issues #2: Unemployment Ch 19, Policy in an uncertain world Ch 20, Advanced topics

Intermediate Microeconomics

NEW

MICROECONOMICS2nd Edition

By Wyn Morgan, University of Nottingham, Michael L Katz, University of California-Berkeley and Harvey S Rosen, Princeton University

2009 (March 2009) / 704 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-712177-8

http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/morganMcGraw-Hill UK Title

Microeconomics, 2nd European Edition offers comprehensive and accessible coverage of microeconomic theory, explaining how this is used to analyse and evaluate contemporary market systems. The book draws on relevant real world examples to highlight how theory can help to solve or understand a range of problems and is a central basis for thinking like an economist.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

New Learning Outcomes, which act as signposts to the core concepts that students should grasp in each chapter

CONTENTS

1. The Market EconomyPart 1: The Household2. Consumer Choice3. Comparative Statics and Demand4. Price Changes and Consumer Welfare5. The Household as SupplierPart 2: The Firm6. The Firm and it’s Goals7. Technology and Production8. CostPart 3: The Competitive Model9. The Price-Taking Firm10. Equilibrium in Competitive Markets11. General Equilibrium and Welfare EconomicsPart 4: Market Power12. Monopoly13. More on Price-Making Firms14. Game Theory

ECONOMICS

44

15. Oligopoly and Strategic BehaviourPart 5: Extensions and Missing Markets16. Asymmetric Information17. Externalities of Public Goods18. Choice Under Uncertainty

International Edition MICROECONOMICSBy B Douglas Bernheim, Stanford University and Michael D Whinston, Northwestern University2008 (December 2007) / 672 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-290027-9 ISBN: 978-0-07-127755-6 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/bernheim1e

Bernheim and Whinston’s Microeconomics focuses on the core principles of the intermediate microeconomic course: individuals and fi rms making decisions, competitive markets, and market failures. An accessible text that does not require knowledge of calculus, Micro-economics utilizes examples and integrates topics that will stimulate and motivate students.

Key advantages of Bernheim and Whinston’s approach are:

1) A fresh, up-to-date treatment of modern microeconomic theory. 2) A clear and engaging writing style, along with innovative pedagogy that provides students with more accessible ways to understand and master difficult concepts.3) Numerous real-world applications that are closely tied to the theo-retical material developed in the text.4) Teaches students to solve a wide range of quantitative problems without requiring calculus.

CONTENTS

Part I: Introduction1. Preliminaries 2. Supply and Demand 3. Balancing Benefits and CostsPart II: Individual Decision MakingIIA: Consumption Decisions4. Principles and Preferences 5. Constraints, Choices, and Demand 6. From Demand to WelfareIIB: Production Decisions7. Technology and Production 8. Cost Minimization 9. Profit MaximizationIIC: Additional Topics10. Decisions Involving Time 11. Decisions involving uncertainty 12. Decisions Involving Strategy (Game Theory) 13. Behavioral EconomicsPart III: MarketsIIIA. Competitive Markets14. Equilibrium and EfficiencyIIIB: Imperfectly Competitive Markets17. Monopoly 18. Pricing 19. Oligopoly 20. Externalities and Public Goods 21. Information and Contracts

International Edition MICROECONOMICS AND BEHAVIOR7th EditionBy Robert H Frank, Cornell University2008 (November 2007) / 608 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337573-1 ISBN: 978-0-07-126349-8 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/frank7e

Robert Frank’s Microeconomics and Behavior covers the essential topics of microeconomics while exploring the relationship between economics analysis and human behavior. The book’s clear narrative appeals to students, and its numerous examples help students de-velop economic intuition. This book introduces modern topics not often found in intermediate textbooks. Its focus throughout is to develop a student’s capacity to “think like an economist.”

CONTENTS

Part 1: Introduction1. Thinking Like an Economist 2. Supply and DemandAppendix: How Do Taxes Affect Equilibrium Prices and Quantities?Part 2: The Theory of Consumer Behavior3. Rational Consumer Choice Appendix: The Utility Function Approach to the Consumer Budgeting Problem 4. Individual and Market DemandAppendix: Additional Topics in Demand Theory5. Applications of Rational Choice and Demand Theories 6. The Economics of Information and Choice Under UncertaintyAppendix: Search Theory and the Winner’s Curse7. Explaining Tastes: The Importance of Altruism and Other Nonego-istic Behavior 8. Cognitive Limitations and Consumer BehaviorPart 3: The Theory of the Firm and Market Structure9. Production Appendix: Mathematical Extensions of Production Theory 10. CostsAppendix: Mathematical Extensions of the Theory of Costs11. Perfect Competition 12. Monopoly 13. Imperfect Competition: A Game-Theoretic ApproachPart 4: Factor Markets14. LaborAppendix: The Economics of Workplace Safety15. CapitalAppendix: A More Detailed Look at Exhaustible Resource Alloca-tionPart 5: Welfare Economics16. General Equilibrium and Market Efficiency (online only) 17. Externalities, Property Rights, and the Coase Theorem 18. Government

45

ECONOMICS

International Edition MICROECONOMICS3rd EditionBy Michael L Katz, University of California, Berkeley, and Harvey S Rosen, Princeton University 1998 / 672 pages ISBN: 978-0-256-17176-1 (Out of Print)ISBN: 978-0-07-115354-6 [IE]

CONTENTS

Chapter 1 The Market Economy. Part I The Household: Chapter 2 Consumer Choice. Chapter 3 Comparative Statics and Demand. Chapter 4 Price Changes and Consumer welfare. Chapter 5 The Household as Supplier. Chapter 6 Choice Under Uncertainty. Part II The Firm: Chapter 7 The Firm and Its Goals. Chapter 8 Technology and Production. Chapter 9 Cost. Part III The Competitive Model: Chapter 10 The Price-Taking Firm. Chapter 11 Equilibrium in Competitive Markets.Chapter 12 General Equilibrium and Welfare Economics. Part IV Market Power: Chapter 13 Monopoly. Chapter 14 More on Price-Making Firms. Chapter 15 Oligopoly and Strategic Behavior. Chapter 16 Game Theory. Chapter 17 Asymmetric Information. Chapter 18 Externalities and Public Goods.

Managerial Economics


MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS & ORGANIZATIONAL ARCHITECTURE5th Edition

By James Brickley and Jerold Zimmerman of University of Rochester, Clifford W Smith, Jr


http://www.mhhe.com/brickley5e

Managerial Economics and Organizational Architecture, 5e helps the student to gain an understanding of the basic tools of economics used to solve important business problems. It also provides an in-depth analysis of the fi rm and corporate governance topics. The Fifth Edition has an improved focus on decision-making and managerial applications, within the structure of an organization.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

Managerial decision problems: Real-world scenario boxes en-able students to immediately apply what they have learned as they employ economic analysis to make the best managerial decisions in a given, realistic situation.

Self-Evaluation Problems with Solutions: New Self-Evaluation problems at the end of the chapter focus on the standard types of economic issues that students will face in relation to the chapter topics. The accompanying solutions provide both the opportunity to check the answers and to see concrete examples of how these types of problems are solved.

Updated boxed material in each chapter: Boxed examples, now divided into Managerial, Academic, and Historical Applications to highlight topic relevance, have been updated with new information. New boxes have also been added to keep the text current.

CONTENTS

PART 1: Basic ConceptsChapter 1: Introduction Chapter 2: Economists’ View of Behavior Chapter 3: Markets, Organizations, and the Role of KnowledgePART 2: Managerial EconomicsChapter 4: Demand Chapter 5: Production and Cost Chapter 6: Market Structure Chapter 7: Pricing with Market Power Chapter 8: Economics of Strategy: Creating and Capturing Value Chapter 9: Economics of Strategy: Game Theory Chapter 10: Incentive Conflicts and ContractsPART 3: Designing Organizational ArchitectureChapter 11: Organizational Architecture Chapter 12: Decision Rights: The Level of Empowerment Chapter 13: Decision Rights: Bundling Tasks into Jobs and Subu-nits Chapter 14: Attracting and Retaining Qualified Employees Chapter 15: Incentive Compensation Chapter 16: Individual Performance Evaluation Chapter 17: Divisional Performance EvaluationCapstone Case Study on Organizational Architecture: Arthur An-dersen LLP PART 4: Applications of Organizational ArchitectureChapter 18: Corporate Governance Chapter 19: Vertical Integration and Outsourcing Chapter 20: Leadership: Motivating Change within Organizations Chapter 21: Understanding the Business Environment: The Econom-ics of Regulation Chapter 22: Ethics and Organizational Architecture Chapter 23: Organizational Architecture and the Process of Manage-ment InnovationGlossary Index

ECONOMICS

46

International Edition MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS AND BUSINESS STRATEGY6th EditionBy Michael Baye, Indiana University-Bloomington2008 (October 2007) / 672 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337568-7 ISBN: 978-0-07-126320-7 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/baye6e

Baye’s Managerial Economics and Business Strategy remains the best-selling managerial economics textbook. It was the fi rst textbook to provide students with the tools from intermediate microeconomics, game theory, and industrial organization to make sound manage-rial decisions. Baye is known for his real-world examples, frontier research, inclusion of modern topics not found in other managerial books, as well as balanced coverage of traditional and modern mi-croeconomic tools. The Sixth Edition retains all of these signature features, and it includes a number of new class-tested features. These include enhanced pedagogical features such as learning objectives, new and updated business applications, additional end-of-chapter problems, better prose, and updated data. Additionally, the Time Warner Case, introduced last edition, is strengthened in the Sixth Edition with detailed teaching notes and nine additional end-of-case problems.

CONTENTS

Chapter 1: The Fundamentals of Managerial Economics Chapter 2: Market Forces: Demand and Supply Chapter 3: Quantitative Demand Analysis Chapter 4: The Theory of Individual Behavior Chapter 5: The Production Process and Costs Chapter 6: The Organization of the Firm Chapter 7: The Nature of Industry Chapter 8: Managing in Competitive, Monopolistic, and Monopolisti-cally Competitive Markets Chapter 9: Basic Oligopoly Models Chapter 10: Game Theory: Inside Oligopoly Chapter 11: Pricing Strategies for Firms with Market Power Chapter 12: The Economics of Information Chapter 13: Advanced Topics in Business Strategy Chapter 14: A Manager’s Guide to Government in the MarketplaceCase Study: Challenges at Time Warner: A Case Study in Business Strategy

International Edition MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS9th EditionBy Christopher R Thomas, University of South Florida and S Charles Maurice (Deceased) 2008 (March 2007) / 704 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-334656-4 (with Student CD)ISBN: 978-0-07-126554-6 [IE with Student CD]

http://www.mhhe.com/thomas9

Thomas and Maurice’s Managerial Economics teaches students how to use microeconomic theory to analyze business decisions. In a clear and engaging writing style, Christopher Thomas carries on the tradition he and Charles Maurice shepherded for eight previous editions in the 9th edition. The 9th Edition explores the current market forces that create both opportunities and constraints for business enterprises. The book has enjoyed success in part because of its mid-level of rigor, clarity of presentation, and end-of-chapter material.

CONTENTS

Part I: some preliminaries Chapter 1 Managers, profits, and markets Chapter 2 Demand, supply, and market equilibrium Chapter 3 Marginal analysis for optimal decision making Chapter 4 Basic estimation techniques Part II: Demand analysis Chapter 5 Theory of consumer behavior Chapter 6 Elasticity and demand Chapter 7 Demand estimation and forecasting Part III: Production and cost analysis Chapter 8 Production and cost in the short run Chapter 9 Production and cost in the long run Chapter 10 Production and cost estimation / On the website: Special Topic Module 1: Linear programming Part IV: Profit-maximization in various market structures Chapter 11 Managerial decisions in competitive markets Chapter 12 Managerial decisions for firms with market power Chapter 13 Strategic decision making in oligopoly markets Part V: Advanced managerial decision making Chapter 14 Advanced techniques for profit maximization Chapter 15 Decisions under risk and uncertaintyOn the website: Special Topic Module 2: Investment decisions Appendix: statistical tables Answers to technical problems

THE ECONOMICS OF ORGANIZATIONS AND STRATEGY By Sean Rickard, Cranfi eld2006 / 512 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-710813-7 McGraw-Hill UK Title

www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/rickard

CONTENTS

Part 1: Introduction Chapter 1 ~ Economic Organisations, Games and Strategies Part 2: The Firm and the Creation of Value Chapter 2 ~ Alternative Approaches to the Firm Chapter 3 ~ Vertical and Virtual Boundaries Chapter 4 ~ Horizontal boundaries and Diversification Chapter 5 ~ Growth and Entrepreneurship Chapter 6 ~ Corporate Control and Organisational Design Chapter 7 ~ Incentives and Human Resource Management Part 3: Capturing Value from the Market Chapter 8 ~ Market Structure and the Strategic Environment Chapter 9 ~ Imperfect Competition and Government Intervention Chapter 10 ~ The Dominant Firm and Predation Chapter 11 ~ Price Discrimination and Bundling Chapter 12 ~ Reputation and Vertical Restraints Chapter 13 ~ Product Differentiation and Advertising Chapter 14 ~ Invention, Innovation and Competitive Advantage

47

ECONOMICS

Environmental Economics

NEW

ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICSBy PB Anand and John Weiss of University of Bradford2009 (August 2009)ISBN: 978-0-07-711542-5McGraw-Hill UK Title

CONTENTS

1. Foundations of Environmental Economics 2. Sustainable Development – unpacking the definition 3. Economic Growth, Development & Welfare 4. The Environment: Private decisions or public policy? 5. Environmental Policy Instruments for Pollution Control 6. Natural Resources Economics 7. Cost Benefit Analysis 1: Valuing the environment 8. Cost Benefit Analysis 2: Valuing environmental services 9. Environment and Risk 10. Environmental Economics and International Issues 11. Poverty, Hunger & Sustainable Development: Reconciling dif-ferent priorities 12. Water and Economics 13. Emergencies, Disasters, Post-conflict Contexts 14. Decision-making: Corporate and government social responsibil-ity 15. Environmental Economics and the Way Forward


ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS5th Edition

By Barry C Field, University of Mass-Amherst and Martha K Field, Greenfi eld Comm College


http://www.mhhe.com/fi eld5e

Environmental Economics is an introduction to the basic principles of environmental economics as they have been developed in the past and as they continue to evolve. The examples discussed in this textbook represent only a sample of the full range of issues that actually exists. For this reason, the Fifth Edition sticks to the basic ideas and ways that environmental economists have found to make the basic concepts and models more specifi c and relevant to concrete environmental issues. The basic structure and sequence of chapters are unchanged but contains new and updated material that refl ects the new research efforts by environmental economists over the last few years.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

Relevant and new material: The Fifth Edition contains new material on various aspects of global warming (Chapters 1, 6, and 20); emission trading programs, including carbon trading (Chapters 1, 13, and 15); green taxes (Chapter 12); markets for green goods (Chapter 10); environmental problems in China (Chapter 1); coastal water pollution (Chapter 14); valuing health outcomes (Chapter 7); the value of private information in policy plans (Chapter 9); the eco-nomics of pest resistance (Chapter 16); and the idea of charging for solid waste (Chapter 17).

Thoroughly updated pedagogy: The Fifth Edition includes new and updated exhibit material, updated data tables and new discus-sion questions.

CONTENTS

Section 1: IntroductionChapter 1: What is Environmental Economics? Chapter 2: The Economy and the EnvironmentSection 2: Analytical ToolsChapter 3: Benefits and Costs, Supply and Demand Chapter 4: Economic Efficiency and Markets Chapter 5: The Economics of Environmental QualitySection 3: Environmental AnalysisChapter 6: Frameworks of Analysis Chapter 7: Benefit-Cost Analysis: Benefits Chapter 8: Benefit-Cost Analysis: CostsSection 4: Environmental Policy AnalysisChapter 9: Criteria for Evaluating Environmental Policies Chapter 10: Decentralized Policies: Liability Laws, Property Rights, Voluntary Action Chapter 11: Command-and-Control Strategies: The Case of Stand-ards Chapter 12: Incentive-Based Strategies: Emission Charges and Subsidies Chapter 13: Incentive-Based Strategies: Transferable Discharge PermitsSection 5: Environmental Policy in the United StatesChapter 14: Federal Water Pollution-Control Policy Chapter 15: Federal Air Pollution Control Policy Chapter 16: Federal Polity on Toxic and Hazardous Substances Chapter 17: State and Local Environmental IssuesSection 6: International Environmental IssuesChapter 18: Comparative Environmental Policies Chapter 19: Economic Development and the Environment Chapter 20: The Global Environment Chapter 21: International Environmental AgreementsAppendix: Abbreviations and Acronyms used in the book





ECONOMICS

48

BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT2nd EditionBy Justin Paul2007 (December 2007) / 512 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-022092-8 McGraw-Hill India Title

http://www.mhhe.com/bussenv2e

COURSEOVERVIEW/ AUDIENCE: Business Environment is a core subject in management and commerce streams. The course is covered under various names like Economic Environment of Busi-ness, Economic Foundations of Business Environment, Business Environment, Economic Environment and Policy, Economic and Social Environment, Indian Business Environment… and so on. It will also be a handy tool for the practicing business managers and also those general readers who would like to keep themselves abreast with the current business environment in India.

AIM & COVERAGE: The book is designed to provide a lucid treatment of the business environment in the Indian context. It is organized in 9 parts and follows a approach in which the discussion follows a logical sequence - from general to the specific. Thus, the book begins with chapters discussing political environment, economic systems, economic growth and development and then proceeds to discuss the specific elements in the business environment.

OBJECTIVE OF REVISION: The revision is aimed at making the coverage updated in view of the changes and developments in various elements of the economic policy, and also to expand the exercises and cases. Many topics have been rewritten to enhance lucidity.

CONTENTS

PART 1: POLITICAL ECONOMY, DEVELOPMENT ECONOMICS, GOVERNMENT AND SOCIETY 1. Economic Systems 2. Economic Growth and Development PART II: INDIAN ECONOMY AND BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT 3. Anatomy of Indian Economy 4. Globalisation and Business Environment PART III: BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT IN THE INDUSTRIAL SEC-TOR 5. Industrial Sector – Past, Present and Future 6. Industry Analysis – Textiles, Electronics and Automobiles 7. Industry Analysis – FMCG, Chemicals and Pharmacueticals PART IV: ECONOMIC POLICIES 8. Privatisation – Problems and Prospects 9. Fiscal Policy, Union Budget and Taxation 10. Monetary Policy and Banking Sector Reforms PART V: TECHNOLOGY AND BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT 11. Technological Environment: Developments in the Banking Sec-tor PART VI: INVESTMENT ENVIRONMENT, OPPORTUNITIES AND INDICATORS: LEGAL AND REGULATORY SYSTEMS 12. Capital Market, Stock Exchanges and Present Scenario 13. Legal Environment of Business, Mergers and Acquisitions PART VII: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS, ENVIRONMENT AND EXTERNAL SECTOR 14. WTO, Agreements and Current Issues 15. India’s Trade Policy 16. External Sector – BoP, Currency Convertibility, ADR-GDRs and FEMA 17. Global Outsourcing: Trends and Debate PART VIII: SOCIAL ENVIRONMENT 18. Social Environment in India and China 19. Corporate governance and Corporate Social Responsibility PART IX: GLOBAL ECONOMY AND BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT 20. Business Environment in Europe 21. Business Environment in SAARC Countries 22. Business Environment in South America 23. Business Environment in North America

Econometrics


ESSENTIALS OF ECONOMETRICS4th EditionBy Damodar N Gujarati, United States Military Academy2010 (March 2009) / 552 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337584-7ISBN: 978-0-07-127607-8 [IE]



BASIC ECONOMETRICS 5th EditionBy Damodar N Gujarati, United States Military Academy West Point2009 (October 2008) / 944 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337577-9ISBN: 978-0-07-127625-2 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/gujarati5e

Gujarati and Porter’s Basic Econometrics provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to econometrics without resorting to matrix algebra, calculus, or statistics beyond the elementary level. With the addition of over 100 new data sets, as well as signifi cantly updated research and examples, the Fifth Edition responds to impor-tant developments in the theory and practice of econometrics. Basic Econometrics is widely used by students of all fi elds as the expanded topics and concrete applications throughout the text apply to a broad range of studies.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

New and Updated Data: All of the data used in the illustrative examples has been updated. Over 100 new data sets are available in the Fifth Edition. Several new examples specific to chapter content have also been updated throughout the textbook. Small tables of data are included in the book, but large sample data are posted on the book’s website.

Several examples of concrete computer printouts: Several examples are supplemented by results from EViews (version 6) and STATA (version 10), as well as MINITAB (version 15).

Class Exercises: In a few chapters, new class exercises encour-age students to obtain their own data and implement the various techniques discussed in the book. This edition also incorporates Monte Carlo simulations.

Extended concluding examples: In several chapters, the authors have added extended concluding examples to illustrate the various points made in the text and to make the most current material avail-able to students.

Revitalized design: A new two-color design highlights the latest diagrams, graphs, and new data-based exercises.

Reorganization of Chapter 7: Chapter 7 now discusses not only the marginal impact of a single regressor on the dependent variable but also the impacts of simultaneous changes of all the explanatory variables on the dependent variable.

49

ECONOMICS

New Discussion in Chapter 12: There is new discussion of the impact of structural breaks on autocorrelation in Chapter 12.

New topics in Chapter 13: New topics included in Chapter 13 are missing data, non-normal error term, and stochastic, or random, regressors.

Several new examples in Chapter 15: Chapter 15 contains sev-eral new examples that illustrate the use of logit and probit models in various fields.

Revised discussion on panel data regression models: Chapter 16 on panel data regression models has been thoroughly revised and illustrated with several applications.

Sims and Granger causality tests: An extended discussion of Sims and Granger causality tests is now included in Chapter 17.

Stationary and non-stationary time series: Stationary and non-stationary time series, as well as some of the problems associated with various tests of stationarity, are now thoroughly discussed in Chapter 21.

New discussion in Chapter 22: Chapter 22 includes a discussion on why taking the first differences of a time series for the purpose of making it stationary may not be the appropriate strategy in some situations.

CONTENTS

Part I: Single-Equation Regression ModelChapter 1: The Nature of Regression Analysis Chapter 2: Two-Variable Regression Analysis: Some Basic Ideas Chapter 3: Two Variable Regression Model: The Problem of Estima-tion Chapter 4: Classical Normal Linear Regression Model (CNLRM) Chapter 5: Two-Variable Regression: Interval Estimation and Hy-pothesis Testing Chapter 6: Extensions of the Two-Variable Linear Regression Model Chapter 7: Multiple Regression Analysis: The Problem of Estima-tion Chapter 8: Multiple Regression Analysis: The Problem of Inference Chapter 9: Dummy Variable Regression ModelsPart II: Relaxing the Assumptions of the Classical ModelChapter 10: Multicollinearity: What happens if the Regressor are Correlated Chapter 11: Heteroscedasticity: What Happens if the Error Variance is Nonconstant? Chapter 12: Autocorrelation: What Happens if the Error Terms are Correlated Chapter 13: Econometric Modeling: Model Specification and Diag-nostic TestingPart III: Topics in EconometricsChapter 14: Nonlinear Regression Models Chapter 15: Qualitative Response Regression Models Chapter 16: Panel Data Regression Models Chapter 17: Dynamic Econometric Model: Autoregressive and Dis-tributed-Lag Models.Part IV: Simultaneous-Equation ModelsChapter 18: Simultaneous-Equation Models. Chapter 19: The Identification Problem. Chapter 20: Simultaneous-Equation Methods. Chapter 21: Time Series Econometrics: Some Basic Concepts Chapter 22: Time Series Econometrics: ForecastingAppendix A: Review of Some Statistical Concepts Appendix B: Rudiments of Matrix Algebra Appendix C: The Matrix Approach to Linear Regression Model Appendix D: Statistical Tables Appendix E: Computer Output of EViews, MINITAB, Excel, and STATA Appendix F: Economic Data on the World Wide Web

International Edition ESSENTIALS OF ECONOMETRICS3rd EditionBy Damodar N Gujarati, United States Military Academy West Point2006 / 544 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-313594-6 (with Data Disk CD)ISBN: 978-0-07-124448-0 [IE with Data CD]

http://www.mhhe.com/economics/gujaratiess3

CONTENTS

Chapter 1 The Nature and Scope of Econometrics PART I Basics of Probability and Statistics Chapter 2 Review of Statistics I: Probability and Probability Distribu-tions Chapter 3 Characteristics of Probability Distributions Chapter 4 Some Important Probability Distributions Chapter 5 Statistical Inference: Estimation and Hypothesis Testing PART II The Linear Regression Model Chapter 6 Basic Ideas of Linear Regression: The Two-Variable Model Chapter 7 The Two-Variable Model: Hypothesis Testing Chapter 8 Multiple Regression: Estimation and Hypothesis Testing Chapter 9 Functional Forms of Regression Models Chapter 10 Dummy Variable Regression Models Chapter 11 Model Selection: Criteria and Tests PART III Regression Analysis In Practice Chapter 12 Multicollinearity: What Happens if Explanatory Variable Are Correlated Chapter 13 Heteroscedasticity: What Happens If The Error Variance Is Nonconstant Chapter 14 Autocorrelation: What Happens If Error Terms Are Cor-related PART IV Introduction to Simultaneous Equation Models Chapter 15 Simultaneous Equation Models Chapter 16 Selected Topics in Single Equation Regression Models

International Edition ECONOMETRICSBy Stephen Schmidt, Union College2005 / 524 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-298316-6 (with Data CD) - Out of printISBN: 978-0-07-320030-9 (Revised, with Data CD) - Out of PrintISBN: 978-0-07-111396-0 [IE with Data CD]ISBN: 978-0-07-110541-5 [IE with Data CD, Revised]

http://www.mhhe.com/economics/schmidt1

CONTENTS

Part 1: Econometric Analysis Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Designing an econometric project Part 2: Probability and Statistics Chapter 3 Random variables Chapter 4 Estimation Chapter 5 Hypothesis testing Part 3: Linear Regression Chapter 6 Least Squares Regression Chapter 7 Properties of the least squares estimator Chapter 8 Multivariate regression Part 4: Topics in Linear Regression Chapter 9 Selecting a Functional Form Chapter 10 Determining the econometric specification Chapter 11 Instability of the regression equation Part 5: Violations of the Regression Model Chapter 12 Autocorrelation Chapter 13 Heteroskedasticity Chapter 14 Estimating multiple equations

ECONOMICS

50

Part 6: Advanced Topics Chapter 15 Endogenous variables Chapter 16 Forecasting Chapter 17 Time series analysis Chapter 18 Nonlinear models Chapter 19 Dummy dependent variables Chapter 20 General discrete choice models

International Edition ECONOMETRIC MODELS AND ECONOMIC FORECASTS4th EditionBy Robert S Pindyck, Massachusetts Institute of Technology and Daniel L Rubinfeld, University of California, Berkeley 1998 ISBN: 978-0-07-913292-5 ISBN: 978-0-07-115836-7 [IE]

CONTENTS

The Basics of Regression Analysis: Chapter 1. Introduction to the Regression Model. Chapter 2. Elementary Statistics. Chapter 3. The Two-Variable Regression Model.Chapter 4. The Multiple Regression Model. Chapter 5. Using the Multiple Regression Model. Chapter 6. Serial Correlation and Heterosedasticity. Chapter 7. Instrumental Variables and Model Specification. Chapter 8. Forecasting with a Single-Equation Regression Model. Chapter 9. Single-Equation Estimation. Chapter 10. Nonlinear and Maximum-Likelihood Estimation.

International Edition ECONOMETRIC METHODS4th EditionBy John Johnston, University of California, Irvine and John DiNardo, Massachusetts Institute of Technology1997 / 480 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-913121-8 (with 3.5” disk) - (Out of Print)ISBN: 978-0-07-115342-3 [IE with 3.5” Disk]ISBN: 978-0-07-125964-4 [IE with CD]

CONTENTS

1 Relationships Between Two Variables 2 Further Aspects of Two Variable Relationships 3 The k-Variable Linear Equation 4 Some Tests of the k-Variable Linear Equation for Specification Error 5 Maximum Likelihood (ML), Generalized Least Squares (GLS), and Instrumental Variable (IV) Estimators 6 Heteroscedasticity and Autocorrelation 7 Single Equation Modeling I: The Univariate Case 8 Single Equation Modeling II: The Multivariate Case 9 Multiple Equation Models 10 Generalized Method of Moments 11 A Smorgasbord of Computationally Intensive Methods 12 Limited Dependent Variable and Related Models 13 Panel Data

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF STATISTICS AND ECONOMETRICS2nd EditionBy Dominick Salvatore and Derrick Reagle of Fordham University2002 / 256 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-134852-2 A Schaum Publication

CONTENTS

Introduction. Descriptive Statistics. Probability and Probability Distributions. Statistics Inference: Estimation. Statistical Inference: Testing Hypothesis. Statistics Examination. Simple Regression Analysis. Multiple Regression Analysis. Problems in Regression Analysis. Further Techniques and Applications in Regression Analysis. Simultaneous-Equations Methods. Time Series Econometrics. Statistics Examination. Bionomial Distribution. Poisson Distribution. Standard Normal Distribution. Table of Random Numbers. Student t Distribution. Chi-Square Distribution. F Distribution. Durbin-Watson Statistics. Critical Values of Runs in the Run Tests.

Mathematical Economics

NEW

MATHEMATICS FOR ECONOMICS AND BUSINESS

By Rebecca Taylor, Nottingham Trent University

2008 (April 2008) / 512 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-710786-4 McGraw-Hill UK Title

http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/taylor

For many students embarking on an economics or business course, the level of mathematics required to understand key topics can at fi rst seem daunting. This student friendly text takes a step-by-step approach to explaining mathematical principles and applying these to an economic and business context. The range of study tools employed throughout the text caters for different learning styles and levels of understanding, encouraging students to take an active role in their learning of the subject.

51

ECONOMICS

FEATURES

Coverage of core mathematical principles found in econom-ics and business courses, assuming little prior knowledge of the subject

Student notes provided in boxes within each chapter as a use-ful quick reference tool, summarising key terms and providing tips to help understanding

Worked examples, to consolidate learning and demonstrate the mathematical principles as applied in an economic and business context

Quick Problem boxes to test understanding and application of the mathematical principles taught in each chapter. Answers are provided at the end of the chapter so that students can check progress

CONTENTS

Chapter 1 ~ Mathematical Review Chapter 2 ~ Linear Equations Chapter 3 ~ Linear Equations--Further Topics Chapter 4 ~ Linear Programming Chapter 5 ~ Finance & Growth Chapter 6 ~ Non-Linear Equations Chapter 7 ~ Differentiation Chapter 8 ~ Partial Differentiation Chapter 9 ~ Integration Chapter 10 ~ Matrices

International Edition FUNDAMENTAL METHODS OF MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS4th Edition By Alpha C Chiang, University of Connecticut and Kevin Wainwright, Simon Fraser University2005 / 696 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-010910-0 ISBN: 978-0-07-123823-6 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/www.mhhe.com/economics/chiang4e

CONTENTS

PART 1 Introduction Chapter 1: The Nature of Mathematical Economics Chapter 2: Economic Models PART 2 Static (or Equilibrium) Analysis Chapter 3: Equilibrium Analysis in Economics Chapter 4: Linear Models and Matrix Algebra Chapter 5: Linear Models and Matrix Algebra (continued) PART 3 Comparative-Static Analysis Chapter 6: Comparative Statics and the Concept of the Derivative Chapter 7: Rules of Differentiation and their use in Comparative Statics Chapter 8: Comparative-Static Analysis of General-Function Models PART 4 Optimization Problems Chapter 9: Optimization: A Special Variety of Equilibrium Analysis Chapter 10: Exponential and Logarithmic Functions Chapter 11: The Case of More Than One Choice Variable Chapter 12: Optimization with Equality Constraints NEW Chapter 13: Further Topics in Optimization (includes Envelope Theorem and Duality PART 5 Dynamic Analysis Chapter 14 Economic Analysis and Integral Calculus Chapter 15 Continuous Time: First Order Differential Equations Chapter 16 Higher-Order Differential Equations Chapter 17 DiscreteTime: First Order Difference Equations Chapter 18 Higher Order Difference Equations Chapter 19 Simultaneous Differential Equations and Difference

Equations NEW Chapter 20: Introduction to Optimal Control Theory

International Edition THE STRUCTURE OF ECONOMICSA Mathematical Analysis, 3rd EditionBy Eugene Silberberg, University of Washington and Wing Suen2001 / 688 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-234352-6 (Out of Print)ISBN: 978-0-07-118136-5 [IE]

CONTENTS

1. Comparative Statics and the Paradigm of Economics 2. Review of Calculus (One Variable) 3. Functions of Several Variables 4. Profit Maximization 5. Matrices and Determinants 6. Comparative Statics: The Traditional Methodology 7. The Envelope Theorem and Duality 8. The Derivation of Cost functions 9. Cost and Production Functions: Special Topics 10. The Derivation of Consumer Demand Functions 11. Special topics in Consumer Theory 12. Intertemporal Choice 13. Behavior under Uncertainty 14. Maximization with Inequality and Nonnegativity Constraints 15. Contracts and Incentives 16. Markets with Imperfect Information 17. General Equilibrium I: Linear Models 18. General Equilibrium II: Nonlinear Models 19. Welfare Economics 20. Resource Allocation over Time: Optimal Control theory

SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINE OF INTRODUCTION TO MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICSBy Edward T Dowling, Fordham University2006 / 160 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-145534-3 A Schaum Professsional Publication

When you are looking for a quick nuts-and-bolts overview, there’s no series that does it better. Schaum’s Easy Outline of Introduction to Mathematical Economics is a pared-down, simplifi ed, and tightly focused version of its predecessor.

Designed to appeal to underprepared students and readers turned off by dense text

Cartoons, sidebars, icons, and other graphic pointers get the material across fast

Concise text focuses on the essence of the subject

Delivers expert help from teachers who are authorities in their fi elds

Perfect for last-minute test preparation

ECONOMICS

52

International Edition SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF INTRODUCTION TO MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS3rd EditionBy Edward T. Dowling, Fordham University2001 / 523 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-135896-5 ISBN: 978-0-07-118871-5 [IE]A Schaum Professional Publication

CONTENTS

Review. Economic Applications of Graphs and Equations. The Derivative and the Rules of Differentiation. Uses of the Derivative in Mathematics and Economics. Calculus of Multivariable Functions. Caculus of Multivariable Functions in Economics. Exponential and Logarithmic Functions in Economics. Differentiation of Exponential and Logarithmic Functions. The Fundamentals of Linear (or Matrix) Algebra. Matrix Inversion. Special Determinants and Matrices and Their Use in Economics. Comparative Statics and Concave Programming. Integral Calculus: The Indefinite Integral. Integral Calculus: The Definite Integral. First-Order Differential Equations. First Order Difference Equations. Second-Order Differential Equations and Difference Equations. Simultaneous Differential and Difference Equations. The Calculus of Variations. Optimal Control Theory.

Money and Banking

International Edition MONEY, BANKING AND FINANCIAL MARKETS2nd EditionBy Stephen G Cecchetti, Brandeis University2008 (August 2007) / 704 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-352309-5 ISBN: 978-0-07-128772-2 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/cecchetti2e

Cecchetti’s Money, Banking, and Financial Markets, 2e offers a fresh, modern, and more student-friendly approach to the subject. Students will fi nd the material more relevant and interesting because of the book’s unique emphasis on the Five Core Principles, the early introduction of risk, and an integrated global perspective. Cecchetti is THE money and banking book for today’s students. By focusing on the big picture via core principles, Cecchetti teaches students the rationale for fi nancial rules and institutional structure so that even when the fi nancial system evolves, students’ knowledge will not be out of date. The author draws on his vast experience, which includes: VP at the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, publishing in and editing various journals, consulting for the European Central Bank, the Bank of England, the Bank of Israel, and the Reserve Bank of Australia, as well as his years of teaching at various schools including Ohio State, Brandeis, Princeton, and Oxford University.

CONTENTS

Part I. Money and the Financial SystemChapter 1 An Introduction to Money and the Financial System Chapter 2 Money and the Payments System Chapter 3 Financial Instruments, Financial Markets, and Financial InstitutionsPart II. Interest Rates, Financial Instruments, and Financial MarketsChapter 4 Future Value, Present Value, and Interest Rates Chapter 5 Understanding Risk Chapter 6 Bonds, Bond Prices, and the Determination of Interest Rates Chapter 7 The Risk and Term Structure of Interest Rates Chapter 8 Stocks, Stock Markets, and Market Efficiency Chapter 9 Derivatives: Futures, Options, and Swaps Chapter 10 Foreign ExchangePart III. Financial InstitutionsChapter 11 The Economics of Financial Intermediation Chapter 12 Depository Institutions: Banks and Bank Management Chapter 13 Financial Industry Structure Chapter 14 Regulating the Financial SystemPart IV. Central Banks, Monetary Policy, and Financial StabilityChapter 15 Central Banks in the World Today Chapter 16 The Structure of Central Banks: The U.S. Federal Reserve & European Central Bank Chapter 17 The Central Bank Balance Sheet and the Money Supply Process Chapter 18 Monetary Policy: Using Interest Rates to Stabilize the Domestic Economy Chapter 19 Exchange Rate Policy and the Central BankPart V. Modern Monetary EconomicsChapter 20 Money Growth, Money Demand, and Monetary Policy Chapter 21 Modern Monetary Policy and Aggregate Demand Chapter 22 Understanding Business Cycles Chapter 23 Monetary Policy, Output, and Inflation in the Short Run





53

ECONOMICS

International Economics

NEW

INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS, GLOBALIZATION, AND POLICYA Reader, 5th EditionBy Philip G King, San Francisco State University and Sharmila Kumari King, University of the Pacifi c

2009 (September 2008) / 480 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337581-6

The King reader is a collection of articles on international economics by leading economists drawn from various scholarly sources (e.g., Foreign Affairs, Current Issues in Economics and Finance, Finance and Development, Federal Reserve Publications, the Journal of Eco-nomic Perspectives). Previously known as International Economics and International Economic Policy, the new title is briefer and yet more descriptive, since the term globalization has been added to refl ect the content of the book, which is also used in courses devoted to globalization, particularly the economic aspects of globalization. The Fifth Edition focuses on real debates within the discipline of economics and political economy, not on phony “pro-cons” debates which often obscure the real issues. The reader continues to be unique as the most relevant in today’s market.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

Fully Revised and Current: Over 80% of the Fifth Edition is new articles, making this reader timely and engaging.

Critical International Financial flows focus: emphasis on leading topics such as the growing importance of sovereign wealth funds, foreign aid and microfinance. Take a retrospective look at past fi-nancial crises. While undoubtedly, every financial crisis is different, the lessons learned from a few crises can bring important context to any classroom.

Emphasis on immigration, the U.S. Dollar, and U.S. Debt: These are the key headline issues as the text goes to print into the Fifth Edition. The U.S. savings rate is negative (as of Spring of 2008), the U.S. budget deficit and trade deficit is growing, and off-shoring, and immigration is a major issue in US politics.

Expanded discussion on China: China’s importance in the world continues to grow. The importance of the country’s recent role as creditor to the U.S., as well as major manufacturing power, is reflected in the expanded coverage.

More Case Studies Added: This edition contains a number of articles with specific case studies such as the economic effects of US rice subsidies, NAFTA, healthcare, the environment, and IMF reform.

CONTENTS

PrefaceINTERNATIONAL TRADESection 1: Issues in Trade and Protectionism1. How Costly is Protectionism? 2. Grain Drain: The Hidden Cost of U.S. Rice Subsidies 3. International Trade: Why We Don’t Have More of ItSection 2: Outsourcing, the WTO, and the Environment4. Bridging the Trade-Environment Divide 5. Labor Standards: Where Do They Belong on the International

Trade Agenda? 6. Beyond the Outsourcing Angst: Making America More Produc-tive 7. Offshoring: The Next Industrial Revolution? 8. Trade in Heath Care: Changing Paradigms in a Global EconomySection 3: NAFTA, FDI, and other Trade Issues9. Recent US Trade Policies in Latin America: From Multilateralism to Regionalism 10. Does Foreign Direct Investment Help Emerging Economies? 11. Have U.S. Import Prices Become Less Responsive to Changes in the Dollar?Section 4: Immigration12. Global Migration 13. America’s Stake in Immigration: Why Almost Everybody WinsSection 5: Globalization14. The Global Governance of Trade as if Development Really Mat-tered 15. Farm Fallacies That Hurt the Poor 16. Are We Underestimating the Gains from Globalization for the United States? 17. What’s So Special about China’s Exports?INTERNATIONAL FINANCESection 6: Trade Deficit Disorder18. Twin Deficits, Twenty Years Later 19. Why a Dollar Depreciation May Not Close the U.S. Trade Defi-cit 20. Trade Deficits Aren’t as Bad as You ThinkSection 7: Exchange Rate Regimes and Macroeconomic Stabi-lization Policies21. Does the Exchange Rate Regime Matter for Inflation and Growth? 22. China’s Controversial Exchange Rate Policy 23. To Float or Not to Float? Exchange Rate Regimes and Shocks 24. Moving to a Flexible Exchange Rate: How, When, and How Fast? 25. Official Dollarization and the Banking System in Ecuador and El SalvadorSection 8: Europe and the Euro Zone26. The Euro: Ever More Global 27. Integration and Globalization: The European BellwetherSection 9: Financial Crises and Capital Flows28. Asia Ten Years After 29. Financial Crises of the Future 30. Financial-Sector Foreign Direct Investment and Host Countries: New and Old Lessons 31. Appraising the IMF’s Performance: A review of the first three studies by the new Independent Evaluation Office 32. Are Sovereign Wealth Funds here to Stay?Section 10: Foreign Aid33. Aid and Growth 34. Microfinance: Banking for the Poor





ECONOMICS

54


INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS14th Edition

By Thomas Pugel, New York University

2009 (November 2008) / 768 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337575-5ISBN: 978-0-07-128079-2 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/pugel14e

International Economics, 14e continues to combine rigorous eco-nomic analysis with attention to the issues of economic policy that are alive and important today in this fi eld. Written in a concise and readable format, Pugel uses economic terminology when enhancing the analysis so that the reader can build their understanding of global economic developments and evaluate proposals for changes in eco-nomic policies. The text is informed by current events and includes the latest in applied international research, all the time avoiding jargon for jargon’s sake. Like earlier editions, Pugel also places international economics events within a historical framework. The overall treatment continues to be intuitive rather than mathematical and is strongly oriented towards policy.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

Current and Recent Key Events: The “key events” that are found in this new edition are: the price of crude oil doubling during 2007 and into 2008, lumber dispute between the United States and Canada, China’s refined policy toward direct investments by foreign firms, immigration and its controversies in the United States, and the price of gold increase.

Global Governance Boxes: Additional shaded boxes on Global Governance have now been included. These boxes examine the World trade Organization (WTO) and the International Monetary Fund (IMF). These boxes have been integrated throughout the text to take a deeper look into these organizations.

New Focus on China: New content has been added to the series Focus on China as Pugel continues to pay special attention to the country that is a rapidly rising force in the global economy. In Chapter 8, a new box in the series Focus on China examines what has happened since China joined the WTO in 2001. Specific aspects of China’s international activities appear throughout the text including new information on China’s intra-industry trade, China’s rising use of its own antidumping procedures, and the foreign pressures on China to allow more appreciation of the exchange rate value of its currency.

Extensively revised Chapter 6: Chapter 6 has been renamed (Scale Economies, Imperfect Competition and Alternate Trade) and extensively rewritten. A precise discussion of scale economies, clear explanation of intra-industry trades and how to measure it, and a logi-cal discussion of monopolistic competition are the new updates in this chapter. New end-of-chapter questions correspond to the improved content of the chapter.

New Case Studies: A new Case Study box in Chapter 2 de-velops the context for studying international trade by showing the growth of world trade and the rising importance of trade to national economies.

Revised NAFTA Sections: The sections on the North American Free Trade Area (NAFTA) in Chapters 12 and 13 have been revised and rewritten to highlight information on the actual effects of NAFTA

since it started in 1994. Research shows a noticeable expansion of trade within the area, some evidence of substantial trade diversion, large increases in direct investments by foreign firms into Mexico, and a lack of progress in addressing environmental problems along the U.S.-Mexico border.

New Information on Global Warming: The 14th edition has new information on the probable effects of global warming on different countries and areas (Chapter 13). It also explains the importance of a global approach to address global warming. It presents a summary of a study by IMF researchers that shows that a global effort to stop the rise of greenhouse gasses in the atmosphere by using a carbon tax would have a manageable cost in that the tax would decrease the growth of global real income by only a small amount.

New Terminology: Throughout Parts Three and Four, Pugel now uses the term financial account in place of the older term capital ac-count. This matches the terminology used by the IMF and national governments. Financial account also better describes the items that belong in this part of the balance of payments.

Condensed Content on the Exchange Rate Mechanism: In Chapter 25, the section on the Exchange Rate Mechanism has been condensed to shift the focus of this part of the chapter to the euro and European Monetary Union. The discussion now includes estimates of the actual expansion of international trade within the euro area as a result of the adoption of the single currency.

Enhanced Discussions of International Monetary Issues: Pugel has enhanced discussions of international monetary issues throughout the text to maintain the recent research of these issues.

CONTENTS

Chapter 1: International Economics Is DifferentPart I: The Theory of International TradeChapter 2: 2. The Basic Theory Using Demand and Supply Chapter 3: Why Everybody Trades: Comparative Advantage Chapter 4: Trade: Factor Availability and Factor Proportions Are Key Chapter 5: Who Gains and Who Loses from Trade? Chapter 6: Scale Economies, Imperfect Competition, and Trade Chapter 7: Growth and TradePart II: Trade PolicyChapter 8: Analysis of a Tariff Chapter 9: Nontariff Barriers to Imports Chapter 10: Arguments For and Against Protection Chapter 11: Pushing Exports Chapter 12: Trade Blocs and Trade Blocks Chapter 13: . Trade and the Environment Chapter 14: Trade Policies for Developing Countries Chapter 15: Multinationals and Migration: International Factor Move-mentsPart III: Understanding Foreign ExchangeChapter 16: Payments Among Nations Chapter 17: The Foreign Exchange Market Chapter 18: Forward Exchange and International Financial Invest-ment Chapter 19: What Determines Exchange Rates? Chapter 20: Government Policies Toward the Foreign Exchange Market Chapter 21: International Lending and Financial CrisesPart IV: Macro Policies for Open EconomiesChapter 22: How Does the Open Macroeconomy Work? Chapter 23: Internal and External Balance with Fixed Exchange Rates Chapter 24: Floating Exchange Rates and Internal Balance Chapter 25: National and Global Choices: Floating Rates and the AlternativesAppendix A: The Web and the Library: International Numbers and Other Information Appendix B: Deriving Production-Possibilities Curves Appendix C: Offer Curves Appendix D: The Nationally Optimal Tariff Appendix E: Accounting for International Payments

55

ECONOMICS

Appendix F: Many Parities at Once Appendix G: Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply in the Open Economy Appendix E: Devaluation and the Current Account Balance

International Edition INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS6th EditionBy Dennis R Appleyard, Davidson College, Alfred J Field, University of NC-Chapel Hill and Steven Cobb, University of North Texas2008 (October 2007) / 800 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337567-0 ISBN: 978-0-07-128756-2 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/appleyard6e

Appleyard, Field, and Cobb’s International Economics, 6th Edition is an International Economics textbook that offers a consistent level of analysis and treatment of the two main subdivisions of international economics- international trade theory and policy and international monetary theory and policy. Comprehensive and clear, the text helps students move beyond recognition toward an understanding of cur-rent and future international events. As with each prior edition, the authors provide current and timely information on the wide variety of international economic phenomena in the 6th Edition. New boxed items were added to cover emerging issues in the global economy. Chapter material was updated to include recent developments in U.S. trade policy, major changes in the European Union, progress in the transition from command to market economies, and special issues related to developing nations. These improvements are designed to help readers both understand and appreciate the growing importance of the global economy in their lives.

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION1. The World of International EconomicsPART I2. Early Trade Theories: Mercantilism and the Transition to the Clas-sical World of David Ricardo 3. The Classical World of David Ricardo and Comparative Advan-tage 4. Extensions and Tests of the Classical Model of TradePART II5. Introduction to Neoclassical Trade Theory: Tools to Be Employed 6. Gains from Trade in Neoclassical Theory 7. Offer Curves and the Terms of Trade 8. The Basis for Trade: Factor Endowments and the Heckscher-Ohlin Model 9. Empirical Tests of the Factor Endowments ApproachPART III10. Post Heckscher-Ohlin Theories of Trade and Intra-Industry Trade 11. Economic Growth and International Trade 12. International Factor MovementsPART IV13. The Instruments of Trade Policy 14. The Impact of Trade Policies 15. Arguments for Interventionist Trade Policies 16. Political Economy and Recent U.S. Trade Policy 17. Economic Integration 18. International Trade and the Developing CountriesPART V19. The Balance of Payments Accounts 20. The Foreign Exchange Market 21. International Financial Markets and Instruments: An Introduc-tion 22. The Monetary and Portfolio Balance Approaches to External Balance 23. Price Adjustments and Balance of Payments Disequilibrium

24. National Income and the Current AccountPART VI25. Economic Policy in the Open Economy: Fixed Exchange Rates 26. Economic Policy in the Open Economy: Flexible Exchange Rates 27. Prices and Output in the Open Economy: Aggregate Supply and DemandPART VII28. Fixed or Flexible Exchange Rates? 29. The International Monetary System: Past, Present, and Future

NEW

INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS5th Edition

By Francis Cherunilam, Cochin University of Sci-ence and Technology

2008 (May 2008) / 780 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-026364-2McGraw-Hill India Title

www.mhhe.com/intec05c

The book has been written keeping in mind the undergraduate and postgraduate students of international economics. It is designed to provide an analytical and critical account of theories and issues. At the same time it discusses the subject matter systematically and lucidly so that an average student can easily understand it. The book aims to serve as a concise and comprehensive textbook for students of international economics. The fi eld of International Economics is very dynamic, characterizes as it is by almost continuous changes in many variables which shape the structure and nature of the global economy and set the trends. The revision is done with the objective of making the coverage updated and to incorporate the signifi cant changes and trends since the publication of the last edition.

CONTENTS

PART I: INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS AND THE GLOBAL ECONOMY 1. Introduction 2. International Economic Gap and Nieo 3. Global Trade 4. Globalisation PART 2: BASES OF TRADE AND DEVELOPMENT 5. Analytical Tools 6. Theories of International Trade 7. Gains From Trade and Terms of Trade 8. Economic Growth and Trade PART 3: TRADE POLICIES AND ISSUES 9. Trade Strategy 10. Trade Barriers 11. Cartels, Commodity Agreements and State Trading 12. Social Issues in International Trade PART 4: ECONOMIC INTEGRATION AND COOPERATION 13. Economic Integration 14. South-South Cooperation PART 5: INTERNATIONAL MONETARY ECONOMICS 15. Balance of Payments 16. Policies for Internal and External Balance 17. International Monetary System 18. Foreign Exchange 19. International Liquidity and Reserves

ECONOMICS

56

20. International Banking and Eurocurrency Market PART 6: INTERNATIONAL FACTOR MOVEMENT 21. International Capital Flows 22. Multinational Corporations 23. Transfer of Technology 24. Official Development Assistance 25. International Debt 26. International Migration PART 7: INTERNATIONAL ECONOMIC ORGANISATIONS 27. IMF and Development Organisations 28. World Trade Organisation PART 8: TRADE POLICY AND PERFORMANCE OF INDIA 29. Trade Regulation and Promotion 30. Trade and BOP of India

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS4th EditionBy Dominick Salvatore, Fordham University—Bronx1996 / 288 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-054950-0 A Schaum Professional Publication

Outstanding for its easy-to-understand explanations of international economics, this guide covers all course fundamentals and supple-ments any class text. It takes students through the solution of hundreds of problems dealing with demand and supply in trade, the foreign exchange markets, fl exible and fi xed exchange rates and much more. Also includes practice midterm and fi nal exams.

Labor Economics


LABOR ECONOMICS5th Edition

By George J Borjas, Harvard University-Cam-bridge


http://www.mhhe.com/borjas5e

Labor Economics, 5e is a well-received text that blends coverage of traditional topics with modern theory and developments into a superb Labor Economics book. The Fifth Edition builds on the features and concepts that made the fi rst four editions successful, updating and adding new content to keep the text on the cusp of recent events in the Labor Economics fi eld. The new edition continues to be the most concise book in the market as the instructor is able to teach all relevant material in a semester long class. Despite the book’s brev-

ity, the instructor will fi nd that all of the key topics in labor economics are covered. The Fifth Edition is will allow students to learn topics in this fi eld through a book that is not encyclopedic. Through updated pedagogy, new end-of-chapter material, and an even stronger instruc-tor support, the Fifth edition of Labor Economics remains one of the most relevant textbooks in the market.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

Revised and Updated Chapter 2 on Labor Supply: Chapter 2 of this new edition presents the basic theory of labor supply, including both the labor-leisure decision at a point in time as well as the decision of how a person allocates his or her time over time. Presentation of the labor supply discussion has been tightened and shortened into one new chapter so that the book doesn’t mirror and encyclopedic read to students.

Updated “Web Links”: Each chapter contains “Web Links,” guiding students to Web sites that provide additional data or policy discussions.

Updated list of “Selected Readings”: There is an updated list of “Selected Readings, “that includes both standard references in a particular area and recent applications.

New end-of-chapter problems: There are approximately 14 new problems per chapter located at the end-of-chapter.

New and detailed policy applications: The text has added de-tailed policy applications in labor economics and to use the evidence reported in state-of-the-art research articles to illustrate the many uses of modern labor economics. Some specific application included in the Fifth Edition are:

-Several new “Theory at Work” boxes. The sidebars now include a discussion of the impact of the military deployment of parents on the human capital of children; the importance of nature and nurture in determining intergenerational correlations in skills; the impact of the terrorist attacks of 9/11 on the earnings of Arabs and Muslims employed in the United States; and the role of gender differences in labor market competition.

-An application of the theory of mandated benefi ts to health insur-ance.

-A discussion of the labor market impact of employer sanctions that can be imposed when a fi rm hires unauthorized workers.

-An updating of the material on immigration, including an analysis of labor fl ows into and out of Puerto Rico.

-A new section discussing how labor markets adjust to the costly disruption caused by severe hurricanes.

-An extension of the theory of compensating differentials to examine why different fi rms choose to offer different wage-amenities packages to their workers.

-A discussion of how the outcomes of union representation elections infl uence the stock market value of fi rms.

CONTENTS

Chapter 1: Introduction to Labor Economics Chapter 2: Labor Supply Chapter 3: Topics in Labor Supply Chapter 4: Labor Demand Chapter 5: Labor Market Equilibrium Chapter 6: Compensating Wage Differentials Chapter 7: Human Capital Chapter 8: The Wage Structure Chapter 9: Labor Mobility Chapter 10: Labor Market Discrimination Chapter 11: Labor Unions Chapter 12: Incentive Pay Chapter 13: Unemployment

57

ECONOMICS

International Edition CONTEMPORARY LABOR ECONOMICS8th EditionBy Campbell R McConnell, University of Nebraska--Lincoln, Stanley L Brue, Pacifi c Lutheran University and David Macpherson, Florida State University-Tallahassee2008 (October 2007) / 640 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351132-0 ISBN: 978-0-07-128319-9 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/mcconnellCLE8e

Contemporary Labor Economics, 8e presents the “new” labor econom-ics. In the past, study of labor was highly descriptive, emphasizing historical developments, facts, institutions, and legal considerations. Labor markets and unemployment was given some attention, but the analysis was typically minimal. This state of affairs has changed signifi cantly in recent decades. Economists have achieved important breakthroughs in studying labor markets and problems. Labor eco-nomics is increasingly an applied fi eld of micro and macro theory and has become a critical part of the core of analytical economics. As a result, the focus of the text is on the “new” labor economics. However, it also presents traditional topics such as labor law, structure of unions, and collective bargaining since these issues also play an important role in labor markets. In the Eighth Edition, the authors deliver new and updated discussions of public policy issues. Additionally, the text’s integrated focus on global aspects of U.S. labor markets has continued and been expanded with this edition.

CONTENTS

1 Labor Economics: Introduction and Overview 2 The Theory of Individual Labor Supply 3 Population, Participation Rates, and Hours of Work 4 Labor Quality: Investing in Human Capital 5 The Demand for Labor 6 Wage Determination and the Allocation of Labor 7 Alternative Pay Schemes and Labor Efficiency 8 The Wage Structure 9 Mobility, Migration, and Efficiency 10 Labor Unions and Collective Bargaining 11 The Economic Impact of Unions 12 Government and the Labor Market: Employment, Expenditures, and Taxation 13 Government and the Labor market: Legislation and Regulation 14 Labor Market Discrimination 15 Job Search: External and Internal 16 The Distribution of Personal Earnings 17 Labor Productivity: Wages, Prices, and Employment 18 Employment and Unemployment Appendix / Glossary / Answers to “Your Turn” Questions / Index

STATE OF THE UNIONSHow Labor Can Strengthen the Middle Class, Improve Our Economy, and Regain Political Infl uenceBy Philip M Dine2008 (August 2007) / 276 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-148844-0A Professional Reference Title

From steel workers, Teamsters, and coal miners to teachers, actors, and civil servants, union members once accounted for more than one third of the American workforce. At a mere 12 percent, union membership today is a shadow of what it once was. What happened to organized labor in America and what can be done to restore it to its role of the defender of middle-class values and economic well-being? Award-winning investigative reporter Philip M. Dine takes us on a rivet-ing journey through America’s cities and back roads, its factories and union halls, to answer those questions. From the health care crisis to massive job fl ight overseas, from rampant home foreclosures to illegal immigration, he clearly shows how virtually every major economic, political, and social trend impacting our way of life is tied to the state of America’s unions. Combining a compelling narrative with expert analysis, Dine offers fi rsthand accounts of the union members striv-ing to make their voices heard in a political landscape increasingly shaped by corporate interests, including how:

The women of Delta Pride-a major player in the multi-billion dollar catfish industry-went up against generations of racial and economic prejudice

Iowa’s firefighters union flexed its collective muscle to score a major political victory in the 2004 caucus

The American Federation of Teachers and the AFL-CIO played a key role in bringing down the Iron Curtain

The Teamsters enlisted community support to temporarily stop a move by Mr. Coffee to relocate to Mexico and saved nearly 400 manufacturing jobs in the Cleveland area

A reporter who has covered labor for two decades, Dine not only details where labor has gone wrong, but he also offers sage advice on how it can adapt to a global economy to recover the ground it lost over the last quarter century.





ECONOMICS

58

Urban Economics


URBAN ECONOMICS7th Edition

By Arthur O’Sullivan, Lewis & Clark College


http://www.mhhe.com/osullivan7e

The Seventh edition of Urban Economics continues to be the market leading textbook due to its thorough content and concise writing style. The new edition continues to cover urban economics as the discipline that lies at the intersection of geography and economics. Urban Economics incorporates the remarkable progress in the fi eld of urban economics from the last fi fteen years. It also explores the loca-tion decisions of utility-maximizing households and profi t-maximizing fi rms, and it shows how these decisions cause the formation of cities of different size and shape. The framework of this edition continues to be divided into six sections:

-Part I explains why cities exist and what causes hem to grow or shrink

-Part II examines the market forces that shape cities and the role of government in determining land-use patterns

-Part III looks at the urban transportation system

-Part IV uses a model of the rational criminal to explore the causes of urban crime and its spatial consequences

-Part V explains the unique features of the housing market and ex-amines the effects of government housing policies

-Part VI explains the rationale for our fragmented system of local government and explores the responses of local governments to inter-governmental grants and the responses of taxpayers to local taxes.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

Maps: Maps have been added to the seventh edition to show the spatial distribution of all sorts of urban activity. These maps are also available, in color, on the book’s Web site, along with similar maps for other metropolitan areas.

Updated end-of-chapter exercises: The number of exercises has doubled with at least 10 exercises per chapter. Many of the new exercises are more structured than earlier exercises, and many have numerical answers. These changes will make the exercises better teaching tools as homework, discussion questions, and exam questions.

Instructor Resources: Instructor resources include a complete set of figures and tables . It also contains lecture outlines, model answers to the exercises, additional exercises, and a bonus chapter on the core-periphery model of regional development. These resources can be found on the book’s Web site: www.mhhe.com/osullivan7e.

New Appendices: Two additional appendices are located in Chapter 2 and Chapter 4. The Appendix to Chapter 2 presents clas-sical location theory for resource-oriented (weight-losing) and market-oriented (weight-gaining) firms. The Appendix to Chapter 4 provides a brief overview of classical central-place theory.

CONTENTS

Part I: Market Forces in the Development of CitiesChapter 2: Why Do Cities Exist? Chapter 3: Why Do Firms Cluster? Chapter 4: City Size Chapter 5: Urban GrowthPart II: Land Rent and Land-Use PatternsChapter 6: Urban Land Rent Chapter 7: Land-Use Patterns Chapter 8: Neighborhood Choice Chapter 9: Zoning and Growth ControlsPart III: Urban TransportationChapter 10: Externalities from Autos Chapter 11: Mass TransitPart IV: Urban CrimeChapter 12: CrimePart V: HousingChapter 13: Why is Housing Different? Chapter 14: Housing PolicyPart VI: Local GovernmentChapter 15: The Role of Local Government Chapter 16: Local Government RevenueAppendix: Tools of Microeconomics

Public Finance


PUBLIC FINANCE

By Laurence Seidman, University of Delaware


http://www.mhhe.com/seidman1e

Public Finance is an approachable text designed with students in mind. The 13 chapters are intentionally written to be taught easily in one semester without skipping material or losing any information. Public Finance contains all the necessary tools and core chapters that are integral to any Public Finance course in a clear and easy-to-read format. The concise sections and lucid examples are engaging for students, without being dense or tedious. This First Edition text incorporates research from across the discipline and provides em-pirical tie-ins to the real world. The author also covers special topic chapters that defi ne public fi nance, like education, social security, and healthcare.

59

ECONOMICS

FEATURES

Writing Style: The concise and conversational writing style makes this first edition text very approachable to students. The brief sections and clear examples are appealing and relevant, without becoming crowded or dull.

Relevant Research: Public Finance, 1e incorporates research from across the discipline, extending beyond the classroom to provide empirical tie-ins to the real world and students’ lives.

Boxed material: Seidman’s attention to modern advances in Public Finance appears in three ways throughout the text.

-In the News: Examples of public fi nance in the headlines and in the surrounding world.

-Case Studies: Contemporary work and fi ndings on topics in public fi nance and public policy.

-Current Research: Empirical studies presenting new ways of thinking about public fi nance.

Real-World Issues: The new textbook explores the current and controversial topics that are relevant in today’s world with chapters devoted to health care, the environment, and social security. Students will examine the most economical way to resolve these issues by taking a public finance approach.

Appendices: Several chapters contain appendices for further exploration and explanation of indifference curve material, allowing a professor to customize the course to fit time constraints and the varying competencies of students.

Exhibits: This textbook offers a complete look at the material by employing easy-to-read graphs, tables and charts that supply an intuitive, at-a-glance understanding of the material without dense prose and lengthy passages.

CONTENTS

A Note to Professors1 Introduction to Public Finance 2 Externalities and the Environment 3 Public Goods and Political Economy 4 Cost-Benefit Analysis 5 Social Security 6 Health Insurance 7 Tax Incidence and Inefficiency 8 Income Taxes 9 Consumption Taxes 10 State and Local Public Finance 11 Education 12 Low-Income Assistance 13 Government BorrowingIndex

NEW

PUBLIC ECONOMICS2nd Edition

By Peter Abelson, University of Sydney

2008 (February 2008) / 736 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-013905-3McGraw-HIll Australia Title

http://www.mhhe.com/au/abelson2e

Public Economics: Principles and Practice is the leading Australian text in the fi eld of public economics. In this second edition, Peter Abelson introduces the key principles and factors that form the basis of public economics and outlines how they can be applied to practical issues.

provides an understanding of the fi eld of public economics

studies the role of government in economic effi ciency and distribution

successfully strikes a balance between academic rigour and reader accessibility

This title is perfectly pitched at undergraduate students in public economics/public fi nance and graduate students involved in public policy and public administration.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

extensively revised and updated, with additional content on taxation

new chapter on Health; topical discussion on the public provision of health care services and the role of government in its delivery

new chapter on Public Education; an outline of how the benefits of education can be quantified and an investigation into the equity issues involved in its cost effective provision

illustrated with a range of Australasian applications and inter-national comparisons

CONTENTS

Part 1: Nature of Government 1 Foundations of Public Economics2 Government in PracticePart 2: Markets and Government3 Competitive markets: Efficiency and Welfare4 Market Failures, Equity and Government5 Economic Growth and GovernmentPart 3: Economic Evaluation and Public Policy6 Valuing Individual Preferences7 Social Welfare and Economic Evaluation8 Cost-Benefit AnalysisPart 4: Public Choice9 Public Choice and Individual Values10 Public Choice in PracticePart 5: Building Economic Foundations 11 Public Goods 12 Education13 Externalities and Environment14 Competition Policy and Industry Regulation 15 Information and Safety





ECONOMICS

60

Part 6: Public Supply of Goods and Services16 Delivering Efficient Public Services17 Pricing Public Services 18 Public or Private Ownership19 Economic Infrastructure: TransportPart 7: Public Finance and Taxation20 Introduction to Public Finance21 Incidence of Taxation22 Taxation and Efficiency23 Optimal Taxation and Tax Reform24 Borrowing and Debt Part 8: Taxation in Practice25 Taxation of Personal Income26 Corporate Taxation27 Other Tax Issues: Consumption, Wealth, and Non-Profit Organi-sationsPart 9: Social Welfare and Income Redistribution28 Poverty and Inequality29 Welfare by Market Regulation 30 Income Redistribution and Other Welfare Policies31 Welfare for the Workforce, Families, and the Aged32 HealthPart 10: Multi-Government Systems33 Multilevel Government34 Globalisation and GovernmentPart 11: Conclusion35 Concluding Observations / EpilogueGlossaryReferencesIndex

International Edition PUBLIC FINANCE8th EditionBy Harvey Rosen, Princeton University2008 (March 2007) / 624 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-351128-3 ISBN: 978-0-07-125939-2 [IE]

Public Finance 8/e benefi ts from the combined efforts of Harvey Rosen’s market-leading book and new co-author Ted Gayer’s research and government agency experience. Ted recently served as a Senior Economist on the President’s Council of Economic Advisors and is currently a member of the EPA’s Science Advisory Board. Addition-ally, Rosen served on the President’s Council of Economics Advisers, 2003-2005, as a member and chairman. As a result, the 8th edition maintains the strengths of previous editions but is enhanced with new material and current examples from public fi nance literature and the policy world. It includes substantive changes that refl ect the progress that has been made in the fi eld of public fi nance. These changes may be divided into three categories: new organization, new material, and new pedagogical features. As with previous editions, the book contin-ues to draw upon the latest research while never losing sight of the reality it is supposed to describe, always drawing the links between economic analysis and current political issues.

CONTENTS

Part 1: Getting Started Chapter 1: Introduction Chapter 2: Tools Of Positive Analysis Chapter 3: Tools Of Normative Analysis Part 2: Public Expenditure: Public Goods And Externalities Chapter 4: Public Goods Chapter 5: Externalities Chapter 6: Political Economy Chapter 7: Education Chapter 8: Cost-benefit Analysis Part 3: Public Expenditure: Social Insurance And Income Main-tenance Chapter 9: The Health Care Market

Chapter 10: Government And The Market For Health Care Chapter 11: Social Security Chapter 12: Income Redistribution: Conceptual Issues Chapter 13: Expenditure Programs For The Poor Part 4: A Framework For Tax Analysis Chapter 14: Taxation And Income Distribution Chapter 15: Taxation And Efficiency Chapter 16: Efficient And Equitable Taxation Part 5: The United States Revenue System Chapter 17: The Personal Income Tax Chapter 18: Personal Taxation And Behavior Chapter 19: The Corporation Tax Chapter 20: Deficit Finance Chapter 21: Fundamental Tax Reform: Taxes On Consumption And Wealth Part 6: Multigovernment Public Finance Chapter 22: Public Finance In A Federal System

Advanced Microeconomics

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF MICROECONOMIC THEORY 4th EditionBy Dominick Salvatore, Fordham University2006 (May 2006) / 384 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-146236-5 A Schaum Professional Publication

CONTENTS

Chapter 1 Macroeconomics for the Long Run and for the Short Run Book One: The Long Run: Economic Growth, Long Run Unemploy-ment, and Structural Economic Policy Part I Basic Theory and Empirics about Prosperity and Growth Chapter 2 Some Facts about Prosperity and Growth Chapter 3 Capital Accumulation and Growth: The Basic Solow Model Chapter 4 Wealth Accumulation and Capital Mobility: The Solow Model for a Small Open Economy Part II Exogenous Growth Chapter 5 Technological Progress and Growth: The General Solow Model Chapter 6 Education and Growth: The Solow Model with Human Capital Chapter 7 Limits to Growth? The Solow Model with Scarce Natural Resources Part III Endogenous Growth Chapter 8 Productive Externalities and Endogenous Growth Chapter 9 R&D-Based Models of Endogenous Growth: Macroeco-nomic Modelling Chapter 10 R&D-Based Models of Endogenous Growth: Micro Foundations Part IV Structural Unemployment Chapter 11 Some Facts and Introductory Theory about Unemploy-ment Chapter 12 Efficiency Wages and Unemployment Chapter 12 Trade Unions and Unemployment Book Two The Short Run: Economic Fluctuations, Short Run Unem-ployment, and Stabilisation Policy Chapter 14 The Economy in the Short Run: Some Facts about Busi-ness Cycles

61

ECONOMICS

Part V The Building Blocks for the Short Run Model Chapter 15 Investment and Asset Prices Chapter 16 Consumption, Income and Wealth Chapter 17 Monetary Policy and Aggregate Demand Chapter 18 Inflation, Unemployment and Aggregate Supply Part VI The Short Run Model for the Closed Economy Chapter 19 Explaining Business Cycles: Aggregate Supply and Ag-gregate Demand in Action Chapter 20 Stabilization Policy: Why and How? Chapter 21 Stabilization Policy with Rational Expectations Chapter 22 The Limits to Stabilization Policy: Credibility, Uncertainty and Time Lags Part VII The Short Run Model for the Open Economy Chapter 23 Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply in the Open Economy Chapter 24 The Open Economy with Fixed Exchange Rates Chapter 25 The Open Economy with Flexible Exchange Rates Chapter 26 The Choice of Exchange Rate Regime and the Theory of Optimum Currency Areas

Regional Economics

NEW

THE ECONOMICS OF EUROPEAN INTEGRATION3rd Edition

By Richard Baldwin and Charles Wyplosz

2009 (May 2009) / 560 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-712163-1McGraw-Hill UK Title

http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/baldwinandwyplosz

CONTENTS

Part 1: History, Facts and Institutions1. History2. Facts, Law, institutions and the budget3. Decision MakingPart 2: The Microeconomics of Economic Integration4. Essential Microeconomic tools5. The essential economics of preferential liberalization6. Market Size and scale effects7. Growth effects and factor market integration8. Economic Integration, labour markets and migrationPart 3: EU Policies9. The Common Agricultural Policy 10. Location effects, economic geography and regional policy11. EU Competition and state aid policy12. EU trade policyPart 4: Monetary Integration: History and Principles13. Essential Macroeconomic Tools14. Essentials Lessons from History15. Partial Integration: The European Monetary System16. Optimum Currency AreasPart 5: Monetary and Fiscal Policy in the EU

17. The Single Currency18. Fiscal Policy and the Stability Pact19. The Financial Markets and the Euro

NEW

THE EUROPEAN UNIONEconomics, Policies and History, 2nd Edition

By Susan Senior Nello, University of Seina, Italy

2008 (December 2008) / 544 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-711813-6McGraw-Hill UK Title

http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/senior

In The European Union: Economics, Policies and History, 2nd Edition the author builds on the success and popularity of the fi rst edition by using a combination of economics, politics and history, to give the reader a strong grounding in European integration and why and how policies are put in place. The book is designed to appeal to a broad range of people studying the European Union. Susan Senior Nello’s clear, non-technical explanations and use of appendices for more detailed discussion of theory, ensures the book will appeal to students from a range of disciplines.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

New chapter on the Lisbon Strategy and Beyond – this topical issue is now addressed in its own chapter

New coverage of environmental issues

Fully updated policy coverage - Aiming to stimulate debate amongst students, the book covers all of the major EU policies such as the Common Agricultural Policy and Environmental and Energy Policies.

CONTENTS

Guided TourTechnology to Enhance Learning and TeachingPrefaceAcknowledgements1 An Introduction to European Integration: Definitions and Terminol-ogy2 A Brief History of European Integration3 The Decision-Making Institutions of the European Union4 The Theory of Trade and the EU5 The Economics of Integration6 The Single Market7 The Lisbon Strategy and Beyond8 Movement of Labour, Immigration and Asylum9 The Theory of Economic and Monetary Union10 The Long Road to Economic and Monetary Union11 The EU Budget12 The Common Agricultural Policy13 Fisheries Policy14 Environmental and Energy Policies15 Regional Policy16 Social and Employment Policies17 Competition and Industrial Policies18 The EU and the GATT/WTO19 EU Trade and Aid Policies20 EU Enlargement

ECONOMICS

62

THE ECONOMICS OF EUROPEAN INTEGRATION2nd EditionBy Baldwin2006 (March 2006) / 512 pagesISBN-13: 978-0-07-711119-9McGraw-Hill UK Title

CONTENTS

Preface. PART I: HISTORY, FACTS AND INSTITUTIONS. History. Facts, law, institutions and the budget decision making.

PART II: THE MICROECONOMICS OF ECONOMIC INTEGRA-TION. Essential microeconomic tools. The essential economics of preferential liberalisation. Market size and scale economies. Growth effects and capital market integration. Economic integration, labour markets and migration.

PART III: EU POLICIES. The common agricultural policy. Location effects, economic geography & regional policy. EU competition and state aids policy. EU trade policy.

PART IV: MONETARY INTEGRATION: HISTORY AND PRINCIPLES. A monetary history of Europe. The choice of an exchange rate regime. The European monetary system.

PART V: MONETARY AND FISCAL POLICY IN THE EU. Optimum currency area. The European monetary union. Fiscal policy and the stability pact. The financial markets and the Euro

Asian Economics

NEW

CHINESE ECONOMYBy Prof Cai Fang, Prof Justin Lin Yifu and Prof Cao Yong2009 (December 2008) / 880 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-123206-7 An Asian Publication

The Chinese economy is dynamic and complex. It has undergone rapid as well as radical structural changes over the past three dec-ades since economic reform begain in 1978. At the beginning of the reform, China was a closed, highly undeveloped economy, It has now become one of the most important players in the global economy in international trade, international fi nance, international environmental development, and many other areas. This book aims to study the chinese economy by looking at the nation’s market-oriented reform of economic systems and market development. One has a direct impact on the other - china’s current economic success would not have been achieved without market-oriented reform, which progressed systemati-cally and stably with the support of continous economic development. The authors systematically discuss the progress of reform, the estab-lishment of various markets and the market operation system, as well as the issues encountered in the process. With contributions from top economists in China today, The Chinese Economy is a must-read for international business investors, policy makers, researchers, and the layperson with a strong interest in understanding China’s challenging and amazing economy.

CONTENTS

1. Historical View of the Chinese Economy2. Geographic Conditions and Natural Resources3. Population and the Changing Trend of Demographic Structure4. Allocation of the Labor Force and the Development of the Labor Market5. Reform of the Banking System and the Development of the Fi-nancial Market6. Reforming and Developing the Agricultural Economy7. Reforms of the Industrial Enterprise System and the Development of the Industrial Economy8. Aggregate Economy and Macroeconomic Dynamics9. Economic Growth and Industrial Structural Change10. Divergence of Regional Economic Growth and the Policies of Regional Development11. Integration into the World Economy12. Sustainable Development and the Environmental Challenge for the Chinese Economy13. Governmental Economic Function and Fiscal Policy14. The Establishment of the Social Security System15. Concluding Remarks: Achievements and Challenges.

THE HONG KONG ECONOMYFrom Recovery to RestructureBy Kui-Wai Li2005 / 480 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-124780-1 An Asian Publication

The prolonged post-Asian Financial Crisis economic recession in Hong Kong requires a new analysis. By looking at the economic performance since the 1980s, this book focuses on analysing the macroeconomic intricacies facing the Hong Kong economy. The eco-nomic boom in the pre-Asian Financial Crisis years has also given rise to various structural imbalances that could not sustain the economy after the burst of the bubble. The large non-tradable services sector could arguably be the basis of imbalance. The short-term investment behaviour exhibited in the pre-1997 years has not fully adjusted. De-mand-driven solutions can provide short-term rescue and recovery, while economic restructuring requires supply-driven solutions. There is still room for economic expansion in Hong Kong; the focus should return to the basics of economic growth and trade rather than relying on redistributive instruments and heavy government expenditures. Economic integration with the Mainland economy produces both complements and competition; strategies adopted should enable Hong Kong investors to make use of the growing economic pie in Mainland China. By considering the various macroeconomic issues, the book provides useful analysis for readers to arrive at their own economic decisions.

CONTENTS

List of Figures List of Tables Preface1 Hong Kong’s Development and the Economism Paradigm 2 Economic Performance Patterns since the 1980s 3 Productivity, Unit Labour Cost and Competitiveness 4 Fiscal Policy: Challenge, Dilemma and Leadership 5 he Monetary and Financial Sector 6 The Real Estate Market 7 Trade and Changes in Comparative Advantage 8 Economic Integration: The Competitivity-Complementarity Model 9 Where is the Hong Kong Economy Heading?References Index

OPE

RAT

ION

S / DE

CISIO

N SC

IEN

CE

S

63

Business / Systems Dynamics .......................................................................... 65Data Mining ....................................................................................................... 82 Introductory Operations Management .............................................................. 65Logistics & Supply Chain Management (Prof Ref) .............................................84 Management Science - Text ...............................................................................69 Operation Research .......................................................................................... 83Operations Strategy........................................................................................... 74Production/Inventory Control ............................................................................. 72Project Management ..........................................................................................73 Project Management (Prof Ref) ......................................................................... 84 Purchasing and Supply Chain Management .................................................... 77Quality Control / Management ........................................................................... 75Quantitative Method - Text ................................................................................. 71Service Operations Management ...................................................................... 76 Upper Level Operations Management................................................................71

NEW TITLES

64


2010 Author ISBN-13 PageSupply Chain Logistics Management, 3e Bowersox 9780073377872 77

Supply Management, 8e Burt 9780073381459 78

Introduction to Operations Research, 9e Hillier 9780077298340 83


2009 Author ISBN-13 PageMatching Supply with Demand: An Introduction to Operations Management, 2e Cachon 9780073525167 65, 78

Operations and Supply Management, 12e Jacobs 9780077228934 66

Logistics & Supply Chain Management [UK] Jonsson 9780077117382 79

Business Modeling with Spreadsheet [Asian] Leong 9780071275965 69

Production and Operations Analysis, 6e Nahmias 9780073377858 71

Supply Chain Management [India] Rangarajan 9780070221635 80

Operations Management, 10e Stevenson 9780073377841 67

65


Business / Systems Dynamics

International Edition BUSINESS DYNAMICSSystems Thinking And Modeling For A Complex WorldBy John Sterman2000 / 768 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-238915-9 (with CD-ROM) ISBN: 978-0-07-117989-8 [IE with CD-ROM]

CONTENTS

Introduction Part I. Perspective and Process Chapter 1. Learning In and About Complex Systems Chapter 2. System Dynamics in Action Chapter 3. The Modeling Process Chapter 4. Structure and Behavior Of Dynamic Systems Part II. Tools for Systems Thinking Chapter 5. Causal Loop Diagrams Chapter 6. Stocks and Flows Chapter 7. Dynamics of Stocks and Flows Chapter 8. Closing the Loop: Dynamics of Simple Structures Part III. The Dynamics of Growth Chapter 9. S-Shaped Growth: Epidemics, Innovation Diffusion, And the Growth of New Products Chapter 10. Path Dependence and Positive Feedback Part IV. Tools For Modeling Dynamic Systems Chapter 11. Delays Chapter 12. Co-Flows and Aging Chains Chapter 13. Modeling Human Behavior: Bounded Rationality or Rational Expectations Chapter 14. Forecasts and Fudge Factors: Modeling Expectation Formation Chapter 15. Supply Chains and The Origin of Oscillations Chapter 16. Managing Supply Chains in Manufacturing Chapter 17. The Labor Supply Chain and The Origin of Business Cycles Chapter 18. The Invisible Hand Sometimes Shakes: Commodity Cycles Validation and Model Testing Appendix A: Numerical Integration Appendix B: Noise References Index

Introductory Operations Management


MATCHING SUPPLY WITH DEMANDAn Introduction to Operations Management, 2nd Edition

By Gerard Cachon and Christian Terwiesch of University of Pennsylvania


MATCHING SUPPLY WITH DEMAND by Cachon and Terwiesch is the most authoritative, cutting-edge book for operations management MBAs. The book demands rigorous analysis on the part of students without requiring consistent use of sophisticated mathematical modeling to perform it. When the use of quantitative tools or formal modeling is indicated, it is only to perform the necessary analysis needed to inform and support a practical business solution.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

New Chapter 5 (The Link Between Operations and Finance) relates operational performance to the overall financial performance of the firm. It discusses the link between process effectiveness and corporate balance sheets and income statements. This material provides a powerful motivation for the micro analysis discussed in this book—students want to know that they are studying issues of importance at all managerial levels of the firm.

New Chapter 10 is dedicated to the Toyota Production System and lean operations. It provides an expanded version of the material that was in Chapter 8 of the 1st edition. Responding to market feed-back, the authors decided that this material is sufficiently important to merit an entire chapter. However, the principles guiding the Toyota Production System are discussed in most of the other chapters as well. This chapter repeats, summarizes and reinforces these concepts to solidify a student’s understanding.

Expanded quality chapter: Chapter 9 expands upon the first edition’s quality management chapter and places an emphasis on six-sigma process improvement and robust design, hence the change in the chapter title to “Quality Management, Statistical Process Control, and Six Sigma Capacity.”

Streamlined Chapter 12, “Make-To-Order and Quick Response with Reactive Capacity” has been streamlined. The technical discus-sion on the mismatch cost formula has been placed in the appendix, making this chapter more accessible to students.

Updated examples: Examples in all chapters have been updated to improve the presentation of the material.

Additional practice problems have been added to each chapter, providing students with additional material for self-learning.

The treatment is concise and free of irrelevant detail. Students can get the essentials down, without having to read through pages of extraneous material; instructors can assign other materials, along with the text, without fear of the cost of materials to students becom-ing exorbitant.






66

CONTENTS

Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 The Process View of the Organization Chapter 3 Understanding the Supply Process: Evaluating Process Capacity Chapter 4 Estimating and Reducing Labor Costs Chapter 5 The Link between Operations and Finance Chapter 6 Batching and Other Flow Interruptions: Set-up Times and the Economic Order Quantity Model Chapter 7 Variability and Its Impact on Process Performance: Waiting Time Problems Chapter 8 The Impact of Variability on Process Performance: Throughput Losses Chapter 9 Quality Management, Statistical Process Control, and Six Sigma Capacity Chapter 10 Lean Operations and the Toyota Production System Chapter 11 Betting On Uncertain Demand: The Newsvendor Model Chapter 12 Make-To-Order and Quick Response with Reactive Capacity Chapter 13 Service Levels and Lead Times in Supply Chains: The Order Up-to Inventory Model Chapter 14 Risk Pooling Strategies to Reduce and Hedge Uncer-tainty Chapter 15 Revenue Management with Capacity Controls Chapter 16 Supply Chain CoordinationAppendix A: Statistics Tutorial B: Tables C: Evaluation of the Loss Function D: Equations and Approximations E: Solutions to Selected Practice ProblemsGlossary References Index of “How to” exhibits Summary of key equations Index


OPERATIONS AND SUPPLY MANAGEMENT12th Edition

By Robert Jacobs, Indiana University-Bloom-ington, Richard Chase, University of Southern California and Nicholas Aquilano, University of Arizona

2009 (February 2008) / 832 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-722893-4 (with Student DVD)ISBN: 978-0-07-128418-9 [IE with Student DVD]

http://www.mhhe.com/jacobs12e

Operations and Supply Management, as the title indicates, provides increased emphasis on supply chain management in the 12e. The 12e continues its market leading up-to-date coverage of service op-erations as well. The text includes solved examples and problems, enough cases for MBA courses to use without supplementing, and the industry leading technology support suite.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

Comprehensive coverage of Operations and Supply Manage-ment, including both services and manufacturing.

Up –to date content including: New personal stories of Execu-tives such as Tim Cook COO at Apple, Vignettes on current success story companies such as Timbuk2, IKEA, Toyota etc.The latest in Services including considering service supply chains as bi-direc-tional and managing customer caused variability, new retail layout approaches such as at Apple stores etc. Updated coverage on SAP-ERP and ISO 9000-14000, Updated Excel 2007 spreadsheets in the text and on DVD in the text.

New Framework graphics and descriptions. There are 3 new frameworks included which extend the general idea of the Hay-esWheelwright Product-Process Matrix to illustrate other tradeoff decision areas including- the service system design, sourcing and purchasing, logistics/transportation choices, and inventory control system design.

Six New cases and over 60 new problems are included along with new examples, boxed articles and chapter opening vignettes, and photos.

The Student DVD included in the text includes brand new vid-eos on Zappos-an e-tailor of shoes whose operations support their ‘powered by service’ mission, Burton Snowboards-product design and plant tour, and Xerox and their recycling-remanufacturing process.

Screencam Tutorials covering the use of Excel, excel templates, and problem solving in general have been expanded on the Student DVD to 16 total.

New text design and look and feel.

New McGrawHill HomeworkManager and HomeworkManager-Plus available with 12e.

CONTENTS

Section One – Strategy 1. Introduction to the Field 2. Operations and Supply Strategy 2A – Product Mix Problem/Linear Programming 3. Project Management 4. Product and Service Design Section Two – Processes 5. Strategic Capacity Management 5A--Learning Curves 6. Process Analysis 6A – Job Design and Work Measurement 7. Manufacturing Processes 7A – Manufacturing Process Design 8. Service Processes 8A--Waiting Line Analysis 9. Six-Sigma Quality 9A--Process Capability and SPC Section Three – Supply Chains 10. Strategic Sourcing 10A--Facility Location Analysis)11. Logistics 11A – Supply Chain Network Analysis 12. Lean Manufacturing Section Four –Enterprise Resource Planning Systems 13. Demand Management 14. Sales and Operations Planning 15. Inventory Control 16. Material Requirements Planning 17. Scheduling 17A – Simulation 18. Constraint Management Supplements A. Financial Analysis B. Operations TechnologyAppendices A. Answers to Selected Problems B. Learning Curve Tables C. Present Value Table D. Negative Exponential Distribution: Values of E. Areas of the Cumulative Standard Normal Distribution

67



OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT10th EditionBy William J Stevenson, Rochester Institute of Technology2009 (October 2008) / 944 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337784-1ISBN: 978-0-07-728409-1 (with Student DVD Package)ISBN: 978-0-07-009177-1 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/stevenson10e

The Tenth Edition of Operations Management features the latest con-cepts and applications while preserving the core concepts that have made the text a market leader. Stevenson’s careful explanations and approachable format supports students in understanding the impor-tant operations management concepts as well as applying tools and methods. By providing detailed examples, solved problems, questions, and cases students learn by doing, and the Tenth Edition continues to offer more support for ‘doing Operations’ than any other.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

Up-to-date revisions incorporate the latest concepts and ap-plications while not losing focus on the core concepts of Operations Management. New readings are included that focus on innovations and the latest ideas in operations management along with four new cases.

New content and more emphasis on Supply chain management, Matching supply or capacity with demand, Dealing with variation, Sustainability Process management.

Deep-rooted understanding of OM is achieved. While some titles may overemphasize the latest hot buzzword, Stevenson integrates new ideas carefully and appropriately so that students have a long lasting understanding of the important operations management considerations to carry forward in the rest of their studies and in their careers.

The importance of Supply Chain Management to Operations highlighted by an icon in the text.

Test Bank questions have been tagged with Bloom’s Taxonomy and AASCB standards making it easier to tie assessment to student learning outcomes.

CONTENTS

1 Introduction to Operations Management 2 Competitiveness, Strategy, and Productivity 3 Forecasting 4 Product and Service Design4S Supplement: Reliability5 Strategic Capacity Planning for Products and Services5S Supplement: Decision Theory6 Process Selection and Facilities Layout6S Linear Programming7 Design of Work Systems7S Learning Curves8 Location Planning and Analysis8S The Transportation Model9 Management of Quality 10 Quality Control10S Acceptance Sampling11 Supply Chain Management 12 Inventory Management 13 Aggregate Planning 14 MRP and ERP 15 Lean Operations15S Supplement: Maintenance16 Scheduling

17 Project Management 18 Management of Waiting Lines

International Edition OPERATIONS NOWSupply Chain Profi tability and Performance with Student DVD, 3rd EditionBy Byron Finch, Miami University—Oxford2008 (November 2006) ISBN: 978-0-07-329705-7 (Out of Print)ISBN: 978-0-07-128572-8 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/opsnow3e

Operations Now introduces the operations function from a vantage point that encompasses both the entire organization and the broader supply network. The author begins his discussion of operations man-agement by fi rst establishing the goal to which any high quality opera-tion must aspire: the goal of profi tability. Operations Now presents operations within a context that acknowledges its interactions both within and without all functional areas of an organization, including the links throughout the supply chain. Thus, students not majoring in operations management immediately understand why they are studying a subject that had heretofore seemed to them irrelevant; operations majors receive valuable instruction in how their chosen fi eld affects and facilitates other functional areas within the enterprise and aligns with the overall goals of the organization.

CONTENTS

UNIT ONE: FOUNDATIONS FOR SUCCESS Chapter 1: Introduction Chapter 2: Profitability: Business Success from Operations’ Suc-cess Chapter 3: Strategy and Value: Competing through Effective Opera-tions and Supply Chain Management Chapter 4: Processes: Products and Services to Match Customer Needs UNIT TWO: COMPONENTS OF VALUES Chapter 5: Cost: The Price of Value Creation Chapter 6: Quality: Frameworks for Product and Service Improve-ment Chapter 7: Quality Tools: From Process Performance to Process Perfection Chapter 8: Timeliness: Scheduling and Project Management UNIT THREE: MANAGING RESOURCES TO CREATE VALUE Chapter 9: Supply Chain Management: Managing Business to Busi-ness Interaction Chapter10: Demand Forecasting: Building the Foundation for Re-source Planning Chapter 11: Inventory: Managing to Meet Demand Chapter 12: Logistics: Positioning Goods in the Supply Chain Chapter 13: Lean Systems: Eliminating Waste through the Supply Chain Chapter 14: Capacity: Matching Productive Resources to Demand Chapter 15: Constraint Management: Simplifying Complex Systems Chapter 16: Facilities: Making Location and Layout Decisions Chapter 17: Workforce: Optimizing Human Capital


68

International Edition OPERATIONS AND SUPPLY MANAGEMENT By Robert Jacobs, Indiana University-Bloomington and Richard Chase, University of Southern California2008 (November 2006) ISBN: 978-0-07-329473-5 (with Student DVD)ISBN: 978-0-07-126188-3 [IE with Student DVD]

http://www.mhhe.com/jacob1e

Jacobs and Chase continue to lead the fi eld of Operations Manage-ment with cutting edge up-to- date content, technology, and motiva-tion. Now, in this First Edition Jacobs and Chase focus on the core concepts of operations and supply management. This condensed text was constructed with the four essential core areas of process, quality, inventory, and supply chain management in mind, as decided by a panel of OM instructor’s at the Decision Science Institute meeting, and after conducting a survey of content coverage in representative universities. The new Core text provides increased emphasis on supply management concepts along with a focused presentation of the core OM concepts.

CONTENTS

Section I – Strategy Chapter 1: Operations and Supply Strategy Chapter 2: Project Management Section II – Processes Chapter 3: Strategic Capacity Management Chapter 4: Manufacturing Processes Chapter 5: Service Processes Chapter 6: Six-Sigma Quality Section III – Supply Chain Chapter 7: Strategic Sourcing Chapter 8: Logistics Chapter 9: Lean Manufacturing Section IV – Inventory Chapter 10: Forecasting Chapter 11: Aggregate Sales and Operations Planning Chapter 12: Inventory Management Chapter 13: Material Requirements Planning Appendix A – Answers to Select Problems Appendix B – Learning Curve Tables B.1 – Table of Unit Values B.2 – Table of Cumulative Values Appendix C – Present Value Table Appendix D – Negative Exponential Distribution: Values of ¿-x Appendix E – Areas of the Cumulative Standard Normal Distribu-tion

International Edition OPERATIONS MANAGEMENTContemporary Concepts and Cases, 4th EditionBy Roger Schroeder, University of Minnesota-Minneapolis2008 (November 2007) / 544 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337786-5 ISBN: 978-0-07-126386-3 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/schroeder4e

Operations Management: Contemporary Concepts and Cases, is an ideal book for the instructor seeking a short text with cases. This book employs a cross-functional perspective, appealing to non-majors and practical for use in an MBA level course in operations management. The size and price of the book also make the text attractive for the cross-functional curriculum where students are required to purchase more than one text. The cases offer variety in length and rigor; and several are from Harvard and Darden. This mix makes the book ap-propriate for both undergraduates and MBA students.

CONTENTS

Part I: Introduction1. The Operations Function 2. Operations and Supply Chain Strategy 3. Product DesignPart II: Process Design4. Process Selection 5. Service Process Design 6. Choice of Technology 7. Process-Flow AnalysisPart III: Quality8. Managing Quality 9. Quality Control and ImprovementPart IV: Capacity and Scheduling10. Supply Chain Management 11. Forecasting 12. Facilities and Aggregate Planning 13. Scheduling Operations 14. Project SchedulingPart V: Inventory15. Inventory 16. Materials Requirement Planning 17. JIT and Lean ThinkingCases

International Edition INTERACTIVE MODELS FOR OPERATIONS AND SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT WITH CDBy Byron Finch, Miami University of OH-Oxford2007 (November 2005) ISBN: 978-0-07-285710-8 ISBN: 978-0-07-298274-9 (with CD)ISBN: 978-0-07-110841-6 [IE with CD]

This First Edition provides interactivity to students by use of state-of-the-art java applets. Students are shown concepts depicted graphically and are able to manipulate those graphics to simulate real world actions. Therefore, students learn comprehensively as they participate with the text and supporting technology. Written by a leader in this course, the concise and affordable paperback can be used harmoniously with additional teaching materials. The book adopts a modeling approach for dealing with a variety of common problems in designing and improving operations. Students will obtain “hands on” experience in developing effi cient and cost effective solu-tions to such problems.

CONTENTS

Unit 1: Demand Forecasting: The Time Series Components Model / The Simple Exponential Smoothing Model / The Trend Enhanced Exponential Smoothing Model / The Linear Trend Equation Model / The Simple Linear Regression Model Unit 2: Financial Decision Making: The Breakeven Model / The Variance Analysis Model Unit 3: Capacity Management: The Learning Curve Model / The Overbooking Model / The Aggregate Planning Model Unit 4: Quality Management: The X-bar and R-chart Model Unit 5: Inventory Management and Scheduling: The Economic Order Point Model / The Economic Order Point with Quantity Dis-counts Model / The Reorder Point Model / The Material Requirements Planning Model / The Risk Pooling Model / The Bullwhip Effect Model / The Sequencing Rules Model Unit 6: Facility Decisions Models: The Process-Oriented Layout Model / The Center of Gravity Model Unit 7: Process Simulation Models: The Waiting Line Simulation Model / The Production Line Simulation Model / The Kanban Simula-tion Model / The Constraint Management Simulation Model

69


International Edition OPERATIONS MANAGEMENTIntegrating Manufacturing and Services, 5th EditionBy Mark Davis, Bentley College and Janelle Heineke2005 / 768 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-299435-3 (with Student CD and PowerWeb) - Out of PrintISBN: 978-0-07-111724-1 [IE with CD and Powerweb]

http://www.mhhe.com/davis5e

CONTENTS

PART I Operations Management in Today’s Business Environ-ment 1 Introduction to Operations Management 2 Operations Strategy: Defining How Firms Compete S2 Financial Analysis in Operations Management 3 The Role of Technology in Operations 4 Supply Chain Management 5 Integrating Manufacturing and Service PART II Process Decisions 6 New Product and Service Development, and Process Selection7 Project Management 8 Process Measurement and Analysis S8 Job Design and Work Performance Measurement 9 Quality Management S9 Quality Tools for Improving Processes 10 Lean Production PART III Facility Decisions 11 Facility Location and Capacity 12 Facility Layouts S12 Forecasting PART IV Aggregate Planning and Inventory Decisions 13 Aggregate Planning 14 Inventory Systems for Independent Demand 15 Inventory Systems for Dependent Demand PART V Daily Operational Decisions 16 Waiting Line Management S16 Waiting Line Theory 17 Scheduling

International Edition OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT7th EditionBy Edward M Knod, Western Illinois University and Richard Schonberg-er, University of Washington 2001 / 672 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-246050-6 (with CD, Mandatory Package) - Out of PrintISBN: 978-0-07-120216-9 [IE with CD]

www.mhhe.com/pom

CONTENTS

Chapter 1: Operations Management: Introductory Concepts Chapter 2: OM Strategy: Dynamic Competitiveness Chapter 3: Principles of Operations Management Chapter 4: Demand Management and Forecasting Supplement: Least Squares Trend and Correlation Coefficients Chapter 5: Capacity Planning and Master Scheduling Supplement: Aggregate capacity Planning with Excel? Chapter 6: Order Fulfillment and Purchasing Chapter 7: Designing for Customers’ Needs Chapter 8: The Quality Imperative Supplement: Quality Pioneers of the Twentieth Century Chapter 9: Process Control and Improvement Chapter 10: Flow-Control: Eliminating Process Wastes Chapter 11: Timing-Another Imperative

Chapter 12: Human Resources in OM Supplement: Four methods of developing Time Standards Chapter 13: Managing Materials: Timing and Quantities Supplement: Economic Order Quantity: Theory and Derivations Chapter 14: Facilities Management Chapter 15: Managing Continuous and Repetitive Operations Chapter 16: Managing Job and Batch Operations Chapter 17: Managing Projects

Management Science - Text

NEW

BUSINESS MODELING WITH SPREADSHEET

By Thin-Yin Leong and Michelle Cheong

2009 (August 2008) / 200 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-127596-5An Asian Publication

The true potential of spreadsheet software lies in their application in what is now referred to as exploratory modeling, which enables business and fi nancial analysts to work on the fl y on unstructured problems. Business Modeling with Spreadsheets offers a rich set of business contexts that make learning about spreadsheets interest-ing and the skills acquired more effective and enduring. Unlike the existing titles in the market, this book is wholly dedicated to the art of exploratory spreadsheet modeling. Practice problems that read-ers encounter on a day-to-day basis are presented, with the aim of helping them to derive generally applicable principles and to link principle to practice. Undergraduates and professionals whose work involves managing fi nance, accounts, and operations will fi nd this book a refreshing learning guide and reference resource. Although Excel 2003 is the main spreadsheet software covered in this book, it also includes useful comments to guide users of Excel 2007 and StarOffi ce8 Calc.

CONTENTS

Chapter 1: Spreadsheet ModelingChapter 2: Problem Solving and Spreadsheet EngineeringChapter 3: Data Lookup and LinkupChapter 4: Functional RelationshipsChapter 5: Making AssumptionsChapter 6: Risks and UncertaintiesChapter 7: Processes and TimeChapter 8: Analyzing the DataAppendix A: Excel Features and FunctionsAppendix B: Visual Basic for ApplicationIndex


70

International Edition INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT SCIENCEA Modeling and Case Studies Approach with Spreadsheets, 3rd EditionBy Frederick Hillier, Stanford University and Mark Hillier, University of Washington2008 (March 2007) / 672 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-312903-7 ISBN: 978-0-07-333797-5 (with Student CD)ISBN: 978-0-07-125927-9 [IE with Student CD and Passcode Card)

http://www.mhhe.com/hillier3e

Introduction to Management Science, 3e, offers a unique model approach and integrates the use of Excel. Through this approach students are better able to grasp the essential concepts covered in the course and see their utility. Each chapter includes a case study that is meant to show the students a real and interesting application of the topics addressed in that chapter. These cases and related applications cuts across all functional areas of business and show how manage-ment science techniques apply in the business environment.

CONTENTS

Chapter 1: Introduction Chapter 2: Linear Programming: Basic Concepts Chapter 3: Linear Programming: Formulation and Applications Chapter 4: The Art of Modeling with Spreadsheets Chapter 5: What-If Analysis for Linear Programming Chapter 6: Network Optimization Problems Chapter 7: Using Binary Integer Programming to Deal with Yes-or-No Decisions Chapter 8: Nonlinear Programming Chapter 9: Decision Analysis Chapter 10: Forecasting Chapter 11: Queueing Models Chapter 12: Computer Simulation: Basic Concepts Chapter 13: Computer Simulation with Crystal Ball

International Edition SPREADSHEET MODELING FOR BUSINESS DECISIONS By John Kros, East Carolina University2008 (January 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-331792-2 (with Student CD-ROM & Crystal Ball Access Passcode Card)ISBN: 978-0-07-721279-7 (with Student CD, at Risk & Crystal Ball Access Cards)ISBN: 978-0-07-128654-1 [IE with Crystal Ball Access Card and Student CD]

http://www.mhhe.com/kros1e

Spreadsheet Modeling for Business Decisions focuses on fi ve fun-damental topics of business decision modeling; emphasizing the ef-fective communication of results to the appropriate business decision maker. The topics include spreadsheet modeling, data management and modeling, simulation and linear regression modeling, and decision making under uncertainty. The text strives to educate managers in the process of becoming more effective and effi cient problem solvers by providing the most important and useful topics within business decision models while at the same time preparing students to apply those topics to real-world problems, to integrate the use of common software packages into their analysis and solutions, and to prepare written and verbal conclusions from that analysis.

CONTENTS

Preface Chapter 1 The Art and Science of Becoming a More Effective and Efficient Problem Solver Chapter 2 Introduction to Spreadsheet Modeling Chapter 3 Probability and Statistics—A Foundation for Becoming a More Effective and Efficient Problem Solver Chapter 4 Decision Analysis: Building the Structure for Solving the Problem Chapter 5 Simulation Modeling Chapter 6 Linear Regression ModelingChapter 7 Introduction to Forecasting Chapter 8 Introduction to Optimization Models Chapter 9 Project Management: PERT/CPM Chapter 10 Introduction to Visual Basic ProgrammingAppendix A Useful Information

International Edition INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT SCIENCE By William D Stevenson, North Carolina State University and Ceyhun Ozgur, Valparaiso University2007 (February 2006) / 672 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-325290-2 (with Spreadsheets and Student CD)ISBN: 978-0-07-125773-2 [IE with Student CD and Spreadsheet]ISBN: 978-0-07-325336-7 (Instructor’s Edition with Student CD t/a Text)

http://www.mhhe.com/stevensonozgur1e

This text combines the market leading writing and presentation skills of Bill Stevenson with integrated, thorough, Excel modeling from Ceyhun Ozgur. Professor Ozgur teaches Management Science, Operations, and Statistics using Excel, at the undergrad and MBA levels at Val-paraiso University--and Ozgur developed and tested all examples, problems and cases with his students. The authors have written this text for students who have no signifi cant mathematics training and only the most elementary experience with Excel.

CONTENTS

Part 1 Introduction and Forecasting. 1-Introduction to Management Science, Modeling, and Excel Spread-sheets. 2- Forecasting. Part 2 Deterministic Decision Models. 3-Linear Programming: Basic Concepts and Graphical Solutions. 4-Linear Programming: Applications and Solutions. 5- Linear Programming: Sensitivity Analysis, Duality, and Special-ized Models. 6- Transportation, Assignment, and Transshipment Problems. 7- Integer Programming. 8- Network Optimization Models. 9- Nonlinear Optimization Models. 10- Multi-Criteria Models. Part 3 Probabilistic Decision Models. 11- Decision Theory. 2- Markov Analysis. 13- Waiting Line Models. 14- Simulation. CDRom Modules. Chapter 4S Simplex Algorithm. Chapter 6S Transportation and Assignment Solution. Procedures. Chapter 7S Branch and Bound Method for Integer. Programming Problems. Chapter 9S Mini –Review: Differential Arithmetic

71


QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES IN MANAGEMENT3rd EditionBy N D Vohra, Ramjas College of University of Delhi2006 (June 2006) / 976 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-061193-1 McGraw-Hill India Title

http://www.mhhe.com/vohra3e

CONTENTS

1. Introduction 2. Linear Programming I: Formulation and Graphic Solution 3. Linear Programming II: The Simplex Method 4. Linear Programming III: Duality and Sensitivity Analysis 5. Specially Structured Linear Programs I Transportation and Transshipment Problems 6. Specially Structured Linear Programs II Assignment Problem 7. Extensions of Linear Programming 8. Sequencing 9. Inventory Management 10. Queuing Theory 11. Replacement Theory 12. PERT and CPM 13. Decision Theory 14. Markov Analysis 15. Theory of Games 16. Dynamic Programming 17. Simulation 18. Investment Analysis and Break-even Analysis 19. ForecastingAppendices

Quantitative Method - Text

QUANTITATIVE METHODS FOR BUSINESS 2nd EditionBy Frank Dewhurst2006 (April 2006) / 608 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-710902-8 McGraw-Hill UK Title

http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/dewhurst

CONTENTS

Brief TOC. Detailed TOC. Contents of CD-ROM. Preface. Acknowl-edgements. Guided Tour. Part A The foundations of Quantitative Methods. 1. An introduction to Quantitative Methods. 2. From numbers to symbols. 3. Matrices and matrix algebra. 4. Elementary Statistics. 5. Summary Statistics. Part A: Closing comments. Part A: Mini cases. Part B Models and analysis for business and management. 6. Probability and Statistical models. 7. An introduction to inferential statistics. 8. Modelling relationships.

9. Non-linear and multivariate relationships. 10. Analysing models. 11. An introduction to Time-Series. 12. Models for finance and accounting. Part B: Closing comments. Part B: Mini cases. Part C Modelling and analysing decisions. 13. An introduction to Decision Analysis. 14. An introduction to linear programming. 15. An introduction to network models. 16. An introduction to non-linear decision models. Appendices. Solutions

Upper Level Operations Management


PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS ANALYSIS6th Edition

By Steven Nahmias, Santa Clara University

2009 (March 2008) / 736 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337785-8 ISBN: 978-0-07-126370-2 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/nahmias6e

Production and Operations Analysis, 6/e by Steven Nahmias provides a survey of the analytical methods used to support the functions of production and operations management. This latest edition maintains the focus on continual process improvement while enhancing the tech-nical content of the book. Both analytical methods centered on factory and service processes, as well as process issues across the supply chain, are included. As always, the text presents the most cutting-edge quantitative models used in operations in a clear, accessible manner. While the familiar structure and organization of the text remains the same as previous editions, the current edition includes several new topics aimed at enhancing the technical content of the book.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

The inclusion of a sizeable section on Box-Jenkins forecasting models in Chapter 2. The Box-Jenkins methodology has proved itself to be a valuable forecasting tool in the right setting. This self contained discussion likely appeals to engineering students and advanced business students.

A new section has been added on Robin Roundy’s power-of two-policies in Chapter 4. Students are able to get a sense of why these policies are able to provide such effective approximations without getting into the details of the more advanced analysis.

New problems and “Snapshot Applications” have been added in the early chapters.


72

CONTENTS

Chapter 1 Strategy and Competition Chapter 2 Forecasting Chapter 3 Aggregate PlanningSupplement 1 Linear ProgrammingChapter 4 Inventory Control Subject to Known Demand Chapter 5 Inventory Control Subject to Uncertain Demand Chapter 6 Supply Chain Management Chapter 7 Push and Pull Production Control Systems: MRP and JIT Chapter 8 Operations SchedulingSupplement 2 Queuing TheoryChapter 9 Project Scheduling Chapter 10 Facilities Layout and Location Chapter 11 Quality and Assurance Chapter 12 Reliability and MaintainabilityAppendix Tables Index

International Edition FACTORY PHYSICS3rd Edition By Wallace Hopp, Northwestern University and Mark Spearman, Facotyr Pysics, Inc2008 (October 2007) / 752 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-282403-2 ISBN: 978-0-07-123246-3 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/pom

After a brief introductory chapter, Factory Physics 3/e is divided into three parts: I – The Lessons of History; II – Factory Physics; and III – Principles in Practice. The scientifi c approach to manufacturing and supply chain management, developed in Part II, is unique to this text. No other text or professional book provides a rigorous, principles-based foundation for manufacturing management. The Third Edition offers tighter connections between Lean Manufacturing, MRP/ERP, Six Sigma, Supply Chain Management, and Factory Physics. In addition to enhancing the historical overview of how these systems evolved, the authors show explicitly how users can achieve Lean Manufacturing objectives (faster response, less inventory) using the integration aspects of MRP/ERP/SCM systems along with the vari-ance analysis methods of Six Sigma. Factory Physics provides the overarching framework that coordinates all of these initiatives into a single-focused strategy.

CONTENTS

PART I: THE LESSONS OF HISTORYChapter 1: Manufacturing in America Chapter 2: Inventory Control: From EOQ to RDP Chapter 3: The MRP Crusade Chapter 4: The JIT Revolution Chapter 5: What Went WrongPART II: FACTORY PHYSICSChapter 6: A Science of Manufacturing Chapter 7: Basic Factory Dynamics Chapter 8: Variability Basics Chapter 9: The Corrupting Influence of Variability Chapter 10: Push and Pull Production Systems Chapter 11: The Human Element in Operations Management Chapter 12: Total Quality ManufacturingPART III: PRINCIPLES IN PRACTICEChapter 13: A Pull Planning Framework Chapter 14: Shop Floor Control Chapter 15: Production Scheduling Chapter 16: Aggregate and Workforce Planning Chapter 17: Supply Chain Management Chapter 18: Capacity Management Chapter 19: Synthesis-Pulling It All Together

Production/Inventory Control

International Edition MANUFACTURING PLANNING AND CONTROL SYSTEMS5th EditionBy Thomas Vollmann, William Lee Berry, Ohio State University Colum-bus, David Clay Whybark, University of North Carolina2005 / 736 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-229990-8 ISBN: 978-0-07-112133-0 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/vollmann5

CONTENTS

1- Integration and Supply Chains 2- Demand Management 3-Sales and Operations Planning 4- ERP-Integrated Systems 5-Basic Inventory Concepts 6-Master Production Scheduling 7-MRP (Materials Requirements Planning) 8-JIT 9-Capacity Planning 10-Production Activity Control 11-Supply Chain 12- Implementation 13- MPC Systems and Strategy 14- Advanced MRP 15-Advanced JIT 16- Advanced Scheduling Systems 17-Advanced Concepts in Sales and Operations Planning 18-Frontiers





73


Project Management

PROJECT MANAGEMENTThe Managerial Process, 4th EditionBy Clifford Gray and Erik Larson of Oregon State University2008 (June 2007) / 576 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-352515-0 ISBN: 978-0-07-334817-9 (with MS Project CD and Student CD)ISBN: 978-0-07-126626-0 [IE with MS Project CD and Student CD]

http://www.mhhe.com/graylarson4e

As the market-leading textbook on the subject, Project Management: The Managerial Process, 4e is distinguished by its balanced treatment of both the technical and behavioral issues in project management as well as by its coverage of a broad range of industries to which project management principles can be applied. It focuses on how project management is integral to the organization as a whole. The 4th edition refl ects the latest changes found in the practice. Other texts discuss the topics covered in this text but they do not view oversight as the project manager’s operating environment, as does Gray/Larson.

CONTENTS

Chapter 1: Modern Project Management Chapter 2: Organization Strategy and Project Selection Chapter 3: Organization: Structure and Culture Chapter 4: Defining the Project Chapter 5: Estimating Project Times and Costs Chapter 6: Developing a Project Plan Chapter 7: Managing Risk Chapter 8: Scheduling Resources and Costs Chapter 9: Reducing Project Duration Chapter 10: Leadership: Being an Effective Project Manager Chapter 11: Managing Project Teams Chapter 12: Outsourcing: Managing Interorganizational Relations Chapter 13: Progress and Performance Measurement and Evalu-ation Chapter 14: Project Audit and Closure Chapter 15: International Projects Chapter 16: Oversight Appendix 1: SimProject Case Appendix 2: Computer Project Exercises

International Edition SIMPROJECT VERSION 2.0 PASSCODE (STANDALONE) WITH MS PROJECT 20074th EditionBy Jeffrey K Pinto and Diane H Parente2008 (August 2007)ISBN: 978-0-07-721098-4 ISBN: 978-0-07-127539-2 [IE]

SimProject is a web-based project management simulation that pro-vides virtual experience in managing projects. First-hand experience as a successful project manager is gained through the use of multiple scenarios, competitive and collaborative project teams. SimProject comes with a 60-day Microsoft Project trial for each student. The Player’s Manual is downloaded from the SimProject website once a student registers.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

The MS Project 2007 trial time was cut to sixty days from prior versions (Microsoft’s condition for all publishers packaging the 2007

trial software with a book). Options for instructors who want a longer trial version of Microsoft Project 2007 follow: 1. Instructors and students may download a free 180-day trial of Mi-crosoft Professional 2007. MS Professional has the same capabilities as MS Project. Here’s a direct link to the download: h t t p : / / w w w . m i c r o s o f t . c o m / d o w n l o a d s / d e t a i l s .aspx?FamilyID=8e6c9977-69af-4cbc-8f39-d0111088ed48&DisplayLang=en This information, including the link, is being added to the Gray/Larson 4e OLC, and to the SimProject homepage and interior pages. 2. Membership to the MSDN Academic Alliance. An annual electronic membership costs $499 and gives students, faculty, and computer labs access to the complete suite of Microsoft developer tools, servers, and operating systems for instructional use. This includes Microsoft Project 2007. Membership enables students and faculty to install all software on their personal PCs. Visit www.msdnaa.net for more information or to purchase membership.

FEATURES

Computer simulations sharpen skills required for project manag-ers and team members in business: team development, collaboration, global thinking, predilection to consider the ramifications of decisions and their effect on the bottom line

SimProject teaches students to manage a project from initiation to completion. Within this framework, the student employs and develops skills pertinent to: personnel selection and training; team and personal motivation; conflict management; and stakeholder management.

Students will be required to use planning and scheduling techniques such as: work breakdown structures, PERT/CPM, and development risk analysis.

The topical coverage correlates with the Project Management Institute’s Body of Knowledge (PMBOK), insuring that the students gain exposure to those topics recognized by the key professional organization for project manager.

International Edition MANAGING PROJECT AND SERVICE DEVELOPMENTText and CasesBy Stefan H Thomke, Harvard Business School2007 (January 2006) / 448 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-302301-4 (Out of Print)ISBN: 978-0-07-110755-6 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/thomke

This text offers a new option for instructors interested in emphasiz-ing a balance between products and services. Managing Product and Service Development is about the managerial aspects critical to conceiving, designing, and developing innovative products and serv-ices. The course exposes students to some of the best management practices, tools, and frameworks known today, and introduces new approaches that hold promise for the future. Many texts are either aimed at engineering or marketing specialists and do not adequately address the often diffi cult general management issues that arise in complex development project. This book does not require training or experience in a technical fi eld but addresses the role of new tech-nologies in product development. In this text students learn about innovation through exploration. All the material has been developed and tested in the MBA and executive education classroom at Harvard Business School. The Instructor’s Manual (IM), as only part of this text’s proven teaching materials, describes an optional student project that complements in-class sessions.


74

CONTENTS

Introduction. Module One: Building Capabilities for Experimentation, Learning and Prototyping. Module Overview. Case: The Final Voyage of the Challenger. Case: Apple Powerbook: Design Quality and Time to Market. Case: IDEO Product Development. Case: Bank of America. Article: R&D Comes to Services: Bank of America’s Pathbreaking Experiments. Case: Team New Zealand. Article: Enlightened Experimentation: The New Imperative for Innovation. Case: Eli Lilly & Company: Drug Develop-ment Strategy. Module Two: Development Process Design and Improvement.Module Overview. Case: Innovation at 3M. Article: Creating Break-throughs at 3M Note: Understanding User Needs. Case: Product Development at Dell Computer Corporation. Article: Agile Product Development: Managing Flexibility in Uncertain Environments. Case: Developing Products on Internet Time: A Process Design Exercise. Article: Developing Products on Internet Time. Case: BMW AG: The Digital Car Project. Article: The Effect of ‘Front-Loading’ Problem-Solv-ing on Product Development Performance. Case: Bush Boake Allen. Article: Customers as Innovators: A New Way to Create Value. Module Three: Managing Development Networks. Module Overview. Case: Microsoft Office: Finding the Suite Spot. Note: Learning from Projects: Note on Conducting a Postmortem Analysis. Case: We’ve Got Rhythm! Medtronic Corporation’s Cardiac Pacemaker Business. Article: Creating Project Plans to Focus Product Development. Case: Siemens AG: Global Development Strategy. Article: Building Effective R&D Capabilities Abroad. Case: Project Dreamcast: Serious Play at Sega Enterprises Ltd. Article: Increasing Returns and the New World of Business. Case: Millennium Pharma-ceuticals, Inc. Article: Mastering the Value Chain: An Interview with Mark Levin of Millennium Pharmaceuticals

International Edition INTRODUCTION TO INFORMATION SYSTEMS PROJECT MANAGEMENTA Systems Approach, 2nd EditionBy David L. Olson, University of Nebraska - Lincoln2004 / 352 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-287270-5 (with Student CD) - Out of PrintISBN: 978-0-07-123261-6 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/olson2e

CONTENTS

1. Introduction to Project Management 2. Human Aspects of Information Systems Project Management 3. Project Organization 4. Project Selection and Approval 5. Requirements Definition 6. System Development 7. Estimation 8. Quantitative Project Scheduling Methods 9. Probabilistic Scheduling Models 10. Project Implementation 11. Project Control and Assessment Appendix (Microsoft Project) PMBOK Cross References

Operations Strategy

International Edition OPERATIONS STRATEGYCompetiting in the 21st CenturyBy Sara Beckman, University of California-Berkeley and Donald Barry Rosenfi eld, Massachusetts Institute of Technology2008 (May 2007) / 480 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-250078-3 ISBN: 978-0-07-127408-1 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/beckman08

Operations Strategy: Competing in the 21st Century addresses the basic decisions leaders of operations must address: vertical integra-tion, capacity, facilities, process technology, information technology, sourcing, business process management, capabilities development and supply chain integration. In doing so, the book integrates strategic considerations with analytical models, thereby providing a comprehen-sive view of these critical decisions and the tools used to help make them. The themes and conclusions offered by the authors are based on recent research, particularly from the Leaders for Manufacturing program at MIT. Students and instructors can be sure that they are receiving the most up-to-date examples of companies engaged in making these decisions.

CONTENTS

Chapter 1: Business Strategy Context for Operations Strategy Chapter 2: Vertical Integration Chapter 3: Process Technology Chapter 4: Capacity Strategy Chapter 5: Facilities Strategy and Globalization Chapter 6: Sourcing Chapter 7: Business Process Focused Strategies and Organizational Design Chapter 8: Coordinating the Supply Chain Chapter 9: Information Technology Chapter 10: Cross-Cutting Capabilities--Lean Operations, Quality, and Flexibility Chapter 11: Strategy Development and Practice

MAKE OR BREAKHow Manufacturers Can Leap from Decline to RevitalizationBy Kaj Grichnik and Conrad Winkler of Booz Allen Hamilton2008 (March 2008) / 192 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-150830-8A Professional Reference Title

In a world of emerging markets, changing work forces, and ac-celerating innovation, manufacturing is once again a key corporate issue. Manufacturing expertise is a strategic competitive advantage, distinguishing winning companies (like Procter & Gamble, Lego, Toyota, Zara, and Tata) from those that have let their capabilities languish. It may not be easy to take back control of production, target sources for scarce (and environmentally sustainable) materials, and cultivate a motivated, talented labor force. But there are ways to do it; and successful companies will need to learn how. The thought leaders at Booz & Company and strategy+business magazine have collaborated to create an up-to-the-minute exploration of a new era in manufacturing and the requisite strategies for success. Chock full of profi les of the best manufacturing innovations in every business sector from pharmaceuticals to autos to consumer products, and re-vealing the most effective manufacturing innovations and strategies, Make or Break introduces you to the forces reshaping the industry.

75


The secrets are in this book, including how to meet such interrelated challenges as:

Labor relationships and modernization

Material shortages

Career development of your workforce

Expansion of variety

Competition on a global scale

Complexity solution

Environmental issues

Integration of resilience into your strategy

Based on leading-edge research, Make or Break is a book for leaders of the manufacturing function, but it is also for any corporate executive who wants to lead his or her industry-and for students and research-ers seeking to understand why making products will, once again, be seen as the most vital skill set for a vibrant economy.

Quality Control / Management

International Edition QUALITY PLANNING AND ANALYSISFrom Product Development Through Use, 5th EditionBy Frank M Gryna Jr., University of Tampa, Joseph A DeFeo and Richard C H Chua of Juran Institute 2007 (December 2005) / 704 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-296662-6 ISBN: 978-0-07-125421-2 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/gryna

Through four editions, Juran’s Quality Planning and Analysis has provided students and professionals with an authoritative treatment of the subject that goes beyond statistical techniques. The fi fth edition of this highly regarded classic book on managing for quality, Juran’s Quality Planning and Analysis for Enterprise Quality, combines the pioneering concepts of Dr. Joseph M. Juran and the teachings of the late Dr. Frank M. Gryna with the insights and experience of today’s leading trainers and practitioners at the Juran Institute: Dr. Richard Chua, Executive VP and Joseph A. DeFeo, President & Executive Coach. The trademark Juran Institute approach has been retained, developing the viewpoint that the achievement of quality products and services requires the application of managerial, technological, statisti-cal, and behavioral actions throughout all functions of an organization. With real-world problems provided in each chapter, students are faced with realities that confront managers, designers, engineers, market-ers, operations personnel, users, and others involved in enterprise quality. This text will challenge readers to make assumptions, estimate economics, reach data-driven conclusions, and adapt themselves to the imperfect world of the practitioner. Students and professionals will also fi nd this book useful as they prepare for various certifi cations such as the Certifi ed Quality Engineer, Reliability Engineer, Quality Manager, Six Sigma Green Belt and Black Belt.

CONTENTS

Introduction: A Roadmap for Change Part I: Foundation 1. Basic Concepts 2. Companywide Assessment of Quality

3. Quality Improvement and Cost Reduction4. Operational Quality Planning and Sales Income 5. Quality Control Part II: Managerial Concepts 6. Process Management 7. Organization for Quality 8. Strategic Quality Management 9. Developing a Quality Culture Part III: Functional Applications 10. Understanding Customer Needs 11. Designing for Quality 12. Supply Chain Management 13. Operations-Manufacturing Sector 14. Operations-Service Sector 15. Inspection, Test, and Measurement 16. Quality Assurance Audits Part IV: Statistical Techniques 17. Basic Concepts of Statistics and Probability 18. Statistical Tools for Analyzing Data 19. Statistical Tools for Designing for Quality 20. Statistical Process Control Appendix I: Supplementary Problems Using Minitab Appendix II: Study Guide Examples Appendix III: Tables

International Edition QUALITY MANAGEMENT3rd EditionBy Howard Gitlow, University of Miami, Rosa Oppenheim, Rutgers Uni-versity, Alan Oppenheim, Montclair State University and David Levine2005 / 767 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-299983-9 (with Student CD)ISBN: 978-0-07-112338-9 [IE with Student CD]

CONTENTS

Part One: Foundations of Quality Management 1 Fundamentals of Quality 2 Fundamentals of Statistical Studies 3 Defining and Documenting a Process Part Two: Tools and Methods of Analytic Studies 4 Basic Probability and Statistics 5 Stabilizing and Improving a Process with Control Charts 6 Attribute Control Charts 7 Variables Control Charts 8 Out-Of-Control Patterns 9 Diagnosing a Process 10 Specifications 11 Process Capability and Improvement Studies 12 Taguchi Methods-Quality Improvement in Product and Process Design 13 Inspection Policy Part Three: Administrative Systems for Quality Management 14 Management Commitment to Transformation 15 Management’s Intellectual and Emotional Education 16 Daily Management 17 Cross Functional Management 18 Policy Management (Hoshin Kanri) Part Four: Some Current thinking About Statistical Studies and Practice 19 Some Current thinking about Statistical Studies 20 “Six Sigma” Management


76

International Edition JURAN’S QUALITY CONTROL HANDBOOK5th EditionBy Joseph Juran and A. Godfrey1999 / 1872 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-034003-9 ISBN: 978-0-07-116539-6 [IE]A Professional Reference Title(International Edition is not for sale in Japan)

CONTENTS

Part I: Managerial. Part II: Functional. Part III: Industries. Part IV: International. Part V: Statistical.

International Edition STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL7th EditionBy Eugene Grant, Stanford University, and Richard Leavenworth, Univer-sity of Florida1996 / 764 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-844354-1 (with 3.5” disk) - Out of PrintISBN: 978-0-07-116320-0 [IE]

CONTENTS

1 Introduction and Overview 2 Directions for Simple X and R Charts 3 Why the Control Chart Works; Some Statistical Concepts 4 Why the Control Chart Works; Some Examples 5 Some Fundamentals of The Theory of Probability 6 The Control Chart for Fraction Rejected 7 The Control Chart for Nonconformities 8 Rational Subgrouping 9 Statistical Analysis of Process Capability and for Process Improve-ment 10 Some Special Process Control Procedures 11 Some Fundamental Concepts in Scientific Sampling 12 An AQL System for Lot-by-Lot Acceptance Sampling by At-tributes 13 Other Procedures for Acceptance Sampling by Attributes 14 Systems for Acceptance Sampling from Continuous Production 15 Systems for Acceptance Sampling by Variables 16 Some Aspects of Life Testing and Reliability 17 Some Economic Aspects of Quality Decisions 18 Some Significant Events in the Development of Statistical Quality Control 19 Models for Quality Management and Problem Solving 20 Demonstrating the Operation of Systems of Chance Causes Appendixes

Service Operations Management

International Edition SERVICE MANAGEMENT6th EditionBy James Fitzsimmons, University of Texas at Austin and Mona Fitzsim-mons2008 (December 2007) / 512 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-722849-1 (with Student CD)ISBN: 978-0-07-126346-7 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/fi tzsimmons08

Balancing conceptual and applied coverage of all aspects of the management and operation of services, Service Management has maintained the position as market leader through fi ve previous edi-tions. It is the most comprehensive and widely used introduction to service operations on the market, written by one of the top authorities on the subject, and it is designed to develop students’ skills in both strategic and operational issues pertaining to services. New material on Professional Service Firms highlights IBM’s initiative to establish a Service Science, Management, and Engineering discipline. The Sixth Edition also offers the latest information on Six-Sigma and RFID, as well as recent developments in other important industry topics. Text coverage spans both qualitative and quantitative aspects of service management and offers fl exibility in courses, offering varying approaches to the study of service operations. The ancillary package includes student CD-ROM and Website that includes self-test quizzes, video clips, ServiceModel Software, and the Mortgage Service Game.

CONTENTS

PART I: Understanding ServicesChapter 1: The Role of Services in an Economy Chapter 2: The Nature of Services Chapter 3: Service StrategyPART II: Designing the Service EnterpriseChapter 4: New Service Development Chapter 5: Technology in Services Chapter 6: Service Quality Chapter 7: Process Improvement (DEA supplement) Chapter 8: The Service Encounter Chapter 9: Supporting Facility and Process Flows Chapter 10: Service Facility LocationPART III: Managing Service OperationsChapter 11: Managing Capacity and Demand Chapter 12: Managing Waiting Lines Chapter 13: Service Supply Relationships Chapter 14: Growth and Globalization of Services Chapter 15: Managing ProjectsPART IV: Quantitative Models for Service ManagementChapter 16: Capacity Planning and Queuing Models (Computer Simulation) Chapter 17: Forecasting Demand for Services Chapter 18: Managing Facilitating GoodsAppendices:Areas of a Standard Normal Distribution Uniformly Distributed Random Numbers [0,1] Values of Lq for the M/M/c Queuing Model Equations for Selected Queuing Models

77


MANAGEMENT LESSONS FROM MAYO CLINICInside One of the World’s Most Admired Service OrganizationsBy Leonard L Berry, Texas A&M University and Kent D Seltman2008 / 256 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-159073-0A Professional Reference Title

Management Lessons from Mayo Clinic reveals for the fi rst time how this complex service organization fosters a culture that exceeds customer expectations and earns deep loyalty from both customers and employees. Service business authority Leonard Berry and Mayo Clinic marketing administrator Kent Seltman explain how the Clinic implements and maintains its strategy, adheres to its management system, executes its care model, and embraces new knowledge - invaluable lessons for managers and service providers of all indus-tries. Drs. Berry and Seltman had the rare opportunity to study Mayo Clinic’s service culture and systems from the inside by conducting personal interviews with leaders, clinicians, staff, and patients, as well as observing hundreds of clinician-patient interactions. The result is a book about how the Clinic’s business concept produces stellar clinical results, organizational effi ciency, and interpersonal service. By examining the operating principles that guide every management decision at this legendary healthcare institution, the authors

Demonstrate how a great service brand evolves from the core values that nourish and protect it

Extrapolate instructive business lessons that apply outside healthcare

Illustrate the benefits of pooling talent and encouraging team-work

Relate historical events and perspectives to the present-day Mayo Clinic

Share inspiring stories from staff and patients

An innovative analysis of this exemplary institution, Management Lessons from Mayo Clinic presents a proven prescription for creating sustainable service excellence in any organization.

FLYING HIGH IN A COMPETITIVE INDUSTRYCost Effective Service Excellence at Singapore AirlinesBy Loizos Heracleous, Nitin Pangarkar and Jochen Wirtz2005 / 168 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-124964-5 An Asian PublicationA Professional Reference Title

CONTENTS

1 Introduction 2 The Airline Industry: Trends, Economics, Performance and Strategic Imperatives 3 Key Drivers of SIA’s Performance: Strategic Choices and Resource Deployment Decisions 4 Achieving Cost Effective Service Excellence at Singapore Airlines 5 Innovation as a Key to Sustain Key Excellence 6 Managing People Effectively to Deliver Sustained Service Excel-lence 7 How to Win in Cut Throat Industries Lessons from Singapore Airlines

Purchasing and Supply Chain Management


SUPPLY CHAIN LOGISTICS MANAGEMENT3rd Edition

By Donald Bowersox, David Closs and M Bixby Cooper of Michigan State University-East Lans-ing


http://www.mhhe.com/bowersox3e

Supply Chain Logistics Management is exciting, and promises to bolster traditional logistics courses and invigorate supply chain man-agement courses. By examining traditional logistics issues within the context of the supply chain, this text captures the current trends in Supply Chain Management and Supply Chain Strategy. Most text-books approach this subject from a limited perspective, studying only internal functions of an organization to the exclusion of issues that relate to the entire supply chain in an integrated enterprise. Supply Chain Logistics Management provides a solid foundation that clearly describes the role of logistics within the supply chain, portraying a complete view of the subject and extending to show how all the pieces fi t together.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

New and expanded coverage of integrative supply chain manage-ment practices - An expanded treatment of collaborative practices in supply chain integration and expanded treatment of the challenges integrating management across the supply chain.

A new chapter, Integrated Operations Planning (Chapter 6) has been added to provide additional coverage of supply chain planning; applications; sales and operations planning (S&OP); collaborative planning, forecasting, and replenishment (CPFR); and forecasting.

Vast coverage of the most current technology in this industry such as Information Networks, Enterprise Resource Planning and Decision Support Systems. This assures that students are fully trained on the use of these technologies and better prepared to manage these systems upon entering the industry.

CONTENTS

PART ONE – SUPPLY CHAIN LOGISTICS MANAGEMENTChapter 1 21st Century Supply Chains Chapter 2 Logistics Chapter 3 Customer Accommodation Chapter 4 Procurement and Manufacturing Chapter 5 Information Technology Chapter 6 Integrated Operations PlanningPART TWO – SUPPLY CHAIN LOGISTICS OPERATIONSChapter 7 Inventory Chapter 8 Transportation Infrastructure Chapter 9 Transportation Operations Chapter 10 Warehousing Chapter 11 Packaging and Materials HandlingPART THREE – SUPPLY CHAIN LOGISTICS DESIGN


78

Chapter 12 Global Supply Chains Chapter 13 Network Design Chapter 14 Network and Operational PlanningPART FOUR – SUPPLY CHAIN LOGISTICS ADMINSTRATIONChapter 15 Relationship Development Chapter 16 Operational, Financial and Performance Measurement Chapter 17 Supply Chain Risk


SUPPLY MANAGEMENT8th EditionBy David N Burt, University of San Diego and Sheila Petcavage2010 (January 2009) / 608 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-338145-9ISBN: 978-0-07-126330-6 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/burt8e

Supply Management is a major revision of the classic text in the fi eld of procurement. The Eighth Edition builds on the strengths of prior editions, while including state of the art coverage and enhancements to help prepare students for the globalized world of business they will enter.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

An introduction to the visionary concept of Value Network Management

Emphasis on ethics and social responsibility

Expanded coverage of the critical supply management aspects of production and inventory control

Focus on positive interrelationships in cross-functional teams that span the boundaries of the firm

A new graphic art presentation of all charts, figures and text

CONTENTS

PART 1--The Foundation1. The Progression to Professional Supply Management 2. Organizational Issues 3. Supply Management: An Organization Spanning Activity 4. A Portfolio of RelationshipsPART 2--The Requirements Process5. New Product Development 6. Purchasing Descriptions and Specifications 7. Managing for Quality 8. The Procurement of Equipment 9. Purchasing ServicesPART 3--Sourcing: Sourcing Perception and Corporate Outsourc-ing10. Outsourcing 11. Sourcing 12. Global Supply ManagementPART 4--Cost Management13. Total Cost of Ownership 14. Price and Cost Analysis 15. Methods of Compensation 16. NegotiationPART 5--Managing Contracts and Relationships17. Contract Formation and Legal Issues 18. Contract and Relationship Management 19. Ethics and Social ResponsibilitiesPART 6--Materials Management20. Production and Inventory Control 21. Demand Management and LogisticsPART 7--Implementing Value Network Management

22. Implementing Value Network ManagementName Index Subject Index


MATCHING SUPPLY WITH DEMANDAn Introduction to Operations Management, 2nd Edition

By Gerard Cachon and Christian Terwiesch of University of Pennsylvania


MATCHING SUPPLY WITH DEMAND by Cachon and Terwiesch is the most authoritative, cutting-edge book for operations management MBAs. The book demands rigorous analysis on the part of students without requiring consistent use of sophisticated mathematical modeling to perform it. When the use of quantitative tools or formal modeling is indicated, it is only to perform the necessary analysis needed to inform and support a practical business solution.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

New Chapter 5 (The Link Between Operations and Finance) relates operational performance to the overall financial performance of the firm. It discusses the link between process effectiveness and corporate balance sheets and income statements. This material provides a powerful motivation for the micro analysis discussed in this book—students want to know that they are studying issues of importance at all managerial levels of the firm.

New Chapter 10 is dedicated to the Toyota Production System and lean operations. It provides an expanded version of the material that was in Chapter 8 of the 1st edition. Responding to market feed-back, the authors decided that this material is sufficiently important to merit an entire chapter. However, the principles guiding the Toyota Production System are discussed in most of the other chapters as well. This chapter repeats, summarizes and reinforces these concepts to solidify a student’s understanding.

Expanded quality chapter: Chapter 9 expands upon the first edition’s quality management chapter and places an emphasis on six-sigma process improvement and robust design, hence the change in the chapter title to “Quality Management, Statistical Process Control, and Six Sigma Capacity.”

Streamlined Chapter 12, “Make-To-Order and Quick Response with Reactive Capacity” has been streamlined. The technical discus-sion on the mismatch cost formula has been placed in the appendix, making this chapter more accessible to students.

Updated examples: Examples in all chapters have been updated to improve the presentation of the material.

Additional practice problems have been added to each chapter, providing students with additional material for self-learning.

The treatment is concise and free of irrelevant detail. Students can get the essentials down, without having to read through pages of extraneous material; instructors can assign other materials, along with the text, without fear of the cost of materials to students becom-ing exorbitant.

79


CONTENTS

Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 The Process View of the Organization Chapter 3 Understanding the Supply Process: Evaluating Process Capacity Chapter 4 Estimating and Reducing Labor Costs Chapter 5 The Link between Operations and Finance Chapter 6 Batching and Other Flow Interruptions: Set-up Times and the Economic Order Quantity Model Chapter 7 Variability and Its Impact on Process Performance: Waiting Time Problems Chapter 8 The Impact of Variability on Process Performance: Through-put Losses Chapter 9 Quality Management, Statistical Process Control, and Six Sigma Capacity Chapter 10 Lean Operations and the Toyota Production System Chapter 11 Betting On Uncertain Demand: The Newsvendor Model Chapter 12 Make-To-Order and Quick Response with Reactive Capacity Chapter 13 Service Levels and Lead Times in Supply Chains: The Order Up-to Inventory Model Chapter 14 Risk Pooling Strategies to Reduce and Hedge Uncer-tainty Chapter 15 Revenue Management with Capacity Controls Chapter 16 Supply Chain CoordinationAppendix A: Statistics Tutorial B: Tables C: Evaluation of the Loss Function D: Equations and Approximations E: Solutions to Selected Practice ProblemsGlossary References Index of “How to” exhibits Summary of key equations Index

International Edition SUPPLY CHAIN SCIENCEBy Wallace Hopp, University of Michigan-Ann Arbor2008 (October 2007) / 204 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340332-8 ISBN: 978-0-07-128476-9 [IE]

http://highered.mcgraw-hill.com/sites/0073403326/information_center_view0/

Supply Chain Science describes the collection of people, resources, and activities involved in bringing materials and information together to produce and deliver goods and services to customers. Through illustrations and analogies to everyday life, the text presents the key concepts that underlie the behavior of operations systems in a largely non-mathematical way. The goal of SCS is to provide a concise framework for understanding how complex production and supply chain systems behave, and therefore enable managers/students to have a stronger basis for management decision making. The range of problems faced by managers dealing with supply chains is almost infi nite, which is why a scientifi c approach is needed. Many published volumes provide detailed explanations on how to solve problems in supply chain management, but they can provide answers for only a limited set of situations. Hopp’s Supply Chain Science explains why systems behave as they do, providing the tools and insights to deal effectively with almost any scenario.

CONTENTS

Part I: Station ScienceChapter 1: Capacity Chapter 2: Variability Chapter 3: BatchingPart II: Line Science

Chapter 4: Flows Chapter 5: Buffering Chapter 6: Push/PullPart III: Network ScienceChapter 7: Inventory Chapter 8: Risk Chapter 9: CoordinationAppendix A: Summary of Notion Appendix B: Supply Chain Science Principles

NEW

LOGISTICS & SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENTBy Jonsson

2008 (March 2008) / 544 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-711738-2 McGraw-Hill UK Title

Logistics and Supply Chain Management is a comprehensive new text that explains the fundamentals of the subject so that the student understands the “game rules” goals and objectives when designing, planning and controlling effi cient and effective logistics systems in supply chains. It also includes coverage of information technology, the impact of manufacturing and product structures on logistics and supply chain systems, and the environment. Designed specifi cally with the student in mind, this book is the perfect companion for introductory courses in logistics and supply chain management.

FEATURES

The book contains many mini cases to illustrate current practice and key concepts defined and described in the book.

Discussion tasks have been included to help facilitate effective learning and provide reinforcement.

A comprehensive glossary has been included at the end of the book.

CONTENTS

Part One: The Logistics and Supply Chain Management Disci-plines Chapter One: Introduction to Logistics and Supply Chain Manage-ment Chapter Two: The Logistics SystemChapter Three: The Material FlowPart Two: Logistics and Supply Chain Goals and PerformanceChapter Four: Customer ServiceChapter Five: Logistics Costs and Tied-Up CapitalChapter Six: Environmental Aspects of LogisticsPart Three: Logistics and Supply Chain StructuresChapter Seven: Products in the Logistics SystemChapter Eight: Material Supply StructuresChapter Nine: Production Processes and LayoutsChapter Ten: Distribution StructuresPart Four: Planning and Control of Logistics and Supply Chain SystemsChapter Eleven: Demand ManagementChapter Twelve: Materials ManagementChapter Thirteen: Manufacturing Planning and ControlChapter Fourteen: Transport Planning


80

Chapter Fifteen: The Procurement ProcessPart Five: Supply Chain, IT and Improvement Aspects of Lo-gisticsChapter Sixteen: Emerging Practices in Supply Chain ManagementChapter Seventeen: Information Systems for Logistics and Supply Chain ManagementAppendicesAppendix A: ABC AnalysisAppendix B: Incremental Inventory Carrying CostsAppendix C: Derivation of the formula for economic order quantity (EOQ)Appendix D: Normal Distribution FunctionAppendix E: Service Loss FunctionAppendix F: Exercises: Solutions to Problems

NEW

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENTBy Rangarajan, IIM

2008 (September 2008) / 552 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-022163-5McGraw-Hill India Title

FEATURES:

Concepts are supplemented with examples and diagrams

Dedicated chapters on Designing and managing effective supply chains and Measuring performance of SCMs

Focused discussion on supply chain efficiencies and “lean thinking”

Coverage of IT and quantitative tools in SCM

A brief overview of each case, questions for analysis and an ap-proach to the case is suggested for the benefits of the students.

Ancillaries

• A teaching plan for some typical course offerings in the area

• Links to contemporary developments in the area, which can serve as the starting point for some applied research in the subject.

• An OLC having suggestions for the instructors and teaching notes for cases

CONTENTS

1. An Overview of Supply Chain Management 2. Understanding Supply Chain Dynamics 3. Designing the Supply Chain 4. Performance Measurement 5. SCM Effectiveness and Lean Thinking 6. SCM Across ORganisations: Upstream Interface 7. SCM Across Organisations: Downstream Interface 8. Transportation, Storage and Warehousing 9. role of Information Technology in SCM 10. Quantitative Tools for Supply Chain Management Case Studies: 1. Laxmi Transformers

2. Rajashree Cement – Engine on Load 3. Western Oil Ltd (A) 4. Farmaid Tractors Limited 5. SCM at Titan Industries Ltd. 6. CONCOR: Tea Transportation 7. Chilli in Soup (A) 8. Bayer Corp Science: Science for a Better Supply Chain 9. Food World (B) 10. Seth Dhaniram – C&FA 11. Airfreight Ltd.

International Edition DESIGNING AND MANAGING THE SUPPLY CHAIN3rd EditionBy David Simchi-Levi, Mass Institute of Tech, Sally Kaminsky, College of Staten Island and Edith Simchi-Levi, Logic Tools Inc.,2008 (July 2007) / 528 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-334152-1 (with Student CD)ISBN: 978-0-07-128714-2 [IE with Student CD]

http://www.mhhe.com/simchi-levi3e

As the most up-to-date, cutting-edge supply chain management book on the market, the Third Edition of Designing and Managing the Supply Chain discusses the problems, models and concepts derived from issues related to effective supply chain management. While many core supply chain management issues are interrelated, the authors have tried to make each chapter as self-contained as possible so that the reader can refer directly to chapters covering topics of inter-est. Each chapter utilizes case studies and numerous examples. Mathematical and technical sections can be skipped without loss of continuity. Most textbooks do not include models and decision support systems robust enough for industry, but that is not true of this new edition. The accompanying CD-ROM also features the return of two simulations, the Computerized Beer Game and the Risk Pool Game and a computerized tool. These simulations help users develop and execute supply chain contracts while also illustrating many of the concepts discussed in the text.

CONTENTS

Chapter 1: Introduction Chapter 2: Inventory Management and Risk Pooling Chapter 3: Network planning Chapter 4: Supply contracts Chapter 5: The Value of information Chapter 6: Supply Chain integration Chapter 7: Distribution strategies Chapter 8: Strategic alliancesChapter 9: Procurement and Outsourcing Strategies Chapter 10: Global Logistics and Risk Management Chapter 11: Coordinated product and supply chain design Chapter 12: Customer Value Chapter 13: Smart Pricing Chapter 14: Information Technology and Business Processes Chapter 15: Technology standards Appendix A: Computerized Beer Game Appendix B: Risk Pool Game Appendix C: Supply Contract Spreadsheet Appendix D: Bidding Game

81


International Edition PRINCIPLES AND TOOLS FOR SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT WITH STUDENT CD-ROMBy Scott Webster, Syracuse University2008 (December 2006) / 352 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-287268-2 ISBN: 978-0-07-128588-9 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/webster1e

Webster’s Principles and Tools of Supply Chain Management pro-vides a basic introduction to the concepts and tools of supply chain management and delivers an optimal balance of descriptive and analytical material. The book is divided into three parts: Foundation; Principles and Tools; and Synthesis. Part 1 introduces the basic concepts of supply chain management—concepts that are referred to and expanded upon in subsequent chapters; Part 2 focuses on the application of supply chain concepts within the context of particular supply chain activities (i.e., buy, make, moVe, store, or sell); Part 3, consisting of a single chapter, offers a macro perspective of supply chain management. It reconstructs and synthesizes earlier content while taking a “step back” to review and consider the entire system. A case study is included at the end of each chapter. Some of these cases focus on technology. Chapters that introduce analytical models begin with simple analyses and introduce added complexity and real-ism as the chapter progresses, thereby offering instructors fl exibility with respect to the degree of analytical rigor that they are able to require of their students.

CONTENTS

PrefacePART ONE FOUNDATION1 Introduction: Operations and Supply Chain Management 2 Information Technology: ERP Systems, SCA Systems, and E-Commerce 3 Supply Chain Foundations: System Slack and Related Concepts PART TWO PRINCIPLES AND TOOLS 4 Demand Management: Processing, Influencing, and Anticipating Demand 5 Supply Management: Trends, Technologies, and Tactics 6 Inventory Management I: Deterministic Analysis 7 Inventory Management II: Stochastic Analysis 8 Capacity Management: Analysis and Psychology 9 Production Management: Flow Control and Scheduling 10 Transportation Management: Elements and Insights Supplement A Diagnostic Analysis Illustration Supplement B International Transportation: Services and Legal Requirements 11 Quality Management: Tools for Process Improvement Supplement Creative Problem Solving: Strategies and Pitfalls PART THREE SYNTHESIS 12 Supply Chain Strategy: Frameworks and Synthesis Appendix 1 Principles of Nature: Insights into Human and System Behavior Appendix 2 Linchpin of E-Commerce: Basics of Encryption and Digital Signatures Appendix 3 Summary of Notation and Formulas Appendix 4 Standard Normal Probability and Unit Normal Loss Table References / Index

International Edition PURCHASING AND SUPPLY MANAGEMENTBy W C Benton2007 (June 2006) / 800 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-352514-3 ISBN: 978-0-07-110630-6 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/benton07

Purchasing and Supply Management, 1/e, by W.C. Benton, offers insights into the theory, practice, and implementation of supply management issues. A step-by-step approach helps students and professionals gain analytical purchasing skills. Many actual case studies and exercises help students transform purchasing theory into purchasing practice and implementation. Some of the topics include purchasing business processes, price cost analysis, profes-sional services, transportation purchasing, global purchasing, and healthcare purchasing.

CONTENTS

Preface. Part 1: Introduction to Purchasing and Supply Management. Chapter 1: Purchasing and Supply Management. Chapter 2: Purchasing Decisions and Business Strategy. Chapter 3: The Legal Aspects of Purchasing. Part 2: Materials Management. Chapter 4: Materials Management. Chapter 5: Inventory Management. Chapter 6: Just-In-Time (Lean) Purchasing. Chapter 7: Purchasing Procedures, E-Purchasing, and Systems Contracting.Part 3: Fundamentals of Purchasing and Supply Management. Chapter 8: Supplier Selection and Evaluation. Chapter 9: Global Sourcing. Chapter 10: Purchasing, Supply Partnerships, and Supply Chain Power. Chapter 11: Total Quality Management (TQM) and Purchasing. Part 4: Price/Cost Analysis and Negotiation Strategies. Chapter 12: Price Determination. Chapter 13: Bargaining and Negotiations. Part 5: Special Purchasing Application. Chapter 14: Purchasing Transportation Services. Chapter 15: Equipment Acquisition and Disposal. Chapter 16: Healthcare Purchasing and Supply Management. Chapter 17: Procuring Professional Services. Cases. Glossary. Index






82

International Edition PURCHASING AND SUPPLY MANAGEMENT13th EditionBy Michael Leenders and P Fraser Johnson of University of Western On-tario, Anna Flynn, Vice president of Institute of Supply Management and Harold E Fearon, Center for Advanced Purchasing Studies, Emeritus2006 / 588 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-287379-5 ISBN: 978-0-07-124966-9 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/leenders13e

CONTENTS

Chapter 1 – Purchasing and Supply Management Chapter 2 – Supply Organization Chapter 3 – Supply Processes Chapter 4 – Information Systems and Technology Chapter 5 – Quality, Specification and Service Chapter 6 – Quantity and Inventory Chapter 7 – Transportation and Delivery Chapter 8 – Price Chapter 9 – Cost Management, Discounts, and Negotiation Chapter 10 – Supplier Selection Chapter 11 – Investment Recovery Chapter12 – Supply Law and Ethics Chapter 13 – Research and Metrics Chapter 14 – Global Supply Chapter 15 – Public Supply Management Chapter 16 – Capital Goods Chapter 17 – Services Chapter 18 – Make or Buy, Insourcing, and Outsourcing Chapter 19 – Supplier Relations Chapter 20 – Strategy in Purchasing and Supply Management CASE INDEX SUBJECT INDEX

Data Mining

International Edition INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS DATA MININGBy David Olson and Yong Shi of University of Nebraska-Omaha2007 (November 2005) / 288 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-295971-0 ISBN: 978-0-07-124470-1 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/olson1e

Introduction to Business Data Mining was developed to introduce students, as opposed to professional practitioners or engineering students, to the fundamental concepts of data mining. Most impor-tantly, this text shows readers how to gather and analyze large sets of data to gain useful business understanding. A four part organization introduces the material (Part I), describes and demonstrated basic data mining algorithms (Part II), focuses on the business applications of data mining (Part III), and presents an overview of the developing areas in this fi eld, including web mining, text mining, and the ethical aspects of data mining. (Part IV). The author team has had exten-sive experience with the quantitative analysis of business as well as with data mining analysis. They have both taught this material and used their own graduate students to prepare the text’s data mining reports. Using real-world vignettes and their extensive knowledge of this new subject, David Olson and Yong Shi have created a text that demonstrates data mining processes and techniques needed for business applications.

CONTENTS

Part I: INTRODUCTION Chapter 1: Initial Description of Data Mining in Business Chapter 2: Data Mining Processes and Knowledge Discovery Chapter 3: Database Support to Data Mining Part II: DATA MINING METHODS AS TOOLS Chapter 4: Overview of Data Mining Techniques Chapter 4 Appendix: Enterprise Miner Demonstration on Expenditure Data Set Chapter 5: Cluster Analysis Chapter 5 Appendix: Clementine Chapter 6: Regression Algorithms in Data Mining Chapter 7: Neural Networks in Data Mining Chapter 8: Decision Tree Algorithms Appendix 8: Demonstration of See5 Decision Tree Analysis Chapter 9: Linear Programming-Based Methods Chapter 9 Appendix: Data Mining Linear Programming Formula-tions Part III: BUSINESS APPLICATIONS Chapter 10: Business Data Mining Applications Applications Chapter 11: Market-Basket Analysis Chapter 11 Appendix: Market-Basket Procedure Part IV: DEVELOPING ISSUES Chapter 12: Text and Web Mining Chapter 12 Appendix: Semantic Text Analysis Chapter 13: Ethical Aspects of Data Mining





83


Operation Research

NEW

INTRODUCTION TO OPERATIONS RESEARCH9th Edition

By Frederick S Hillier, Stanford University

2010 (February 2009) / 1088 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-729834-0 (with Student Access Card)

For over four decades, Introduction to Operations Research by Fre-derick Hillier has been the classic text on operations research. While building on the classic strengths of the text, the author continues to fi nd new ways to make the text current and relevant to students. One way is by incorporating a wealth of state-of-the-art, user-friendly software and more coverage of business applications than ever before. The hallmark features of this edition include clear and comprehensive coverage of fundamentals, an extensive set of interesting problems and cases, and state-of-the-practice operations research software used in conjunction with examples from the text.

Website: Solutions, Testbank

NEW TO THIS EDITION

Careful updates have been made to the material and references throughout the book to reflect the current state of the art.

Application vignettes have been added that describe dramatic success stories regarding real applications of operations research to excite students about the relevance of the techniques they are learning.

The complete articles describing these real applications of opera-tions research also are provided on the website for further reading.

Added many other references of articles describing other award winning applications of operations research, and some of these articles also are provided on the website.

New problems have been added that involve reading and com-menting on one of the provided articles that describe a dramatic application of operations research.

A new section has been added on the important emerging topic of revenue management.

The chapter on the theory of the simplex method has been reorganized.

Further clarified the presentation in numerous spots throughout the book.

The Excel® add-ins have been updated for Excel® 2007.

All companion software available on the website has been up-dated to the most current version.

To purchase an electronic version of this title, visit www.Cours-eSmart.com (ISBN 9780077279332), or www.VitalSource.com (ISBN 9780077322892).

CONTENTS

1 Introduction 2 Overview of the Operations Research Modeling Approach 3 Introduction to Linear Programming 4 Solving Linear Programming Problems: The Simplex Method 5 The Theory of the Simplex Method 6 Duality Theory and Sensitivity Analysis 7 Other Algorithms for Linear Programming 8 The Transportation and Assignment Problems 9 Network Optimization Models 10 Dynamic Programming 11 Integer Programming 12 Nonlinear Programming 13 Metaheuristics 14 Game Theory 15 Decision Analysis 16 Markov Chains 17 Queueing Theory 18 Inventory Theory 19 Markov Decision Processes 20 SimulationAppendix 1 Documentation for the OR Courseware Appendix 2 Convexity Appendix 3 Classical Optimization Methods Appendix 4 Matrices and Matrix Operations Appendix 5 Table for a Normal DistributionSupplements on the Online Learning CenterAdditional Cases Supplement to Appendix 3.1 More about LINGO Supplement to Chapter 7 Linear Goal Programming and Its Solution Procedures Supplement to Chapter 8 A Case Study with Many Transportation Problems Supplement 1 to Chapter 18 Derivation of the Optimal Policy for the Stochastic Single-Period Model for Perishable Products Supplement 2 to Chapter 18 Stochastic Periodic-Review Models Supplement 1 to Chapter 20 Variance-Reducing Techniques Supplement 2 to Chapter 20 Regenerative Method of Statistical Analysis 21 The Art of Modeling with Spreadsheets 22 Project Management with PERT/CPM 23 Additional Special Types of Linear Programming Problems 24 Probability Theory 25 Reliability 26 The Application of Queueing Theory 27 Forecasting 28 Examples of Performing Simulations on Spreadsheets with Crystal Ball Appendix 6 Simultaneous Linear Equations

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF OPERATIONS RESEARCH2nd EditionBy Richard Bronson, Fairleigh Dickinson College and Goovindasami Naadimuthu of Fairleigh Dickinson University1998 / 456 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-008020-1 A Schaum Professional Reference Title

Tackling the broad range of allocation problems that actually con-front engineers, programmers and analysts in today’s business and industrial worlds, this book takes readers step-by-step through all the mathematical programming techniques--including the trailblazing Karmarkar algorithm--needed to excel in any operations research course. It’s easy to see why the fi rst edition of this invaluable study guide sole more than 35,000 copies! It cuts down study time while it builds essential skills.


84

Logistics & Supply Chain Management (Professional References)

SUPPLY CHAIN COST MANAGEMENTBy Jimmy Anklesaria2007 (November 2007) / 256 pagesISBN: 978-0-8144-7475-4 A Professional Reference Title

For most supply chains, cost reduction is imperative to long-term survival. Yet identifying the costs that can be eliminated—and then doing so effectively— can prove impossible without the right method. This book introduces the same process the author has used to save companies like IBM, Kodak, and DuPont billions of dollars, simply by harnessing the knowledge of suppliers. Using reallife case stud-ies and examples. The book gives readers everything they need to implement this powerful system, and bring genuine and permanent savings to their company.

International Edition WORLD-CLASS WAREHOUSING AND MATERIAL HANDLINGBy Edward Frazelle, The Logistics Institute at Georgia Tech2002 / 280 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-137600-6 ISBN: 978-0-07-122686-8 [IE]A Professional Reference Title

Warehousing continues to play a critical role in assuring high levels of customer service and overall logistics performance. Effi cient warehousing can minimize the effects of supply chain ineffi ciencies; can improve logistics accuracy and inventory management; and can allow for product accumulation, consolidation, and customization. The cost of warehousing should be commensurate with the contribution of warehousing to overall logistics performance—typically between 2% and 5% of corporate revenue. In world-class warehousing these costs are minimized while also improving customer service. The principles and systems described in this book are common denominators of world-class warehousing. The principles have been developed over a decade of logistics research, education and consulting project ex-perience. World-Class Warehousing and Material Handling can be used to develop a warehouse master plan to support the corporation’s overall logistics strategy.

Project Management (Professional References)

MASTERING PROJECT MANAGEMENTApplying Advanced Concepts to Systems Thinking, Control & Evaluation, Resource Allocation, 2nd EditionBy James Lewis, The Lewis Institute Inc2008 (August 2007) / 464 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-146291-4 A Professional Reference Title

Written by one of the world’s most recognized authorities on project management, the fi eld’s gold standard reference for nearly a dec-ade has been revised to include more than 35% new or updated material.

CONTENTS

Part 1: what it’s all about Chapter 1: So you want to master project management Chapter 2: The job of managing Chapter 3: Integrating leadership and management Chapter 4: Leading to Learn and Learning to Lead…..Dr. Tom Boldrey Chapter 5: Whole brain project management Chapter 6: HT Achieve High performance Project management Chapter 7: Power and Politics for Project management Chapter 8: Dealing with cultural differences Chapter 9: Defining Success and Failure Chapter 10: Organizing for project management Part 2: Tools and Techniques Chapter 11: A Review of the Standard Tools Chapter 12: The need for systems thinking in project management Chapter 13: Understanding Systems thinking Chapter 14: HT Apply systems thinking in managing projects Chapter 15: Managing project Risks Chapter 16: Improving decisions in projects Part 3: Planning Chapter 17: Developing a Shared Understanding of a Project Chapter 18: Identifying Customer Requirements Chapter 19: Managing resources in project Scheduling Chapter 20: Scheduling Uncertainty in projects Part 4: Control Chapter 21: Tracking progress to Achieve project Control Chapter 22: Accounting and Cost control Chapter 23: Change control in project Chapter 24: Managing vendors in projects Chapter 25: Conducting project reviews Chapter 26: managing quality projects Part 5: Optimizing Project performance Chapter 27: Improving project management processes Chapter 28: Improving Estimating capability Chapter 29: Managing Innovation in projeects





85


International Edition PROJECT MANAGEMENT5th EditionBy David Cleland, University of Pittsburgh and Lewis Ireland, President of the American Society2007 (August 2006) / 688 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-147160-2 ISBN: 978-0-07-126237-8 [IE]A Professional Reference Title

Today’s Most Effective Guide for Applying Project Management to Implement Organizational Strategies -- Now Updated and Expanded! Project Management: Strategic Design and Implementation delivers complete guidance on applying the theory, processes, practices, and techniques of project management to support strategic planning. Writ-ten by two world-renowned project management leaders, this new edi-tion presents the latest methods for using fl exible teams to implement organizational strategies -- especially changes to products, services, and processes. Designed for use in both large and small organizations, this updated classic ranges from the project management process…to project planning, monitoring, evaluation, and control…to continuous improvement through projects. This resource offers new material on project portfolio management, earned value, project management maturity, nontraditional teams, project partnering, project management outsourcing, and much more. The Fifth edition of Project Management: Strategic Design and Implementation features:

Detailed coverage of all advances in project management theory and practice

Helpful sections added to each chapter, including chapter summary, additional sources of information, discussion questions, project man-agement principles, case study, assignment, and checklist

Updated examples and exercises on key project management topics

A larger format with sidebars to highlight major issues

This new material: chapters on “The Evolution of Project Manage-ment” and “Successful Project Teams”

CONTENTS

PREFACE / ACKNOWLEDGMENTS / INTRODUCTION Part 1: Introduction Chapter 1: The Evolution of Project Management Chapter 2: Why Project Management? Chapter 3: The Project Management Process Part 2: The Strategic Context of Projects Chapter 4: When to Use Project Management Chapter 5: The Strategic Context of Projects Chapter 6: The Board of Directors and Major Projects Chapter 7: Project Stakeholder Management Chapter 8: Strategic Issues in Project Management Part 3: Organizational Design for Project Management Chapter 9: Organizing for Project Management Chapter 10: Project Portfolio Management Chapter 11: Project Authority Chapter 12: Project Management Maturity Part 4: Project Operations Chapter 13: Project Planning Chapter 14: Project Management Information SystemChapter 15: Project Monitoring. Evaluation, and Control Chapter 16: The Project Earned Value Management System Chapter 17: Project Termination Part 5: Interpersonal Dynamics in the Management of Projects Chapter 18: Project Leadership Chapter 19: Project Communications Chapter 20: Successful Project Teams Part 6: The Cultural Elements Chapter 21: Continuous Improvement Through Projects Chapter 22: Cultural Considerations in Project Management

Part 7: New Prospects Chapter 23: Alternative Project Teams INDEX

PROJECT MANAGEMENT24 Steps to Help You Master Any ProjectBy Gary Heerkens, Management Solutions Group2007 (June 2007) / 128 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-148652-1 A Professional Reference Title

Project Management gives you proven guidance in both the science and art of becoming an effective project manager, from coordinating and documenting the work to leading people to developing (and trust-ing!) your own judgment. Filled with action steps, this practical guide helps you get comfortable with the tools of project planning as well as cultivate smooth working relationships with people inside and outside your organization in order to achieve your goals. You’ll see how to:

Understand exactly what is required of you in your role

Develop a logical plan of action

Lead and motivate a team while actively managing your com-munication channels

Make the best decisions for the project-and seek acceptable solutions rather than perfect ones

Perform financial analyses and terminate unworthy projects in order to meet a bottom-line, long-term objective

Manage all project stakeholders through consistent measuring against a pre-announced baseline for productivity

Effective project management isn’t easy, but the payoff can be huge-both for you and for your organization. Project Management helps you develop the foundation you need to be successful in any project initiative.

CONTENTS

1. Planning and executing strategy2. Manage strategically3. Follow the logic4. Assess your readiness5. Plan to plan6. Define your business7. Assess your situation8. Understand your model9. Know your market10. Assess the terrain11. Understand opportunities and threats12. Set feasible goals13. Strategize for goals14. Set priorities15. Pursue your purpose16. Follow your mission17. write the business plan18. Write the annual plan19. Get the right people20. Obtain commitment21. Align with strategy22. Work across functions23. Execute with discipline24. Monitor and improve25. Learn, change, institutionalize


86

BU

SINE

SS STATIST

ICS

87

Business Forecasting ....................................................................................... 97Business Research Method.............................................................................. 98Business Statistics - Supplements ................................................................... 95Business Statistics - Textbook .......................................................................... 89Linear Statistics/Regression .............................................................................. 99 Others ................................................................................................................ 99

NEW TITLES

88

BUSINESS STATISTICS

2010 Author ISBN-13 PageEssentials of Business Statistics, 3e Bowerman 9780077323134 89

Essentials Statistics in Business and Economics, 2e Doane 9780073373652 89

Basic Statistics Using Excel for Use with Statistrical Techniques in Business and Lind 9780077270018 95

Economics, 14e

Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 14e Lind 9780073401768 89

BUSINESS STATISTICS

2009 Author ISBN-13 PageComplete Business Statistics, 7e Aczel 9780073373607 90

Business Research Methods, 2e [UK] Blumberg 9780077117450 98

Business Statistics in Practice, 5e Bowerman 9780077242534 90

Applied Statistics in Business and Economics with Student CD, 2e Doane 9780077214845 91

Statistics for Business, Economics, Management & Finance [UK] Nieuwenhuis 9780077109875 93

Statistics for Management [India] Srivastava 9780070660298 94

Business Forecasting, 6e Wilson 9780073373645 97

89

BUSINESS STATISTICS

Business Statistics - Textbook

NEW

ESSENTIALS OF BUSINESS STATISTICS3rd Edition

By Bruce Bowerman and Richard O’Connell of Miami University of Oh-Oxford, Burdeane Orris, Butler University

2010 (January 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-732313-4

In Essentials of Business Statistics, Third Edition, we provide a mod-ern, practical, and unique framework for teaching the fi rst course in business statistics. This framework features case study and example driven discussions of all basic business statistics topics. In addition, we have endeavored to make this book the most clearly written, mo-tivating, and easy-to-use business statistics text available. We have rewritten many of the discussions in this third edition and taken great pains to explain concepts simply from fi rst principles. Therefore, the only prerequisite for this book is high school algebra.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

A shorter and simpler introduction to business processes and an expanded treatment of data acquisition and sampling (in Chapter 1).

Two chapters on descriptive statistics.

Use of the cumulative normal table in the discussion of the normal distribution in Chapter 6 and throughout the rest of the book.

A clearer and more motivating discussion of sampling distribu-tions in Chapter 7.

A clearer and more motivating introduction to confidence intervals in Chapter 8.

A simpler and streamlined discussion of hypothesis testing in Chapter 9.

Clearer and simpler chapters on regression analysis.

Increased coverage of Excel, Minitab, and MegaStat (an Excel add-in package included on the text’s CD-ROM).

CONTENTS

Chapter 1 An Introduction to Business StatisticsChapter 2 Descriptive Statistics: Tabular and Graphical MethodsChapter 3 Descriptive Statistics: Numerical MethodsChapter 4 ProbabilityChapter 5 Discrete Random VariablesChapter 6 Continuous Random VariablesChapter 7 Sampling DistributionsChapter 8 Confidence IntervalsChapter 9 Hypothesis TestingChapter 10 Statistical Inferences Based on Two SamplesChapter 11 Experimental Design and Analysis of VarianceChapter 12 Chi-Square Tests Chapter 13 Simple Linear Regression AnalysisChapter 14 Multiple Regression and Model BuildingChapter 15 (On Website) Process Improvement Using Control Charts


ESSENTIALS STATISTICS IN BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS 2nd Edition

By David P Doane, Oakland University and Lori E Seward, University of Colorado-Denver

2010 (January 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-337365-2ISBN: 978-0-07-731236-7 (with Student CD)ISBN: 978-0-07-016518-2 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/doaneess2e



STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES IN BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS 14th Edition

By Douglas A Lind, Coastal Carolina University, William G Marchal, University of Toledo and Samuel A Wathen, Coastal Carolina University

2010 (January 2009) / 800 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-340176-8ISBN: 978-0-07-730942-8 (with Student CD)ISBN: 978-0-07-017220-3 [IE}






BUSINESS STATISTICS

90


COMPLETE BUSINESS STATISTICS7th Edition

By Amir Aczel, Boston University and Jayavel Sounderpandian

2009 (February 2008) / 864 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-337360-7 ISBN: 978-0-07-723969-5 (with Student CD)ISBN: 978-0-07-128493 6 [IE with Student CD]

Statistical integrity with a complete Excel solution. The seventh edition retains its global emphasis, maintaining its position of being at the vanguard of international issues in business.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

Incorporation of Minitab, including “how to” information in end of chapter computer sections.

Updated Excel software applications to 2007.

Added many new and updated problems and exercises through-out, many international in focus.

Added new cases and examples, updated others.

Now includes MegaStat® for Excel 2007, an Excel add-in com-patible with both Excel 2007 and 2003.

CONTENTS

1 Introduction and Descriptive Statistics 2 Probability 3 Random Variables 4 The Normal Distribution 5 Sampling and Sampling Distributions 6 Confidence Intervals 7 Hypothesis Testing 8 The Comparison of Two Populations 9 Analysis of Variance 10 Simple Linear Regression and Correlation 11 Multiple Regression 12 Time Series, Forecasting, and Index Numbers 13 Quality Control and Improvement 14 Nonparametric Methods and Chi-Square Tests 15 Bayesian Statistics and Decision AnalysisAppendicesA: References B: Answers to Most Odd-Numbered Problems C: Statistical TablesOn the CD16. Sampling Methods 17. Multivariate Analysis Working With Templates Introduction to Excel Basics


BUSINESS STATISTICS IN PRACTICE5th Edition

By Bruce L Bowerman and Richard T O’Connell of Miami University of OH-Oxford

2009 (February 2008) / 896 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-724253-4 (with Student CD)ISBN: 978-0-07-128091-4 [IE with Student CD]

http://www.mhhe.com/bowerman5e

The new edition of Business Statistics in Practice provides a modern, practical, and unique framework for teaching the fi rst course in busi-ness statistics. This framework features case study and example- driven discussions of all basic business statistics topics. In addition, the authors have rewritten many of the discussions in this edition and have explained concepts more simply from fi rst principles. The only prerequisite for this text is high school algebra.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

A shorter and simpler introduction to business processes and an expanded treatment of data acquisition and sampling (in Chapter 1). In order to make Chapter 1 easier to cover, the fifth edition has a shortened and simplified introduction to business processes. This introduction is now part of a discussion of sampling in Section 1.2. In addition, Chapter 1 contains a new, optional section (Section 1.5) that discusses more advanced aspects of data acquisition and survey sampling.

Two shorter chapters on descriptive statistics with simplified and clarified explanations. Chapter 2, discusses the graphical and tabular methods of descriptive statistics. Chapter 3, discusses the numerical methods of descriptive statistics, with new material on covariance, cor-relation, and the least squares line. Both chapters utilize a substantial number of new examples, exercises, cases, and data sets, including The Jeep Case and The Household Income Case.

Use of the cumulative normal table in the discussion of the normal distribution in Chapter 6 and throughout the rest of the book. Because use of the cumulative normal table makes many normal curve calculations easier and is consistent with the way that most statistical software systems give normal curve probabilities, the fifth edition uses this table for all normal curve applications.

A clearer and more motivating discussion of sampling distribu-tions in Chapter 7. Chapter 7 begins with a new case: The Risk Re-duction Case: Game Shows and Stock Returns. This case motivates students to think about the properties of sampling distributions in a “fun” and familiar context.

A clearer and more motivating introduction to confidence intervals in Chapter 8. Chapter 8 begins with an intuitive example that illustrates a practical application of a confidence interval for a population mean. Then, using this example as a springboard, Chapter 8 develops the logic behind and a formula for a confidence interval for a population mean (as well as other confidence interval formulas). One new real world case exercise in Chapter 8 is The Air Traffic Control Case.

A simpler and streamlined discussion of hypothesis testing in Chapter 9. As in the fourth edition, this basic hypothesis testing chapter uses a seven-step procedure that breaks hypothesis testing down into small, easy to understand steps and clearly shows how to use the book’s hypothesis testing summary boxes. In addition, the material on hypothesis tests for a population mean has been simpli-

91

BUSINESS STATISTICS

fied and streamlined for the fifth edition. A motivating new case – The Valentine’s Day Chocolate Case - is used throughout the discussion of hypothesis testing.

Three chapters on regression analysis. Chapter 13 discusses simple linear regression analysis, including an introduction to residual analysis. Chapter 14 discusses multiple regression analysis, including the use of dummy variables and analyzing residuals from a multiple regression model. Chapter 15 discusses model building and model diagnostics, including the use of quadratic and interaction terms, logistic regression, identifying outlying and influential observations, data transformations, and the Durbin-Watson test. Chapters 13 and 14 contain significantly simplified presentations of the simple linear repression model, multiple regression models, the least square point estimates, and confidence and prediction intervals. Furthermore, the more advanced material in Chapter 15 has been designed for maxi-mum teaching flexibility. For example, the discussions of quadratic and interaction terms in Chapter 15 can be studied before or after the material on dummy variables in Chapter 14. In addition, the presenta-tions of data transformations and the Durbin-Watson test in Chapter 15 can be covered after studying residual analysis in simple linear regression (in Chapter 13) or, alternatively, after studying residual analysis in multiple regression (in Chapter 14).

Inclusion of Holt-Winters’ double exponential smoothing and multiplicative Winters’ method in Chapter 16, which discusses time series forecasting.

Increased coverage of Excel, Minitab, and MegaStat (an Excel add-in package included on the text’s CD-ROM). In addition, ap-pendices at the end of each chapter demonstrate how to use Excel, Minitab and Megastat. Additional capabilities of all three packages are demonstrated, and the screen captures illustrating the use of the packages are more colorful, larger, and easier to read. For the fifth edition, the developer of MegaStat, Professor J.B. Orris of Butler University, has worked closely with us. We believe that MegaStat is the most comprehensive, accurate, and easy to use Excel add-in package in existence. In addition to remedying most of the compu-tational problems associated with the Excel data analysis toolpak, MegaStat is also specifically designed to enhance the use of Business Statistics in Practice.

CONTENTS

Chapter 1 An Introduction to Business Statistics Chapter 2 Descriptive Statistics: Tabular and Graphical Methods Chapter 3 Descriptive Statistics: Numerical Methods Chapter 4 Probability Chapter 5 Discrete Random Variables Chapter 6 Continuous Random Variables Chapter 7 Sampling Distributions Chapter 8 Confidence Intervals Chapter 9 Hypothesis Testing Chapter 10 Statistical Inferences Based on Two Samples Chapter 11 Experimental Design and Analysis of Variance Chapter 12 Chi-Square Tests Chapter 13 Simple Linear Regression Analysis Chapter 14 Multiple Regression Chapter 15 Model Building and Model Diagnostics Chapter 16 Times Series Forecasting Chapter 17 Process Improvement Using Control Charts Chapter 18 Nonparametric Methods Chapter 19 Simple Linear Regression AnalysisAppendix A: Statistical Tables Appendix B: Counting Rules Appendix C: The Hypergeometric Distribution Appendix D: Properties of the Mean and the Variance of a Random Variable, and the Covariance Appendix E: Derivations of the Mean and Variance of x and p References


APPLIED STATISTICS IN BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS WITH STUDENT CD2nd Edition

By David Doane, Oakland University and Lori E Seward, Leeds College of Business

2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 978-0-07-721484-5 ISBN: 978-0-07-128373-1 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/doane2e

Applied Statistics in Business & Economics 2e provides a comprehen-sive introduction to Statistics concepts and applications in business and economics. The text and Student CD provide state of the art integration of technology in order to focus on the important practical concepts and applications as opposed to mechanics.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

Improved, non-technical introductions to chapter topics.

Updates and improvements throughout, including examples, exercises, and large data sets.

Expanded and updated mini cases that will motivate and inter-est students.

New exercises and examples using real data from Noodles & Company, a rapidly growing casual dining chain.

Videos covering Noodles & company and how they do forecast-ing, make location decisions, and conduct marketing research.

New Exam review question sections follow selected chapters and provide a tool for student exam prep.

Compatibility with Microsoft Excel 2007, as well as excel 2003.

Inference chapters 9 and 10 have been reorganized to allow more course focus on means as opposed to proportions.

CONTENTS

Chapter One Overview of Statistics Chapter Two Data Collection Chapter Three Describing Data Visually Chapter Four Descriptive Statistics Chapter Five Probability Chapter Six Discrete Probability Distributions Chapter Seven Continuous Distributions Chapter Eight Sampling Distributions and Estimation Chapter Nine One Sample Hypothesis Tests Chapter Ten Two Sample Hypothesis Tests Chapter Eleven Analysis of Variance Chapter Twelve Bivariate Regression Chapter Thirteen Multiple Regression Chapter Fourteen Time Series Analysis Chapter Fifteen Chi-Square Tests Chapter Sixteen Nonparametric Tests Chapter Seventeen Quality ManagementOn CD: Chapter Eighteen Simulation

BUSINESS STATISTICS

92

International Edition ESSENTIALS OF BUSINESS STATISTICS2nd EditionBy Bruce Bowerman and Richard O’Connell of Miami University of Oh-Oxford, Burdeane Orris, Butler University2008 (December 2006) / 640 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-297748-6 ISBN: 978-0-07-331988-9 (with Student CD)ISBN: 978-0-07-128605-3 [IE with Student CD]

http://highered.mcgraw-hill.com/sites/0072977485/information_center_view0/

The new edition of Essentials of Business Statistics delivers clear and understandable explanations of core business statistics con-cepts, making it ideal for a one term course in business statistics. Containing continuing case studies that emphasize the theme of business improvement, the text offers real applications of statistics that are relevant to today’s business students. The authors motivate students by showing persuasively how the use of statistical techniques in support of business decision-making helps to improve business processes. A variety of computer centered examples and exercises, and a robust, technology-based ancillary package are designed to help students master this subject.

CONTENTS

1. An Introduction to Business Statistics 2. Descriptive Statistics 3. Probability 4. Discrete Random Variables 5. Continuous Random Variables Distribution 6. Sampling Distributions 7. Confidence Intervals 8. Hypothesis Testing 9. Statistical Inferences Based on Two Samples 10. Experimental Design and Analysis of Variance 11. Chi Square Tests 12. Simple Linear Regression Analysis 13. Multiple Regression and Model-Building14. Process Improvement Using Control Charts (On CD ROM) Appendix A. Statistical Tables Appendix B. Covariance and Correlation Appendix C (1) Counting RulesAppendix C (2) The Hypergeometric Appendix D The Normal Probability Plot Appendix E Two-Way Analysis of Variance (On CD-ROM)

International Edition ESSENTIAL STATISTICS IN BUSINESS AND ECONOMICSBy David Doane, Oakland University and Lori Seward, Leeds College of Business, University of Colorado at Boulder2008 (February 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-334693-9 (with Student CD-ROM)ISBN: 978-0-07-334691-5 (Instructor’s Edition with StudentCD-ROM t/a Text)ISBN: 978-0-07-128669-5 [IE with CD]

http://www.mhhe.com/doaneess1e

This 1st Edition Essentials text offers an Excel focused approach to using statistics in business. All statistical concepts are illustrated with applied examples immediately upon introduction. Modern computing tools and applications are introduced, and the text maintains a strong focus on presenting statistical concepts as applied in business--as opposed to providing programming methods used to fi nd a math-ematical solution. Interpretation of results is heavily emphasized, enabling students to take full advantage of Excel to develop and drive problem-solving skills.

CONTENTS

Chapter One: Overview of Statistics Chapter Two: Data Collection Chapter Three: Describing Data Visually Chapter Four: Descriptive Statistics Chapter Five: ProbabilityChapter Six: Discrete Distributions Chapter Seven: Continuous Distributions Chapter Eight: Sampling Distributions and Estimation Chapter Nine: Hypothesis Testing: One Sample Chapter Ten: Hypothesis Testing: Two Sample Tests Chapter Eleven: Analysis of Variance Chapter Twelve: Bivariate Regression Chapter Thirteen: Multiple Regression Chapter Fourteen: Chi-Square Tests

International Edition BASIC STATISTICS FOR BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS6th EditionBy Douglas A Lind, Coastal Carolina University, William Marcal, Univer-sity of Toledo and Samuel Walthen, Coastal Carolina University2008 (November 2007) / 640 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-352142-8 ISBN: 978-0-07-723096-8 (with Student CD)ISBN: 978-0-07-126365-8 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/lindbasic6e

Lind/Marchal/Wathen: Basic Statistics for Business and Economics, Sixth edition is a derivative of the best-selling Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, offering the essential topics of statistical tools and methods delivered in a student friendly, step-by-step format. The text is non-threatening and presents concepts clearly and suc-cinctly with a conversational writing style. All statistical concepts are illustrated with solved applied examples immediately upon introduc-tion. Modern computing tools and applications are introduced, but the text maintains a focus on presenting statistics content as opposed to technology or programming methods, and the sixth edition continues as a “students” text with increased emphasis on interpretation of data and results.

CONTENTS

1 What Is Statistics? 2 Describing Data: Frequency Distributions and Graphic Presenta-tion 3 Describing Data: Numerical Measures 4 Describing Data: Displaying and Exploring Data 5 A Survey of Probability Concepts 6 Discrete Probability Distributions 7 Continuous Probability Distributions 8 Sampling Methods and the Central Limit Theorem 9 Estimation and Confidence Intervals 10 One-Sample Tests of Hypothesis 11 Two-Sample Tests of Hypothesis 12 Analysis of Variance 13 Linear Regression and Correlation 14 Multiple Regression and Correlation Analysis 15 Chi-Square ApplicationsMegaStat for Excel Visual Statistics Appendixes, Tables, Data Sets, Solutions Photo Credits Index

93

BUSINESS STATISTICS

International Edition

STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES IN BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS 13th EditionBy Douglas Lind, Coasta Carolina University, William Marchal, Univer-sity of Toledo and Samuel Wathen, Coastal Carolina University2008 (October 2006) ISBN: 978-0-07-327296-2 (with Student CD)ISBN: 978-0-07-128575-9 [IE with Student CD]

http://www.mhhe.com/lind13e

The new edition of Lind’s Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics is a perennial market best seller due to its comprehensive coverage of statistical concepts and methods delivered in a student-friendly, step-by-step format. The text is non-threatening and presents concepts clearly and succinctly with a conversational writing style. All statistical concepts are illustrated with solved applied examples immediately upon introduction. Self reviews and exercises for each section, and review sections for groups of chapters also support the student learning steps. Modern computing applications (Excel, Min-itab, and MegaStat) are introduced, but the text maintains a focus on presenting statistics concepts as applied in business as opposed to technology or programming methods. The thirteenth edition con-tinues as a students’ text with increased emphasis on interpretation of data and results.

CONTENTS

1 What Is Statistics? 2 Describing Data: Frequency Tables, Frequency Distributions, and Graphic Presentation 3 Describing Data: Numerical Measures 4 Describing Data: Displaying and Exploring Data 5 A Survey of Probability Concepts 6 Discrete Probability Distributions 7 Continuous Probability Distributions 8 Sampling Methods and the Central Limit Theorem 9 Estimation and Confidence Intervals 10 One-Sample Tests of Hypothesis 11 Two-Sample Tests of Hypothesis 12 Analysis of Variance 13 Linear Regression and Correlation 14 Multiple Regressions and Correlation Analysis 15 Index Numbers 16 Time Series and Forecasting 17 Nonparametric Methods: Chi-Square Applications 18 Nonparametric Methods: Analysis of Ranked Data 19 Statistical Process Control and Quality Management 20 An Introduction to Decision Theory : MegaStat for ExcelVisual Statistics 2.0AppendixesPhoto CreditsIndex

NEW

STATISTICS FOR BUSINESS, ECONOMICS, MANAGEMENT & FINANCEBy Gert Nieuwenhuis2008 (December 20080 / 952 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-710987-5McGraw-Hill UK Title

This brand new book in statistics aims to provide an introduction to the key methods and techniques essential to a typical statistics syllabus, whilst also helping students to develop the skills needed to analyse, interpret and prepare data for use in business, economics and related disciplines. Covering the essential methods required at undergraduate level, the book is structured into four parts that deal with descriptive statistics, probability, sample theory and inferential statistics, taking students from the basics through to more advanced topics such as multiple linear regression. Every chapter contains clear descriptions of each technique, illustrated with numerous worked examples to aid students in understanding how to practice statistical methods. The real data used in the examples is drawn from European sources. The text also contains longer case examples set in a European business context, to show how statistics is used everyday in the business en-vironment. Finally, each chapter concludes with a variety of exercises to test students’ ability to apply the theory and attain a high level of competence in using statistics. This comprehensive book is ideal for student of statistics at undergraduate level taking an introductory module in the topic.

FEATURES

Packed with real life examples that help students to apply statis-tics in a European business and economic context. Examples range from economic data such gender gap employment rates worldwide, GDP growth in the EU, the size of households in Denmark, to financial examples such as share prices of Eriksson versus Carlsberg, plus thought-provoking problems such as how to compare women and men’s world record performances in athletics.

Application to Excel throughout for business students plus refer-ences to key techniques in SPSS, allowing flexibility depending on the software used in class by students learning statistics.

Extensive end of chapter exercises- A typical chapter concludes with over 20 exercises for students to test their ability, with real data provided in the text for students to practice their problem-solving skills. Each chapter includes problems which can be done using software such as Excel.

End of chapter summaries recap the main topics, and key sym-bols, formulae and terms are also listed for quick student revision

Comprehensive coverage- from a basic introduction through to multiple linear regression and nonparametric statistics, this 25-chapter text provides flexibility to the lecturer to choose their topic coverage based on the requirements of their module and the needs and abili-ties of their students.

CONTENTS

1. IntroductionDescriptive Statistics2. Tables and graphs3. Measures of location4. Measures of variation5. Skewness (to the right; to the left)6. Pairs of variables7. Linear transformations and combinations8. Notations for samplesProbability9. Definitions of Probability10. Rules for probabilities11. Conditional probabilities





BUSINESS STATISTICS

94

12. Probability distribution and expectation13. Probability distribution and variance14. Other characteristics of probability distributions15. Some discrete probability distributions16. Some continuous probability distributions17. Joint probability distribution of random variablesRandom samples18. Several ways to draw a sample19. Sample proportion F20. Sample mean21. Other sample statisticsBasic inferential statistics22. Statistical procedures23. Point estimation24. Confidence Intervals for mu and pi 25. Hypothesis testing for mu and pi26. Prediction27. Simple linear regressionMore advanced inferential statistics28. Statistical inference about omega-squared29. Comparing two populations30. Multiple linear regression: introduction31. Multiple linear regression: extension32. Multiple linear regression: model deviations33. Time series and prediction34. Analysis of variance 35. Chi-squared tests

NEW

STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT

By Rego Srivastava

2008 (February 2008) / 896 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-066029-8McGraw-Hill India Titles

http://www.mhhe.com/srivastavarego

The book will fi ll the need for a textbook which covers the relevant methods & techniques, illustrate their real-world applications, deals with the subject in the current Indian context, and integrates com-puter-based methodology with manual method. Keeping the needs of the MBA students in view, detailed mathematical derivations have been avoided.

FEATURES

Chapters on (a) Statistical Techniques for Designing and Market-ing of Products and Services and (b) ABC Analysis

Over 50 cases based on live data relating to Indian economy, Indians business environment and one of the Management Institutes in India.

More than 200 illustrations and solved examples.

Boxes containing popular examples of statistics given at ap-propriate places linking them to the text.

Examples and illustrations from all functional areas: marketing, finance, operations & human resource

Comprehensive list of illustrative applications in each Chapter

Excel integration

CONTENTS

Chapter 1—Introduction- Scope and Applications Chapter 2—Types, Sources and Collection of Data Chapter 3—Presentation of Data Chapter 4—Measures of Central Tendency and Dispersion Chapter 5—Probability Chapter 6—Sampling Techniques Chapter 7—Statistical Distributions Chapter 8—Simple Correlation and Regression Analysis Chapter 9—Multiple Correlation and Regression Analysis Chapter 10—Statistical Inference Chapter 11—Analysis of Variance and Design of Experiments Chapter 12—Non-Parametric Tests Chapter 13—Time Series Analysis Chapter 14—‘ABC’ Analysis Chapter 15—Forecasting Methods Chapter 16—Decision Theory Chapter 17—Index Numbers Chapter 18—Role of Statistics in Quality Management Chapter 19—Statistical Techniques for Designing & Marketing of Products & Services Appendix I: Excel--A Tool for Statistical Analysis Appendix II: Symbols, Notations, Some Results and Formulae

International Edition BASIC STATISTICS USING EXCEL AND MEGASTATBy J Burdeane Orris, Butler University2007 (March 2006) ISBN: 978-0-07-321158-9 (with CD)ISBN: 978-0-07-125431-1 [IE with Student CD]

http://www.mhhe.com/orris1e

This new text offers an Excel-focused approach to using statistics in business. All statistical concepts are illustrated with applied ex-amples immediately upon introduction. Modern computing tools and applications are introduced, and the text maintains a strong focus on presenting statistical concepts as applied using Excel, enhanced by MegaStat, the Excel add-in created by the author and used as a standard for all McGraw-Hill/Irwin Business Statistics textbooks. The text enables students to take full advantage of Excel to develop and drive problem-solving skills. As a one-color paperback, it is also a competitive low-cost alternative to most of the higher-priced books in the market.

CONTENTS

Chapter 1 Introduction. Chapter 2 Descriptive Statistics. Chapter 3 Frequency Distributions. Chapter 4 Probability Concepts. Chapter 5 Discrete Probability Distributions. Chapter 6 Normal Distribution. Chapter 7 Sampling and Sampling Distributions. Chapter 8 Confidence Intervals. Chapter 9 Hypothesis Testing Concepts. Chapter 10 Hypothesis Testing Applications. Chapter 11 Analysis of Variance. Chapter 12 Linear Regression Analysis. Chapter 13 Multiple Regression. Chapter 14 Chi-Square Applications. Chapter 15 Time-Series Analysis. Chapter 16 Summary and Integration. Appendix A: Excel Statistical Functions. Appendix B: Hypothesis Test Summaries. Appendix C: Glossary and Key Equations. Appendix D: Tables. Appendix E: Tutorial List

95

BUSINESS STATISTICS

International Edition PRACTICAL BUSINESS STATISTICS5th EditionBy Andrew F Siegel, University of Washington2003 / 180 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-282125-3 (with Student CD-ROM)ISBN: 978-0-07-121338-7 [IE with CD-ROM]

http://www.mhhe.com/siegel5e

CONTENTS

Part 1: Introduction: Defining the Role of Statistics in Business 1. Introduction: Defining the Role of Statistics in Business 2. Data Structures: Classifying the Various Types of Data Sets 3. Histograms: Looking at the Distribution of Data 4. Landmark Summaries: Interpreting Typical Values and Percen-tiles 5. Variability: Dealing with Diversity Part 2: Probability 6. Probability: Understanding Random Situations 7. Random Variables: Working with Uncertain Numbers Part 3: Statistical Inference 8. Random Sampling 9. Confidence Intervals: Admitting that estimates are not exact 10. Hypothesis Testing: Deciding between reality and confidence Part 4: Regression and Time Series 11. Correaltion and Regression: Measuring and predicting relation-ships 12. Multiple Regression: Predicting oen factor from several others 13. Report Writing: Communicating the results of a multiple regres-sion 14. Time Series: Understanding Changes over time Part 5: Methods and Applications 15. Anova: Testing for Differneces among many samples, and much more. 16. Nonparametrics: Testing with Ordinal Data or Nonnormal Dis-tributions 17. Chi-Squared Analysis: Testing for Patterns in Qualitive Data 18. Quality Control: Recognizing and Managing Variation Appendix A: Employee Database Appendix B: Donations Database Appendix C: Self-Test: Solutions to selected problem and database exercisesAppendix D: Statistical Tables Appendix E: Statpad Quick Reference Guide

International Edition STATISTICSA First Course, 6th EditionBy Donald Sanders, Education Consultant and Robert Smidt, California Polytechnic State University - San Luis Obispo2000 / 704 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-233217-9 (with CD-ROM) ISBN: 978-0-07-116984-4 [IE with CD-ROM]

CONTENTS

Chapter 1: Let’s Get Started Chapter 2: Thinking Critically about Data: Liars, Liars, and a Few Statisticians Chapter 3: Descriptive Statistics Chapter 4: Probability Concepts Chapter 5: Probability Distributions Chapter 6: Sampling Concepts Chapter 7: Estimating Parameters Chapter 8: Testing Hypotheses: One Sample Procedures Chapter 9: Inference: Two-Sample Procedures

Chapter 10: Analysis of Variance Chapter 11: Chi-Square Tests: Goodness-of-Fit and Contingency Table Methods Chapter 12: Linear Regression and Correlation Chapter 13: Non parametric Statistical Methods Appendices 1: Selected Values of the Binomial Probability Distribu-tion 2: Areas under the Standard Normal Probability Distribution 3: A Brief Table of Random Numbers Distribution 4: Areas for t Distribu-tions Distribution 5: Distribution Tables Distribution 6: Chi-Square Distribution Distribution 7: Critical Values of a=.05 and a=.01 in the Wilcoxon Signed Rank Test Distribution 8: Distribution of U in the Mann-Whitney Test Distribution 9: Critical Values for r in the Runs Test for Randomness Distribution 10: Selected Values of the Poisson Probability Distribution Distribution 11: Entering and Editing Data in Minitab Distribution 12: Answers to Odd-Numbered Exercises

Business Statistics Supplements

NEW

BASIC STATISTICS USING EXCEL FOR USE WITH STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES IN BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS14th EditionBy Douglas Lind, Coasta Carolina University, William Marchal, Univer-sity of Toledo and Robert Mason2010 (January 2009)ISBN: 978-0-07-727001-8


SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS3rd EditionBy Murray R Spiegel (deceased), John J Schiller and R Alu Srinivasan, Temple University2009 (August 2008) / 432 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-154425-2A Schaum Professional Reference Title

This review for college courses in probability and statistics has been updated to refl ect the latest course scope and sequences. This new edition expands the explanation of theorems (and advanced formu-lae), making it an especially authoritative reference for engineering and science majors.

CONTENTS

Part I: Probability 1. Basic Probability 2. Random Variables and Probability Distributions 3. Mathematical Expectation 4. Special Probability Distributions Part II: Statistics 5. Sampling Theory 6. Estimation Theory

BUSINESS STATISTICS

96

7. Tests of Hypotheses and Significance 8. Curve Fitting, Regression, and Correlation 9. Analysis of Variance 10. Nonparametric Tests 11. Bayesian Methods

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF BEGINNING STATISTICS2nd EditionBy Larry J. Stephens, University of Nebraska, Omaha2006 / 416 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-145932-7 A Schaum Professional Reference Title

This study tool is ideal if you wish to master the basics for an intro-ductory course or solo study. This new edition includes output from Excel, SAS, SPSS, STATISTIX, and MINITAB, all of which are now in general use for college courses on statistics at this level. It will also include up-to-date statistical examples taken from the latest media sources.

International Edition SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF BUSINESS STATISTICS4th EditionBy Leonard J. Kazmier, Arizona State University2004 / 432 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-141080-9 ISBN: 978-0-07-123679-9 [IE] - Out of PrintA Schaum Professional Reference Title

Conforming to the current business statistics curriculum, this fourth edition of Schaums Outline of Business Statistics refl ects recent changes in the course as well as in general practice, including new sections in each chapter on the application of Excel—the most used program in offi ces throughout the world—making this the fi rst book to address this change in the curriculum. The fourth edition continues to provide a direct and effective tool for learning the fundamentals of business statistics without the technical verbiage.

SCHAUM’S EASY OUTLINE OF BUSINESS STATISTICSBy Leonard J. Kazmier, Arizona State University2003 / 160 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-139876-3 A Schaum Professional Reference Title

CONTENTS

Chapter 1: Analyzing Business Data Chapter 2: Statistical Presentations and Graphical Analysis Chapter 3: Describing Business Data: Measures of Location Chapter 4: Describing Business Data: Measures of Variability Chapter 5: Probability Chapter 6: Probability / Distributions for Discrete Random Variables Chapter 7: Probability Distributions for Continuous Random Vari-ables Chapter 8: Sampling Distributions and Confidence Intervals for the Mean Chapter 9: Other Confidence Intervals Chapter 10: Testing Hypotheses Concerning the Value of the Popula-tion Mean Chapter 11: Testing Other Hypotheses Chapter 12: The Chi-Square TestChapter 13: Analysis of Variance Chapter 14: Linear Regression and Correlation Analysis Chapter 15: Multiple Regression and Correlation Chapter 16: Time Series Analysis and Business Forecasting Chapter 17: Index Numbers for Business and Economic Data Chapter 18: Decision Analysis: Payoff Tables And Decision Trees Chapter 19: Decision Analysis: The Use of the Sample Information Chapter 20: Statistical Process ControlChapter 21: Nonparametric StatisticsAppendices

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF STATISTICS AND ECONOMETRICS2nd EditionBy Dominick Salvatore and Derrick Reagle of Fordham University2002 / 256 pages ISBN: 978-0-07-134852-2 A Professional Reference Title

CONTENTS

Introduction. Descriptive Statistics.Probability and Probability Distributions. Statistics Inference: Estimation. Statistical Inference: Testing Hypothesis. Statistics Examination. Simple Regression Analysis.Multiple Regression Analysis. Problems in Regression Analysis. Further Techniques and Applications in Regression Analysis. Simultaneous-Equations Methods. Time Series Econometrics. Statistics Examination. Bionomial Distribution. Poisson Distribution.Standard Normal Distribution. Table of Random Numbers. Student t Distribution. Chi-Square Distribution. F Distribution. Durbin-Watson Statistics. Critical Values of Runs in the Run Tests.





97

BUSINESS STATISTICS

Business Forecasting


BUSINESS FORECASTING 6th Edition

By J Holton Wilson, Central Michigan University, Barry Keating, University of Notre Dame and John Galt Solutions Inc

2009 (December 2009) ISBN: 978-0-07-337364-5ISBN: 978-0-07-730930-5 (with Student CD-ROM)ISBN: 978-0-07-127609-2 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/business/opsci/wilson6e

The Sixth Edition of Business Forecasting is the most practical fore-casting book on the market with the most powerful software—Forecast X. This edition presents a broad-based survey of business forecasting methods including subjective and objective approaches. As always, the author team of Wilson and Keating deliver practical how-to fore-casting techniques, along with dozens of real world data sets while theory and math are held to a minimum. This Sixth Edition includes Forecast X software updated for Excel 2007 and Vista. Forecast X is the most comprehensive software tool available in this market and the new version is also backwards compatible for XP Excel 2003 systems. This Excel-based tool effectively uses wizards and many tools to make forecasting easy and understandable.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

New Chapter 10 on Data Mining included which helps students prepare for data base driven and ERP oriented business environ-ment.

All examples and screenshots updated to Excel 2007-Vista environment.

CONTENTS

1 Introduction to Business Forecasting 2 The Forecast Process, Data Considerations, and Model Selection 3 Moving Averages and Exponential Smoothing 4 Introduction to Forecasting with Regression Methods 5 Forecasting with Multiple Regression 6 Time-Series Decomposition 7 ARIMA Type Forecasting Models 8 Combination and Collaborative Forecasting 9 Forecast Implementation 10 Data Mining

International Edition FORECASTING, PRINCIPLES AND APPLICATIONBy Stephen Delurgio, University of Missouri - Kansas City1998 ISBN: 978-0-07-561120-2 (with Disk)-Out of PrintISBN: 978-0-07-115998-2 [IE]

CONTENTS

Part I Foundations of Forecasting Chapter 1 Planning and Forecasting Chapter 2 Statistical Fundamentals for Forecasting Appendix A Expected Values Appendix B Statistics for White noise Chapter 3 Introduction to Regression Analysis Supplement Cross Correlation Functions Part II Univariate Methods Chapter 4 Simple Exponential Smoothing Chapter 5 Decomposition and Census II Methods Chapter 6 Trend-Seasonal Smoothing Supplement Fourier Series Analysis Part III Univariate ARIMA Methods Chapter 7 ARIMA Introduction Appendix A Useful Statistical Definitions Appendix B White noise and Stationarity Appendix C Theoretical ACF’s for an ARIMA (1,1,0) Process Appendix D Theoretical ACF’s for an ARIMA (0,0,1) Process Appendix E Checking Bounds of Invertibility and Stationarity Appendix F Example ARIMA data sets Appendix G Partial Autocorrelations and the Yule-Walker Equations Chapter 8 ARIMA Applications Chapter 9 ARIMA Forecast Profiles Part IV Multivariate/Causal Methods Chapter 10 Multiple Regression of Time Series Appendix Deriving Normal Equations Chapter 11 Econometric Methods Chapter 12 ARIMA Intervention Analysis Chapter 13 Multivariate ARIMA - Transfer Functions Appendix Estimat-ing Impulse Response Weights Part V Cyclical, Qualitative, and Artificial Intelligence Methods Chapter 14 Cyclical Forecasting Methods Chapter 14A Supplement-Some general Theories explaining Cycles Chapter 15 Qualitative and Technological Forecasting Methods Chapter 16 Expert Systems, Neural Networks, and Genetic Algo-rithms Part VI Combining, Validation, and Managerial Issues Chapter 17 Combining, Control, and validation Methods Chapter 18 Method Characteristics, Accuracy, and Data Sources Appendices: A Forecasting Data Sources B Outlier Detection and Adjustment Procedures

International Edition DECISION MAKING AND FORECASTINGBy Kneale Marshall, U.S. Naval Postgraduate School, and Robert Oliver, University of California-Berkeley 1995 / 384 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-048027-8 (Out of Print) ISBN: 978-0-07-113970-0 [IE]

BUSINESS STATISTICS

98

Business Research Method

NEW UK Adaptation

BUSINESS RESEARCH METHODS2nd Edition

By Boris Blumberg, University of Maastricht, Donald R Cooper, Florida Atlantic University and Pamela S Schindler, Wittenberg University

2008 (March 2008) / 770 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-711745-0 McGraw-Hill UK Title

http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/blumberg

Business Research Methods second edition presents a balanced and comprehensive account of business research that is engaging, rigorous and up-to-date. The text explores all the topics involved in the research process, both theoretical and practical, in an accessible manner. This edition also boasts a number of new features and ex-amples to thoroughly explain and illustrate the concepts, processes and practices of good business research.

NEW TO THIS EDITION

New chapter on Case Studies and Qualitative Interviews: Inclu-sion of this brand new chapter provides a balanced account of the subject. Further coverage of quantitative business research methods is also integrated throughout the text.

Running case study: There is a recurring case study in each chapter, which follows the progress of a government-sponsored re-search programme. This draws out the key themes of each chapter and clearly illustrates concepts to students.

Example of a good proposal: Chapter 2 contains an annotated example of a good research proposal to help students identify and adhere to good practice.

Up-to-date coverage: New topics are integrated throughout the book to ensure the most contemporary and up-to-date coverage. These include web based data bases, web based surveys and there is also a new section on content analysis.

CONTENTS

Part I Essentials of Research Chapter 1 The nature of business and management research Chapter 2 Research process and proposal Chapter 3 Literature review Chapter 4 Research Ethics Part II Research Approaches Chapter 5 Quantitative and qualitative research Chapter 6 Sampling strategies: from one case to the whole popula-tion Chapter 7 Survey Research Chapter 8 Secondary data, archival sources and content analysis Chapter 9 Observational, action and ethnographic research Chapter 10 Case Studies and Qualitative Interviews (NEW!) Chapter 11 Experiments Part III Research Instruments

Chapter 12 Measurements and scales Chapter 13 Field work: questionnaire and responses Chapter 14 Writing and presenting research outcomes Part IV Statistical background (on CD-ROM) Chapter 15 Data preparation and description Chapter 16 Exploring, displaying and examining data Chapter 17 Hypothesis testing Chapter 18 Measure of association Chapter 19 Multivariate analysis: an overview

International Edition BUSINESS RESEARCH METHODS10th EditionBy Donald Cooper, Florida Atlantic University - Boca Rator and Pamela Schindler, Wittenberg University2008 (November 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-722487-5 (with Student DVD)ISBN: 978-0-07-126333-7 [IE with Student DVD]

http://www.mhhe.com/cooper10e

In its Anniversary 10th Edition, authors Cooper and Schindler continue to provide the most timely, richest, and most comprehensive coverage of the research experience in Business Research Methods. Students and instructors will fi nd thorough coverage of business research top-ics - including the best coverage of questionnaire design - backed by solid theory. The authors are successful marketing research consult-ants; their expertise is evident in the realistic Snapshots, Close-Ups, PicProfi les, and case studies found in the text. Managerial decision making is the underlying theme, and topics and applications are pre-sented and organized in a manner that allows students to thoroughly understand business research topics and functions. Consequently, the structure of the text encourages and supports completion of an in-depth business research project during the semester.

CONTENTS

Part I: Introduction to Business Research1. Research in Business 2. Ethics in Business Research 3. Thinking Like a Researcher 4. The Research Process: An Overview 5. Clarifying the Research Question through Secondary Data and ExplorationAppendix 5A: Bibliographic Database Searches Appendix 5B: Advanced SearchesPart II: The Design of Business Research6. Research Design: An Overview 7. Qualitative Research 8. Observation Studies 9. Surveys 10. ExperimentsAppendix 10A: Complex Experimental Designs Appendix 10B: Test MarketsPart III: The Sources and Collection of Data11. Measurement 12. Measurement Scales 13. Questionnaires and InstrumentsAppendix 13A: Crafting Effective Measurement Questions Appendix 13B: Pretesting Options and Discoveries14. SamplingAppendix 14A: Determining Sample SizePart IV: Insights from Findings: Analysis and Presentation of Data15. Data Preparation and DescriptionAppendix 15A: Describing Data Statistically16. Exploring, Displaying, and Examining Data 17. Hypothesis Testing 18. Measures of Association 19. Multivariate Analysis: An Overview 20. Presenting Results: Oral and Written Reports Case Abstracts

99

BUSINESS STATISTICS

Appendices:A. Business Research Requests and Proposals (with Sample RFP) B. Focus Group Discussion Guide C. Nonparametric Significance Tests D. Selected Statistical TablesReferences and Readings Glossary of Key Terms

Linear Statistics / Regression

International Edition APPLIED LINEAR STATISTICAL MODELS5th EditionBy Michael H Kutner, Emory University, Chris J Nachtsheim, University of Minnesota, John Neter, University of Georgia and William Li, Univer-sity of Minnesota2005 / 1344 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-310874-2 (with Student CD)ISBN: 978-0-07-112221-4 [IE with Student CD]

CONTENTS

Part1: Simple Linear Regression 1: Linear Regression with One Predictor Variable 2: Inferences in Regression and Correlation Analysis 3: Diagnostics and Remedial Measures 4: Simultaneous Inferences and Other Topics in Regression Analy-sis 5: Matrix Approach to Simple Linear Regression Analysis Part 2: Multiple Linear Regression 6: Multiple Regression I 7: Multiple Regression II 8: Building the Regression Model I: Models for Quantitative and Qualitative Predictors 9: Building the Regression Model II: Model Selection and Validation 10: Building the Regression Model III: Diagnostics 11: Remedial Measures and Alternative Regression Techniques 12: Auto-correlation in Time Series Data Part 3: Nonlinear Regression 13: Introduction to Nonlinear Regression and Neural Networks 14: Logistic Regression, Poisson Regression, and Generalized Linear Models Part 4: Single Factor Studies 15: Introduction to Analysis of Variance and the Design of Experi-ments 16: Single-Factor ANOVA: Model and Tests 17: Analysis of Factor Level Effects in Single Factor Studies 18: ANOVA Diagnostics and Remedial Measures Part 5: Multifactor Studies and Blocking 19: Two-Factor Studies—Equal Sample Sizes 20: Two-Factor Studies—One Case per Cell 21: Randomized Complete Block Designs 22: Analysis of Covariance 23: Two -Factor Studies—Unequal Sample Sizes 24: Multifactor ANOVA Model and Tests 25: Random and Mixed-Effects Models Part 6: Special-Purpose Experimental Designs 26: Nested Designs, Subsampling, and Partially Nested Designs 27: Repeated Measures and Related Designs 28: Latin Square, Balanced Incomplete Block, and Related Designs 29: Exploratory Experiments-Two-Level Factorial and Fractional Factorial Designs 30: Response Surface Experiments

International Edition APPLIED LINEAR REGRESSION MODELS4th EditionBy John Neter, University of Georgia, Michael H Kutner, William Wasser-man, and Chris Nachtsheim, University of Minnesota2004 / 672 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-301466-1 (with Student CD-ROM)ISBN: 978-0-07-127480-7 [IE]

CONTENTS

Part 1 - Simple Linear Regression 1 Linear Regression with One Predictor Variable 2 Inferences in Regression and Correlation Analysis 3 Diagnostics and Remedial Measures 4 Simultaneous Inferences and Other Topics in Regression Analy-sis 5 Matrix Approach to Simple Linear Regression Analysis Part 2 - Multiple Linear Regression6 Multiple Regression I 7 Multiple Regression II 8 Building the Regression Model I: Models for Quantitative and Qualitative Predictors 9 Building the Regression Model II: Model Selection and Validation 10 Building the Regression Model III: Diagnostics 11 Remedial Measures and Alternative Regression Techniques 12 Autocorrelation in Time Series Data Part 3 - Nonlinear Regression 13 Introduction to Nonlinear Regression and Neural Networks 14 Logistic Regression, Poisson Regression, and Generalized Linear Models

Others

DATA INTERPRETATION AND LOGICAL REASONING FOR CAT3rd EditionBy Arun Sharma2006 (August 2006) ISBN: 978-0-07-063564-7 McGraw-Hill India Title

(Details unavailable)





BUSINESS STATISTICS

100

BU

SINE

SS MAT

H

101

Business Math ................................................................................................. 103 Business Math Supplements ........................................................................... 104

NEW TITLES

102

103

BUSINESS MATH

Business Math

International Edition THE MATHEMATICS OF MONEY WITH STUDENT CDBy Timothy Biehler2008 (June 2007) / 608 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-352482-5 (with CD)ISBN: 978-0-07-110129-5 [IE]

The Mathematics of Money: Math for Business and Personal Finance covers all the traditional topics of the business math course, but with a more algebraic focus than many of the texts currently on the mar-ket. The text develops a solid understanding of percent and interest early, then applies that foundation to other applications in business and personal fi nance. While it is appropriate for students of all levels, the book takes the approach that even if students are coming into the class with only high school math, neither they nor the instructor need to be afraid of algebra; it takes care to clearly present and reinforce the formulas given and to consistently return to them and apply the material to contexts that are relevant to the students.

CONTENTS

Part 1: Core Mathematical Tools Chapter 1: Simple Interest Chapter 2: Simple Discount Chapter 3: Compound Interest Chapter 4: Annuities Chapter 5: SpreadsheetsPart 2: Specific Applications Chapter 6: Investments Chapter 7: Retirement Plans Chapter 8: Mathematics of Pricing Chapter 9: Taxes Chapter 10: Consumer Finance Chapter 11: International Finance Chapter 12: Financial Statements Chapter 13: Insurance and Risk Management Chapter 14: Payroll and Inventory Chapter 15: Evaluating Projected Cash Flows Chapter 16: Business Statistics

International Edition PRACTICAL BUSINESS MATH PROCEDURES9th EditionBy Jeffrey Slater, North Shore Community College2008 (October 2007) / 736 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-721456-2 (with DVD)ISBN: 978-0-07-128371-7 [IE with Student DVD, WSJ Insert & Business Math Handbook]

http://www.mhhe.com/slater9e

Practical Business Math Procedures is a comprehensive introduction to the concepts and applications of mathematics to personal and commercial business problems. The text uses basic arithmetic and problem solving techniques and illustrates their use in retailing, inter-est and loans, banking, payroll, taxes, investments, insurance, and a variety of other business situations. The text is well known for the motivating integration of interesting real world examples and photos from the Wall Street Journal, Kiplinger’s, and many other business journals. PBMP’s is the most popular and widely used book for this course and is carefully written and developed to support students with little math experience with practice quizzes, thousands of exercises, color coded procedures and diagrams, supporting tutorial videos on DVD, and the highest standards of reliability and cleanliness.

CONTENTS

1. Whole Numbers: How to Dissect and Solve Word Problems 2. Fractions 3. Decimals 4. Banking 5. Solving for the Unknown: A How-To Approach for Solving Equa-tions 6. Percents and Their Applications 7. Discounts: Trade and Cash 8. Markups and Markdowns: Perishables and Breakeven Analysis 9. Payroll 10. Simple Interest 11. Promissory Notes, Simple Discount Notes, and the Discount Process 12. Compound Interest and Present Value 13. Annuities and Sinking Funds 14. Installment Buying, Rule of 78, and Revolving Charge Credit Cards 15. The Cost of Home Ownership 16. How to Read, Analyze, and Interpret Financial Reports 17. Depreciation 18. Inventory and Overhead 19. Sales, Excise, and Property Tax 20. Life, Fire, and Auto Insurance 21. Stocks, Bonds, and Mutual Funds 22. Statistics Appendix A: Additional Homework by Learning Unit Appendix B: Check Figures Appendix C: Glossary Appendix D: Metric System





BUSINESS MATH

104

PRACTICAL BUSINESS MATH PROCEDURES Brief Edition, 9th EditionBy Jeffrey Slater, Northshore Community College2008 (October 2007) ISBN: 978-0-07-721457-9 (with Student DVD, WSJ Insert, BuMath Handbook)

http://www.mhhe.com/slater9e

Practical Business Math Procedures is a comprehensive introduction to the concepts and applications of mathematics to personal and commercial business problems. The text uses basic arithmetic and problem solving techniques and illustrates their use in retailing, inter-est and loans, banking, payroll, taxes, investments, insurance, and a variety of other business situations. The text is well known for the motivating integration of interesting real world examples and photos from the Wall Street Journal, Kiplinger’s, and many other business journals. PBMP’s is the most popular and widely used book for this course and is carefully written and developed to support students with little math experience with practice quizzes, thousands of exercises, color coded procedures and diagrams, supporting tutorial videos on DVD, and the highest standards of reliability and cleanliness.

CONTENTS

1. Whole Numbers: How to Dissect and Solve Word Problems 2. Fractions 3. Decimals 4. Banking 5. Solving for the Unknown: A How-To Approach for Solving Equa-tions 6. Percents and Their Applications 7. Discounts: Trade and Cash 8. Markups and Markdowns 9. Payroll 10. Simple Interest 11. Promissory Notes, Simple Discount Notes, and the Discount Process 12. Compound Interest and Present ValueAppendix A: Additional Homework by Learning Unit Appendix B: Check Figures Appendix C: Glossary

Business Math Supplements

SCHAUM’S OUTLINE OF BASIC BUSINESS MATHEMATICS2nd EditionBy Joel J Lerner, Sulivan County Community College2009 (March 2009) / 249 pagesISBN: 978-0-07-161158-9A Schaum Professional Reference Title

Schaum’s Outline of Basic Business Mathematics helps beginning business students learn the practical application of mathematical concepts used in the business world, including stock market ap-plications, appreciation rates, and averaging inventory controls. This book differs from Schaum’s Outline of Business Mathematics in that it focuses exclusively on business (rather than business and finance) and uses basic math in its applications. The book reviews course fundamentals in easy-to-understand language with illustrative examples. The outline supplements business mathematics texts and is best suited to two-year college business courses.

CONTENTS

Review of Arithmetic. Ratio, Proportion, and Percent. Payroll. Depreciation. Interest and Discount. Annuities and Their Applications. Stocks and Bonds. Buying. Selling. Insurance. Introduction to Statistics.





TITLE INDEX

105

AAnnual Editions: Economics, 35e Cole 20, 39

Applied Linear Regression Models, 4e Neter 99

Applied Linear Statistical Models, 5e Kutner 99

Applied Statistics in Business and Economics with Student CD, 2e Doane 91

BBasic Econometrics, 5e Gujarati 48

Basic Statistics for Business and Economics, 6e Lind 92

Basic Statistics Using Excel and Megastat Orris 94

Basic Statistics Using Excel for Use with Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 1e Lind 95

Business Dynamics: Systems Thinking and Modeling for a Complex World Sterman 65

Business Environment, 2e [India] Paul 48

Business Forecasting, 6e Wilson 97

Business Modeling with Spreadsheet [Asian] Leong 69

Business Research Methods, 2e [UK] Blumberg 98

Business Reserach Methods, 10e Cooper 98

Business Statistics in Practice, 5e Bowerman 90

CChinese Economy [Asian] Cai/Lin 62

Complete Business Statistics, 7e Aczel 90

Concise Guide to Macroeconomics Moss 27

Contemporary Labor Economics, 8e McConnell 57

DData Interpretation and Logical Reasoning for CAT, 3e [India] Sharma 99

Decision Making and Forecasting Marshall 97

Designing and Managing the Supply Chain, 3e Simchi-Levi 80

EEconometric Methods, 4e Johnston 50

Econometric Models and Economic Forecasts, 4e Pindyck 50

Econometrics Schmidt 49

Economic Principles, 2e [Aust] Jackson 18

Economics for Business, 2e [UK] Begg 39

Economics of European Integration, 3e (The) [UK] Baldwin 61

Economics of Organizations and Strategy (The) [UK] Rickard 46

TITLE INDEX

106

Economics of Social Issues, 18e Sharp 41

Economics, 18e McConnell 14

Economics, 18e Samuelson 19

Economics, 19e Samuelson 10

Economics, 7e Colander 17

Economics, 8e Slavin 18

Economics, 9e [UK] Begg 16

Economics, 9e Slavin 16

Economics: The Basics Mandel 37

Economy Today, 11e (The) Schiller 17

Environmental Economics [UK] Anand 47

Environmental Economics, 5e Field 47

Essentials of Business Statistics, 2e Bowerman 92

Essentials of Business Statistics, 3e Bowerman 89

Essentials of Econometrics, 3e Gujarati 49

Essentials of Econometrics, 4e Gujarati 48

Essentials of Economics Brue 38

Essentials of Economics, 2e Brue 10, 35

Essentials of Economics, 7e Schiller 38

Essentials Statistics in Business and Economics Doane 92

Essentials Statistics in Business and Economics, 2e Doane 89

European Union: Economics, Policies and History, 2e (The) [UK] Nello 61

Experiments with Economic Principles: Microeconomics, 2e Bergstrom 21

FFactory Physics, 3e Hopp 72

Flying High in a Competitive Industry: Cost Effective Service Excellence at Singapore Airlines Heracleous 77

Forecasting, Principles and Application Delurgio 97

Foundations of Economics, 4e [UK] Begg 36

Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Economics, 4e Chiang 51

HHong Kong Economy: From Recovery to Restructure (The) [Asian] Li 62

IInteractive Models for Operations and Supply Chain Management with CD Finch 68

International Economics, 14e Pugel 54

International Economics, 5e [India] Cherunilam 55

International Economics, 6e Appleyard 55

TITLE INDEX

107

International Economics, Globalization, and Policy: A Reader, 5e King 53

Introduction to Business Data Mining Olson 82

Introduction to Information Systems Project Management: A Systems Approach, 2e Olson 74

Introduction to Management Science Stevenson 70

Introduction to Management Science: A Modeling and Case Studies Approach with Spreadsheets, 3e Hillier 70

Introduction to Operations Research, 9e Hillier 83

Issues in Economics Today, 4e Guell 40

JJuran’s Quality Control Handbook, 5e Juran 76

LLabor Economics, 5e Borjas 56

Logistics & Supply Chain Management [UK] Jonsson 79

MMacro Economy Today, 11e (The) Schiller 26

Macroeconomics, 10e Dornbusch 42

Macroeconomics, 18e McConnell 24

Macroeconomics, 18e Samuelson 28

Macroeconomics, 19e Samuelson 22

Macroeconomics, 2e [Aust] Dornbusch 43

Macroeconomics, 2e DeLong 43

Macroeconomics, 7e Colander 26

Macroeconomics, 8e [Aust] Jackson 27

Macroeconomics, 8e Slavin 27

Macroeconomics, 9e Slavin 25

Macroeconomics, Brief Edition McConnell 22

Macroeconomics: Theory and Policy, 3e [India] Gupta 42

Make or Break: How Manufacturers Can Leap from Decline to Revitalization Grichnik 74

Management Lessons From Mayo Clinic: Inside One of the World’s Most Admired Service Berry 77

Organizations

Managerial Economics & Organizational Architecture, 5e Brickley 45

Managerial Economics and Business Strategy, 6e Baye 46

Managerial Economics, 9e Thomas 46

Managing Project and Service Development: Text and Cases Thomke 73

Manufacturing Planning and Control Systems, 5e Vollmann 72

Mastering Project Management: Applying Advanced Concepts to Systems Thinking, Control & Lewis 84

Evaluation, Resource Allocation, 2e

TITLE INDEX

108

Matching Supply with Demand: An Introduction to Operations Management, 2e Cachon 65, 78

Mathematics for Economics and Business [UK] Taylor 50

Mathematics of Money with Student CD (The) Biehler 103

Micro Economy Today, 11e (The) Schiller 34

Microeconomics Bernheim 44

Microeconomics and Behavior, 7e Frank 44

Microeconomics, 18e McConnell 30

Microeconomics, 18e Samuelson 35

Microeconomics, 19e Samuelson 29

Microeconomics, 2e [UK] Morgan 43

Microeconomics, 3e Katz 45

Microeconomics, 7e Colander 33

Microeconomics, 8e [Aust] Jackson 35

Microeconomics, 8e Slavin 34

Microeconomics, 9e Slavin 32

Microeconomics, Brief Edition McConnell 28

Money, Banking and Financial Markets, 2e Cecchetti 52

OOperations and Supply Management Jacobs 68

Operations and Supply Management, 12e Jacobs 66

Operations Management, 10e Stevenson 67

Operations Management, 7e Knod 69

Operations Management: Contemporary Concepts and Cases, 4e Schroeder 68

Operations Management: Integrating Manufacturing and Services, 5e Davis 69

Operations Now: Supply Chain Profitability and Performance with Student DVD, 3e Finch 67

Operations Strategy: Competing in the 21st Century Beckman 74

PPower of Microeconomics CD-ROM (The) Navarro 19

Practical Business Math Procedures, 9e Slater 103

Practical Business Math Procedures, Brief Edition, 9e Slater 104

Practical Business Statistics, 5e Siegel 95

Principles and Tools for Supply Chain Management with Student CD-ROM Webster 81

Principles of Economics [Asian] Frank 12

Principles of Economics, 2e [UK] McDowell 13

Principles of Economics, 4e Frank 10

Principles of Economics, Brief Edition Frank 12

Principles of Macroeconomics, 2e [Aust] Bernanke 25

Principles of Macroeconomics, 4e Frank 23

TITLE INDEX

109

Principles of Macroeconomics, Brief Edition Frank 24

Principles of Microeconomics [Aust] Frank 34

Principles of Microeconomics Miller 31

Principles of Microeconomics, 2e [Aust] Frank 33

Principles of Microeconomics, 4e Frank 29

Principles of Microeconomics, Brief Edition Frank 29

Production and Operations Analysis, 6e Nahmias 71

Project Management, 5e Cleland 85

Project Management: 24 Steps to Help You Master Any Project Heerkens 85

Project Management: The Managerial Process, 4e Gray 73

Public Economics, 2e [Aust] Abelson 59

Public Finance Seidman 58

Public Finance, 8e Rosen 60

Purchasing and Supply Management Benton 81

Purchasing and Supply Management, 13e Leenders 82

QQuality Management, 3e Gitlow 75

Quality Planning and Analysis: From Product Development Through Use, 5e Gryna 75

Quantitative Methods for Business, 2e [UK] Dewhurst 71

Quantitative Techniques in Management, 3e [India] Vohra 71

SSchaum’s Easy Outline of Business Statistics Kazmier 96

Schaum’s Easy Outline of Introduction to Mathematical Economics Dowling 51

Schaum’s Outline of Basic Business Mathematics, 2e Lerner 104

Schaum’s Outline of Beginning Statistics, 2e Stephens 96

Schaum’s Outline of Business Statistics, 4e Kazmier 96

Schaum’s Outline of Easy Outline of Principles of Economics Salvatore 20

Schaum’s Outline of International Economics, 4e Salvatore 56

Schaum’s Outline of Introduction to Mathematical Economics, 3e Dowling 52

Schaum’s Outline of Macroeconomics, 3e Diulio 21

Schaum’s Outline of Microeconomic Theory, 4e Salvatore 60

Schaum’s Outline of Operations Research, 2e Bronson 83

Schaum’s Outline of Principles of Economics, 2e Salvatore 21

Schaum’s Outline of Probability and Statistics, 3e Spiegel 95

Schaum’s Outline of Statistics and Econometrics, 2e Salvatore 50, 96

Service Management, 6e Fitzsimmons 76

SimProject Version 2.0 Passcode (Standalone) with MS Project 2007, 4e Pinto 73

Spreadsheet Modeling for Business Decisions Kros 70

TITLE INDEX

110

State of the Unions: How Labor Can Strengthen the Middle Class, Improve Our Economy, Dine 57

and Regain Political Influence

Statistical Quality Control, 7e Grant 76

Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 13e Lind 93

Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 14e Lind 89

Statistics for Business, Economics, Management & Finance Nieuwenhuis 93

Statistics for Management [India] Srivastava 94

Statistics: A First Course, 6e Sanders 95

Structure of Economics: A Mathematical Analysis, 3e (The) Silberberg 51

Supply Chain Cost Management Anklesaria 84

Supply Chain Logistics Management, 3e Bowersox 77

Supply Chain Management [India] Rangarajan 80

Supply Chain Science Hopp 79

Supply Management, 8e Burt 78

TTaking Sides: Clashing Views on Economic Issues, 13e Bonello 41

Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Economic Issues, 14e Bonello 39

UUrban Economics, 7e O’Sullivan 58

WWorld-Class Warehousing and Material Handling Frazelle 84

111

AUTHOR INDEX

AAbelson Public Economics, 2e [Aust] 59

Aczel Complete Business Statistics, 7e 90

Anand Environmental Economics [UK] 47

Anklesaria Supply Chain Cost Management 84

Appleyard International Economics, 6e 55

BBaldwin Economics of European Integration, 3e (The) [UK] 61

Baye Managerial Economics and Business Strategy, 6e 46

Beckman Operations Strategy: Competing in the 21st Century 74

Begg Economics, 9e [UK] 16

Begg Economics for Business, 2e [UK] 39

Begg Foundations of Economics, 4e [UK] 36

Benton Purchasing and Supply Management 81

Bergstrom Experiments with Economic Principles: Microeconomics, 2e 21

Bernanke Principles of Macroeconomics, 2e [Aust] 25

Bernheim Microeconomics 44

Berry Management Lessons From Mayo Clinic: Inside One of the World’s Most Admired Service Organizations 77

Biehler Mathematics of Money with Student CD (The) 103

Blumberg Business Research Methods, 2e [UK] 98

Bonello Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Economic Issues, 13e 41

Bonello Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Economic Issues, 14e 39

Borjas Labor Economics, 5e 56

Bowerman Business Statistics in Practice, 5e 90

Bowerman Essentials of Business Statistics, 2e 92

Bowerman Essentials of Business Statistics, 3e 89

Bowersox Supply Chain Logistics Management, 3e 77

Brickley Managerial Economics & Organizational Architecture, 5e 45

Bronson Schaum’s Outline of Operations Research, 2e 83

Brue Essentials of Economics 38

Brue Essentials of Economics, 2e 10, 35

Burt Supply Management, 8e 78

CCachon Matching Supply with Demand: An Introduction to Operations Management, 2e 65, 78

Cai/Lin Chinese Economy [Asian] 62

Cecchetti Money, Banking and Financial Markets, 2e 52

Cherunilam International Economics, 5e [India] 55

Chiang Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Economics, 4e 51

112

AUTHOR INDEX

Cleland Project Management, 5e 85

Colander Economics, 7e 17

Colander Macroeconomics, 7e 26

Colander Microeconomics, 7e 33

Cole Annual Editions: Economics, 35e 20, 39

Cooper Business Reserach Methods, 10e 98

DDavis Operations Management: Integrating Manufacturing and Services, 5e 69

DeLong Macroeconomics, 2e 43

Delurgio Forecasting, Principles and Application 97

Dewhurst Quantitative Methods for Business, 2e [UK] 71

Dine State of the Unions: How Labor Can Strengthen the Middle Class, Improve Our Economy, and Regain Political 57

Influence

Diulio Schaum’s Outline of Macroeconomics, 3e 21

Doane Applied Statistics in Business and Economics with Student CD, 2e 91

Doane Essentials Statistics in Business and Economics 92

Doane Essentials Statistics in Business and Economics, 2e 89

Dornbusch Macroeconomics, 10e 42

Dornbusch Macroeconomics, 2e [Aust] 43

Dowling Schaum’s Easy Outline of Introduction to Mathematical Economics 51

Dowling Schaum’s Outline of Introduction to Mathematical Economics, 3e 52

FField Environmental Economics, 5e 47

Finch Interactive Models for Operations and Supply Chain Management with CD 68

Finch Operations Now: Supply Chain Profitability and Performance with Student DVD, 3e 67

Fitzsimmons Service Management, 6e 76

Frank Microeconomics and Behavior, 7e 44

Frank Principles of Economics [Asian] 12

Frank Principles of Economics, 4e 10

Frank Principles of Economics, Brief Edition 12

Frank Principles of Macroeconomics, 4e 23

Frank Principles of Macroeconomics, Brief Edition 24

Frank Principles of Microeconomics [Aust] 34

Frank Principles of Microeconomics, 2e [Aust] 33

Frank Principles of Microeconomics, 4e 29

Frank Principles of Microeconomics, Brief Edition 29

Frazelle World-Class Warehousing and Material Handling 84

113

AUTHOR INDEX

GGitlow Quality Management, 3e 75

Grant Statistical Quality Control, 7e 76

Gray Project Management: The Managerial Process, 4e 73

Grichnik Make or Break: How Manufacturers Can Leap from Decline to Revitalization 74

Gryna Quality Planning and Analysis: From Product Development Through Use, 5e 75

Guell Issues in Economics Today, 4e 40

Gujarati Basic Econometrics, 5e 48

Gujarati Essentials of Econometrics, 3e 49

Gujarati Essentials of Econometrics, 4e 48

Gupta Macroeconomics: Theory and Policy, 3e [India] 42

HHeerkens Project Management: 24 Steps to Help You Master Any Project 85

Heracleous Flying High in a Competitive Industry: Cost Effective Service Excellence at Singapore Airlines 77

Hillier Introduction to Management Science: A Modeling and Case Studies Approach with Spreadsheets, 3e 70

Hillier Introduction to Operations Research, 9e 83

Hopp Factory Physics, 3e 72

Hopp Supply Chain Science 79

JJackson Economic Principles, 2e [Aust] 18

Jackson Macroeconomics, 8e [Aust] 27

Jackson Microeconomics, 8e [Aust] 35

Jacobs Operations and Supply Management 68

Jacobs Operations and Supply Management, 12e 66

Johnston Econometric Methods, 4e 50

Jonsson Logistics & Supply Chain Management [UK] 79

Juran Juran’s Quality Control Handbook, 5e 76

KKatz Microeconomics, 3e 45

Kazmier Schaum’s Easy Outline of Business Statistics 96

Kazmier Schaum’s Outline of Business Statistics, 4e 96

King International Economics, Globalization, and Policy: A Reader, 5e 53

Knod Operations Management, 7e 69

Kros Spreadsheet Modeling for Business Decisions 70

Kutner Applied Linear Statistical Models, 5e 99

114

AUTHOR INDEX

LLeenders Purchasing and Supply Management, 13e 82

Leong Business Modeling with Spreadsheet [Asian] 69

Lerner Schaum’s Outline of Basic Business Mathematics, 2e 104

Lewis Mastering Project Management: Applying Advanced Concepts to Systems Thinking, Control & Evaluation, 84

Resource Allocation, 2e

Li Hong Kong Economy: From Recovery to Restructure (The) [Asian] 62

Lind Basic Statistics for Business and Economics, 6e 92

Lind Basic Statistics Using Excel for Use with Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 1e 95

Lind Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 13e 93

Lind Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 14e 89

MMandel Economics: The Basics 37

Marshall Decision Making and Forecasting 97

McConnell Contemporary Labor Economics, 8e 57

McConnell Economics, 18e 14

McConnell Macroeconomics, 18e 24

McConnell Macroeconomics, Brief Edition 22

McConnell Microeconomics, 18e 30

McConnell Microeconomics, Brief Edition 28

McDowell Principles of Economics, 2e [UK] 13

Miller Principles of Microeconomics 31

Morgan Microeconomics, 2e [UK] 43

Moss Concise Guide to Macroeconomics 27

NNahmias Production and Operations Analysis, 6e 71

Navarro Power of Microeconomics CD-ROM (The) 19

Nello European Union: Economics, Policies and History, 2e (The) [UK] 61

Neter Applied Linear Regression Models, 4e 99

Nieuwenhuis Statistics for Business, Economics, Management & Finance 93

OO’Sullivan Urban Economics, 7e 58

Olson Introduction to Business Data Mining 82

Olson Introduction to Information Systems Project Management: A Systems Approach, 2e 74

Orris Basic Statistics Using Excel and Megastat 94

115

AUTHOR INDEX

PPaul Business Environment, 2e [India] 48

Pindyck Econometric Models and Economic Forecasts, 4e 50

Pinto SimProject Version 2.0 Passcode (Standalone) with MS Project 2007, 4e 73

Pugel International Economics, 14e 54

RRangarajan Supply Chain Management [India] 80

Rickard Economics of Organizations and Strategy (The) [UK] 46

Rosen Public Finance, 8e 60

SSalvatore Schaum’s Outline of Easy Outline of Principles of Economics 20

Salvatore Schaum’s Outline of International Economics, 4e 56

Salvatore Schaum’s Outline of Microeconomic Theory, 4e 60

Salvatore Schaum’s Outline of Principles of Economics, 2e 21

Salvatore Schaum’s Outline of Statistics and Econometrics, 2e 50, 96

Samuelson Economics, 18e 19

Samuelson Economics, 19e 10

Samuelson Macroeconomics, 18e 28

Samuelson Macroeconomics, 19e 22

Samuelson Microeconomics, 18e 35

Samuelson Microeconomics, 19e 29

Sanders Statistics: A First Course, 6e 95

Schiller Economy Today, 11e (The) 17

Schiller Essentials of Economics, 7e 38

Schiller Macro Economy Today, 11e (The) 26

Schiller Micro Economy Today, 11e (The) 34

Schmidt Econometrics 49

Schroeder Operations Management: Contemporary Concepts and Cases, 4e 68

Seidman Public Finance 58

Sharma Data Interpretation and Logical Reasoning for CAT, 3e [India] 99

Sharp Economics of Social Issues, 18e 41

Siegel Practical Business Statistics, 5e 95

Silberberg Structure of Economics: A Mathematical Analysis, 3e (The) 51

Simchi-Levi Designing and Managing the Supply Chain, 3e 80

Slater Practical Business Math Procedures, 9e 103

Slater Practical Business Math Procedures, Brief Edition, 9e 104

Slavin Economics, 8e 18

Slavin Economics, 9e 16

116

AUTHOR INDEX

Slavin Macroeconomics, 8e 27

Slavin Macroeconomics, 9e 25

Slavin Microeconomics, 8e 34

Slavin Microeconomics, 9e 32

Spiegel Schaum’s Outline of Probability and Statistics, 3e 95

Srivastava Statistics for Management [India] 94

Stephens Schaum’s Outline of Beginning Statistics, 2e 96

Sterman Business Dynamics: Systems Thinking and Modeling for a Complex World 65

Stevenson Introduction to Management Science 70

Stevenson Operations Management, 10e 67

TTaylor Mathematics for Economics and Business [UK] 50

Thomas Managerial Economics, 9e 46

Thomke Managing Project and Service Development: Text and Cases 73

VVohra Quantitative Techniques in Management, 3e [India] 71

Vollmann Manufacturing Planning and Control Systems, 5e 72

WWebster Principles and Tools for Supply Chain Management with Student CD-ROM 81

Wilson Business Forecasting, 6e 97

EXAMINATION COPY REQUEST FORM

McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)60 Tuas Basin LinkSingapore 638775Tel (65) 6863 1580Fax (65) 6862 3354

www.mheducation.asia

u Professors/lecturers who are interested to review titles listed in this catalog for text adoption consideration, please complete this request form and fax to your local McGraw-Hill office (see inside back cover for fax number) or to McGraw-Hill Singapore.

u Requests for examination copies are subject to approval. McGraw-Hill reserve the right to refuse any requests which do not relate to teaching.

u Please make copies of this form if necessary.

REQUESTED BY

Name Room #

Department

University

Address

Tel Fax

Email address

COMP REQUEST

Please indicate ISBN No, Author & Title

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

Course Name Enrolment

Subject Commencement Date

Decision Date Individual Decision Group Decision

Current Text Used

Please include me in your mailing list for information on McGraw-Hill books.

Please email information on McGraw-Hill books to my email address at

I am already on your mailing list but my address has changed. Please update my record to the following new address.

Name

(Mr / Ms / Dr / Prof) (Underline family name)

Position

Department

University

Address

Postal Code

Tel Fax

Email address

SUBJECT OF INTERESTo Accounting

o Advertising

o Business Management

o Finance & Investment

o Marketing

o Economics

o Human Resource Management

o Insurance & Real Estate

o Training

o Computing

o Aeronautical & Aerospace Engineering

o Architecture & Urban Planning

o Chemical Engineering

o Civil Engineering

o Construction

o Electronics & Communications

o Electrical Engineering

o General Engineering

o Industrial & Plant Engineering

o Mechanical Engineering

o Medical Science

o Dentistry

o Nursing

o Agriculture

o Biology

o Chemistry

o Forestry

o Geography & Geology

o Physics & Astronomy

o Zoology

o Mathematics & Statistics

o Art & Humanities

o Education

o English

o English as a 2nd Language/ELT

o Foreign Language

o Health & Nutrition

McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) respects your privacy. If you do not wish to receive further marketing information

from McGraw-Hill Education (Asia), please send an email to [email protected] or write

to McGraw-Hill Education (Asia), 60 Tuas Basin Link, Singapore 638775. View The McGraw-Hill Companies

Customer Privacy Policy at http://www.mcgraw-hill.com/privacy.html. For questions or to learn more about how McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) applies this policy, please

contact us at the above email or postal address.

M c G R A W - H I L L M A I L I N G L I S T

McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)60 Tuas Basin LinkSingapore 638775Tel (65) 6863 1580Fax (65) 6862 3354

www.mheducation.asia

o History

o Law

o Library Science

o Mass Communication

o Music

o Philosophy & Religion

o Physical Education

o Political Science

o Psychology

o Sociology

Please return by fax at (65) 6862 3354 to McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Singapore office.

M c G R AW - H I L L E D U C A T I O N ( A S I A )

CHINA(Representative Office)

McGraw-Hill Int’l Enterprises, IncSuite 906, 9/F, SP Tower ATsinghua Science ParkNo. 1, Zhongguancun East RoadHaidian DistrictBeijing 100084, P R ChinaTel: (86-10) 6279 0299Fax: (86-10) 6279 0292eMail: [email protected]

HONG KONGMcGraw-Hill Int’l Enterprises, IncSuites 2906-10, Shell TowerTimes Square1, Matheson Street, Causeway BayHong KongTel: (85-2) 2730 6640Fax: (85-2) 2730 2085eMail: [email protected]

INDIA(also servicing Bangladesh, Pakistan, Nepal & Sri Lanka)McGraw-Hill Education (India) LimitedB-4, Sector 63Distt Gautam Budh NagarNoida, UP-201301, IndiaTel: (91-12) 438 3545Fax: (91-12) 438 3401 - 403eMail: [email protected]

INDONESIA(Appointed Agent)P T Media Global EdukasiGrand Boutique Center, Blok D-65Jalan Mangga Dua RayaJakarta 14430IndonesiaTel: (62-21) 601 1963/601 1973Fax: (62-21) 625 7245eMail: [email protected]

JAPANMcGraw-Hill Education Japan1-12-3 Kandasuda-choChiyoda-kuTokyo 101-0041JapanTel: (81-3) 5298 7221Fax: (81-3) 5298 7224eMail: [email protected]

KOREAMcGraw-Hill Korea Inc3F, Ji-Woo Bldg376-12 Seokyo-DongMapo-KuSeoul 121-210, KoreaTel: (82-2) 325 2351Fax: (82-2) 325 2371eMail: [email protected]

MALAYSIA/BRUNEIMcGraw-Hill Malaysia Sdn BhdNo. 40, Jalan Pengacara U1/48Temasya Industrial Park40150 Shah AlamSelangor Darul Ehsan, MalaysiaTel: (60-3) 7627 6888Fax: (60-3) 7627 6838eMail: [email protected]

PHILIPPINES(also servicing Guam)(Representative Office)McGraw-Hill Int’l Enterprises, IncUnit 1503, Jollibee Plaza CondominiumEmerald Avenue Corner Ruby StreetOrtigas Center, Pasig City 1600PhilippinesTel: (63-2) 638 5177 / 638 5178Fax: (63-2) 638 5181eMail: [email protected]

TAIWANMcGraw-Hill Int’l Enterprises, Inc7/F, No: 53 Bo-Ai RoadTaipei 100TaiwanTel: (886-2) 2311 3000Fax: (886-2) 2388 8822eMail: [email protected]

THAILAND(also servicing Cambodia & Laos) McGraw-Hill Int’l Enterprises, Inc40/27 Soi Inthamara 8Suthisarn Road, PhayathaiBangkok 10400, ThailandTel: (66-2) 615 6555Fax: (66-2) 615 6515eMail: [email protected]

VIETNAM(Representative Office)

McGraw-Hill Int’l Enterprises, Inc

Unit 701-6, Regus Business Center 7th Floor, Me Linh Point Tower 2 Ngo Duc Ke Street District 1, Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam Tel: (84-8) 3520 2781 Fax: (84-8) 3823 7840 eMail: [email protected]

SINGAPORE(also servicing Mauritius)

McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)60 Tuas Basin Link, Singapore 638775Tel: (65) 6863 1580 • Customer Service Hotline: (65) 6868 8188Fax (65) 6862 3354eMail: [email protected] • website: www.mheducation.asia

McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)60 Tuas Basin LinkSingapore 638775Tel (65) 6863 1580Fax (65) 6862 3354email: [email protected]: www.mheducation.asia

ONLINE ASSESSMENT

Homework ManagerHomework Manager is a powerful new online system for homework, testing and quizzing. It may be used in practice, homework or exam mode and other assignment modes. The exercises and problems are textbook-specific and it offers algorithmic generated questions. The assignments are automatically graded for instructors with instant grading and feedback for students.

www.mhhe.com/hm

COURSE MANAGEMENT

SYSTEMS

PageOutPageOut offers instructors an easy way to create a course Website. Students can follow their syllabus for coursework, readings, quizzes, or daily assignments. With simple development and powerful features, it’s little wonder why PageOut continues to be the tool instructors count on most for creating course Websites.

asia.pageout.net

Third Party Delivery SystemsCourse Management Systems like Blackboard and WebCT offer instructors another way to integrate digital McGraw-Hill content into their class. Should they choose one of these Course Management Systems, they can be confident in knowing that delivering McGraw-Hill digital content will be simple to use.

We publish digital solutions

McGraw-Hill Higher Education offers a wide variety of online products categorized by content, course management systems, and online assessment. Content products offer online McGraw-Hill coursework that complements the textbook. Course management systems offer different ways to actually deliver that McGraw-Hill digital content. And online assessment products focus on how well students are doing in class.

No matter which product our customers choose, they count on unparalleled service that answers every question through the life of the adoption.

CONTENT

Online Learning CenterThese new and improved sites offer instructors an instant online presence with a ready-to-go Website that ties directly to their book. Students can visit the site for key terms, quizzes, exercises, and more. Instructors can have this book-specific content delivered in PageOut of other course management systems like Blackboard or WebCT.

EZ TestEasy-to-use desktop test generator used for creating paper tests. Create paper tests from book specific test banks or write your own algorithmic questions using simple question templates. You can also create multiple versions of the same test.

www.mhhe.com/eztest

C08-000619-X

economics & decision science - mcgraw-hill books - author books

Documents